Siemens TC35 Terminal Specifications

Siemens Cellular Engines
TC35i Module
TC35i Terminal
Version: 01.05
DocID: TC35i_ATC_V01.05
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Document Name:
TC35i AT Command Set
Siemens Cellular Engines
Version:
Date:
Doc Id:
Status:
01.05
August 04, 2003
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Confidential / Released
General Notes
Product is deemed accepted by recipient and is provided without interface to recipient’s products. The
documentation and/or product are provided for testing, evaluation, integration and information purposes. The documentation and/or product are provided on an “as is” basis only and may contain deficiencies or inadequacies. The documentation and/or product are provided without warranty of any
kind, express or implied. To the maximum extent permitted by applicable law, Siemens further disclaims all warranties, including without limitation any implied warranties of merchantability, completeness, fitness for a particular purpose and non-infringement of third-party rights. The entire risk arising
out of the use or performance of the product and documentation remains with recipient. This product is
not intended for use in life support appliances, devices or systems where a malfunction of the product
can reasonably be expected to result in personal injury. Applications incorporating the described product must be designed to be in accordance with the technical specifications provided in these guidelines. Failure to comply with any of the required procedures can result in malfunctions or serious discrepancies in results. Furthermore, all safety instructions regarding the use of mobile technical systems, including GSM products, which also apply to cellular phones must be followed. Siemens or its
suppliers shall, regardless of any legal theory upon which the claim is based, not be liable for any consequential, incidental, direct, indirect, punitive or other damages whatsoever (including, without limitation, damages for loss of business profits, business interruption, loss of business information or data,
or other pecuniary loss) arising out the use of or inability to use the documentation and/or product,
even if Siemens has been advised of the possibility of such damages. The foregoing limitations of liability shall not apply in case of mandatory liability, e.g. under the German Product Liability Act, in
case of intent, gross negligence, injury of life, body or health, or breach of a condition which goes to
the root of the contract. However, claims for damages arising from a breach of a condition, which goes
to the root of the contract, shall be limited to the foreseeable damage, which is intrinsic to the contract,
unless caused by intent or gross negligence or based on liability for injury of life, body or health. The
above provision does not imply a change on the burden of proof to the detriment of the recipient. Subject to change without notice at any time. The interpretation of this general note shall be governed and
construed according to German law without reference to any other substantive law.
Copyright
Transmittal, reproduction, dissemination and/or editing of this document as well as utilization of its
contents and communication thereof to others without express authorization are prohibited. Offenders
will be held liable for payment of damages. All rights created by patent grant or registration of a utility
model or design patent are reserved.
Copyright © Siemens AG 2003
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 2 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Contents
0
Document history .........................................................................................9
1
Introduction .................................................................................................11
1.1
1.2
1.3
1.4
1.4.1
1.4.2
1.4.3
1.5
1.6
1.6.1
1.6.2
Scope of the document ...........................................................................................................11
Related documents .................................................................................................................12
Conventions and abbreviations...............................................................................................13
AT command syntax ...............................................................................................................13
Using parameters....................................................................................................................13
Combining AT commands on the same command line ..........................................................14
Entering successive AT commands on separate lines ...........................................................14
Supported character sets ........................................................................................................15
Flow control .............................................................................................................................16
Software flow control (XON/OFF flow control) ........................................................................16
Hardware flow control (RTS/CTS flow control) .......................................................................16
2
Standard V.25ter AT Commands ...............................................................17
2.1
2.2
2.3
2.4
2.5
2.6
2.7
2.8
2.9
2.10
2.11
2.12
2.13
2.14
2.15
2.16
2.17
2.18
2.19
2.20
2.21
2.22
2.23
2.24
2.25
2.26
2.27
2.28
2.29
2.30
2.31
2.32
2.33
2.34
2.35
2.36
2.37
2.38
A/ Repeat previous command line .........................................................................................17
+++ Switch from data mode to command mode ....................................................................17
AT\Qn Flow control ................................................................................................................18
ATA Answer a call..................................................................................................................19
ATD Mobile originated call to dial a number ..........................................................................20
ATD><mem><n> Originate call to phone number <n> in memory <mem> ..........................23
ATD><n> Originate call to phone number selected from active memory ..............................25
ATD><str> Originate call to phone number in memory with corresponding field ..................26
ATDI Mobile originated call to dialable ISDN number <n> ....................................................27
ATDL Redial last telephone number used .............................................................................28
ATE Enable command echo ..................................................................................................29
ATH Disconnect existing connection .....................................................................................29
ATI Display product identification information........................................................................30
ATI[value] Display additional identification information..........................................................30
ATL Set monitor speaker loudness........................................................................................31
ATM Set monitor speaker mode ............................................................................................31
ATO Switch from command mode to data mode...................................................................31
ATQ Set result code presentation mode................................................................................32
ATP Select pulse dialing ........................................................................................................32
ATS0 Set number of rings before automatically answering the call ......................................32
ATS3 Write command line termination character ..................................................................33
ATS4 Set response formatting character...............................................................................33
ATS5 Write command line editing character..........................................................................33
ATS6 Set pause before blind dialing......................................................................................33
ATS7 Set number of seconds to wait for connection completion ..........................................34
ATS8 Set number of seconds to wait for comma dial modifier ..............................................34
ATS10 Set disconnect delay after indicating the absence of data carrier .............................34
ATS18 Extended error report.................................................................................................35
ATT Select tone dialing ..........................................................................................................36
ATV Set result code format mode..........................................................................................36
ATX Set CONNECT result code format and call monitoring..................................................36
ATZ Set all current parameters to user defined profile ..........................................................37
AT&C Set circuit Data Carrier Detect (DCD) function mode..................................................37
AT&D Set circuit Data Terminal Ready (DTR) function mode ...............................................38
AT&F Set all current parameters to manufacturer defaults ...................................................39
AT&S Set circuit Data Set Ready (DSR) function mode........................................................41
AT&V Display current configuration .......................................................................................42
AT&W Store current configuration to user defined profile .....................................................44
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 3 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.39
2.40
2.41
2.42
2.43
2.44
2.45
2.46
2.47
2.47.1
AT+GCAP Request complete TA capabilities list ..................................................................46
AT+GMI Request manufacturer identification........................................................................46
AT+GMM Request TA model identification............................................................................46
AT+GMR Request TA revision identification of software status ............................................47
AT+GSN Request TA serial number identification(IMEI).......................................................47
AT+ICF Set TE-TA control character framing........................................................................48
AT+IFC Set Flow Control separately for data directions .......................................................50
AT+ILRR Set TE-TA local rate reporting ...............................................................................52
AT+IPR Set fixed local rate....................................................................................................53
Autobauding ............................................................................................................................54
3
AT Commands for FAX...............................................................................55
3.1
3.2
3.3
3.4
3.5
3.6
3.7
3.8
3.9
3.10
3.11
3.12
3.13
3.14
3.15
3.16
3.17
3.18
3.19
3.20
3.21
3.22
3.23
3.24
3.25
3.26
3.27
AT+FBADLIN Bad Line Threshold .........................................................................................56
AT+FBADMUL Error Threshold Multiplier..............................................................................56
AT+FBOR Query data bit order .............................................................................................57
AT+FCIG Query or set the Local polling id ............................................................................58
AT+FCLASS Fax: Select, read or test service class .............................................................58
AT+FCQ Copy Quality Checking ...........................................................................................59
AT+FCR Capability to receive................................................................................................59
AT+FDCC Query or set capabilities.......................................................................................60
AT+FDFFC Data Compression Format Conversion ..............................................................61
AT+FDIS Query or set session parameters...........................................................................62
AT+FDR Begin or continue phase C data reception..............................................................63
AT+FDT Data Transmission ..................................................................................................63
AT+FET End a page or document .........................................................................................64
AT+FK Kill operation, orderly FAX abort................................................................................64
AT+FLID Query or set the Local Id setting capabilities .........................................................64
AT+FMDL Identify Product Model..........................................................................................65
AT+FMFR Request Manufacturer Identification ....................................................................65
AT+FOPT Set bit order independently...................................................................................65
AT+FPHCTO DTE Phase C Response Timeout ...................................................................66
AT+FREV Identify Product Revision ......................................................................................66
AT+FRH Receive Data Using HDLC Framing .......................................................................66
AT+FRM Receive Data ..........................................................................................................67
AT+FRS Receive Silence ......................................................................................................67
AT+FTH Transmit Data Using HDLC Framing ......................................................................67
AT+FTM Transmit Data .........................................................................................................68
AT+FTS Stop Transmission and Wait ...................................................................................68
AT+FVRFC Vertical resolution format conversion .................................................................69
4
AT Commands originating from GSM 07.07 .............................................70
4.1
4.2
4.3
4.4
4.5
4.6
4.6.1
4.7
4.8
4.9
4.10
4.11
4.11.1
4.12
4.13
4.14
4.15
AT+CACM Accumulated call meter (ACM) reset or query ....................................................70
AT+CALA Set alarm time.......................................................................................................71
AT+CAMM Accumulated call meter maximum (ACMmax) set or query................................74
AT+CAOC Advice of Charge information ..............................................................................75
AT+CBST Select bearer service type ....................................................................................76
AT+CCFC Call forwarding number and conditions control....................................................77
Examples: Call forwarding ......................................................................................................78
AT+CCLK Real Time Clock ...................................................................................................80
AT+CCUG: Closed User Group ..............................................................................................81
AT+CCWA Call waiting ..........................................................................................................82
AT+CEER Extended error report ...........................................................................................85
AT+CFUN Set phone functionality .........................................................................................87
Wake up the ME from SLEEP mode.......................................................................................90
AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification ......................................................................91
AT+CGMM Request model identification...............................................................................91
AT+CGMR Request revision identification of software status ...............................................91
AT+CGSN Request product serial number identification (IMEI) identical to GSN ................92
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 4 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.16
4.17
4.18
4.19
4.20
4.21
4.21.1
4.21.2
4.21.3
4.22
4.23
4.24
4.25
4.26
4.27
4.28
4.28.1
4.29
4.30
4.31
4.32
4.33
4.34
4.35
4.35.1
4.36
4.37
4.38
4.39
4.40
4.41
4.42
4.43
4.44
4.45
4.46
4.47
4.48
4.49
4.50
4.51
AT+CHLD Call hold and multiparty ........................................................................................93
AT+CHUP Hang up call .........................................................................................................96
AT+CIMI Request international mobile subscriber identity....................................................96
AT+CIND Indicator control .....................................................................................................97
AT+CLCC List current calls of ME .......................................................................................100
AT+CLCK Facility lock .........................................................................................................101
Examples: Enabling / disabling PIN 1 authentication ...........................................................104
Examples: Phone lock...........................................................................................................104
Examples: Call barring ..........................................................................................................106
AT+CLIP Calling line identification presentation..................................................................107
AT+CLIR Calling line identification restriction......................................................................108
AT+CLVL Loudspeaker volume level ..................................................................................109
AT+CMEE Report mobile equipment error ..........................................................................110
AT+CMER Mobile equipment event reporting .....................................................................111
AT+CMUT Mute control .......................................................................................................113
AT+CMUX Enter multiplex mode .........................................................................................114
Restricted use of AT commands in Multiplex mode..............................................................115
AT+COPN Read operator names ........................................................................................117
AT+COPS Operator selection..............................................................................................118
AT+CPAS Mobile equipment activity status ........................................................................121
AT+CPBR Read current phone book entries.......................................................................122
AT+CPBS Select phone book memory storage...................................................................124
AT+CPBW Write phone book entry .....................................................................................126
AT+CPIN Enter PIN .............................................................................................................129
What to do if PIN or password authentication fails? .............................................................132
AT+CPIN2 Enter PIN2 .........................................................................................................134
AT+CPUC Price per unit and currency table .......................................................................135
AT+CPWD Change password .............................................................................................137
AT+CR Service reporting control .........................................................................................140
AT+CRC Set Cellular Result Codes for incoming call indication.........................................141
AT+CREG Network registration ...........................................................................................142
AT+CRLP Select radio link protocol param. for orig. non-transparent data call ..................145
AT+CRSM Restricted SIM access .......................................................................................146
AT+CSCS Set TE character set...........................................................................................147
AT+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme ................................................................................148
AT+CSQ Signal quality ........................................................................................................149
AT+CSSN Supplementary service notifications...................................................................150
AT+CUSD Unstructured supplementary service data .........................................................151
AT+VTD=<n> Tone duration................................................................................................152
AT+VTS DTMF and tone generation (<Tone> in {0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D}) .............................153
AT+WS46 Select wireless network .......................................................................................154
5
AT commands originating from GSM 07.05 for SMS .............................155
5.1
5.2
5.3
5.4
5.5
5.6
5.7
5.8
5.9
5.10
5.11
5.12
5.13
5.14
5.15
5.16
AT+CMGC Send an SMS command ...................................................................................155
AT+CMGD Delete SMS message........................................................................................156
AT+CMGF Select SMS message format .............................................................................156
AT+CMGL List SMS messages from preferred store ..........................................................157
AT+CMGR Read SMS message .........................................................................................160
AT+CMGS Send SMS message..........................................................................................163
AT+CMGW Write SMS message to memory.......................................................................165
AT+CMSS Send SMS message from storage.....................................................................167
AT+CNMA New SMS message acknowledge to ME/TE, only phase 2+ ............................168
AT+CNMI New SMS message indications ..........................................................................169
AT+CPMS Preferred SMS message storage ......................................................................172
AT+CSCA SMS service centre address ..............................................................................174
AT+CSCB Select cell broadcast messages.........................................................................175
AT+CSDH Show SMS text mode parameters .....................................................................176
AT+CSMP Set SMS text mode parameters.........................................................................177
AT+CSMS Select Message Service ....................................................................................178
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 5 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
6
AT Commands for SIM Application Toolkit (GSM 11.14).......................179
6.1
6.2
6.3
6.4
AT^SSTA Remote-SAT Interface Activation.........................................................................180
^SSTN Remote-SAT Notification ..........................................................................................181
AT^SSTGI Remote-SAT Get Information .............................................................................182
AT^SSTR Remote-SAT Response .......................................................................................183
7
Siemens defined AT commands for enhanced functions .....................184
7.1
7.2
7.3
7.4
7.5
7.6
7.7
7.8
7.9
7.10
7.11
7.12
7.13
7.14
7.15
7.16
7.17
7.18
7.19
7.20
7.21
7.22
7.23
7.24
7.25
7.26
7.27
7.28
7.29
7.30
7.31
7.32
7.33
7.34
7.35
7.36
7.37
7.38
7.39
7.40
7.41
7.42
7.43
7.44
7.45
7.46
7.47
7.48
7.49
7.50
7.51
7.51.1
AT+CXXCID Display card ID (identical to AT^SCID)...........................................................184
AT^MONI Monitor idle mode and dedicated mode ..............................................................185
AT^MONP Monitor neighbour cells......................................................................................188
AT^SACM Advice of charge and query of ACM and ACMmax ...........................................189
AT^SAIC Audio Interface Configuration..............................................................................190
AT^SBC Battery charge and charger control .......................................................................191
AT^SBV Battery / supply voltage .........................................................................................194
AT^SCID Display SIM card identification number................................................................195
AT^SCKS Set SIM connection presentation mode and query SIM connection status ........196
AT^SCNI List Call Number Information ...............................................................................197
AT^SCTM Set critical operating temperature presentation mode or query temperature.....198
AT^SDLD Delete the “last number redial“ memory..............................................................200
AT^SHOM Display Homezone.............................................................................................200
AT^SLCD Display Last Call Duration...................................................................................200
AT^SLCK Facility lock ..........................................................................................................201
AT^SLMS List Memory Storage...........................................................................................204
AT^SM20 Set M20 Compatibility .........................................................................................205
AT^SMGL List SMS messages from preferred storage.......................................................206
AT^SMGR Read SMS message without set to REC READ ................................................206
AT^SMGO Set or query SMS overflow presentation mode or query SMS overflow ...........207
AT^SMONC Cell Monitoring ................................................................................................208
AT^SMOND Selective cell monitoring .................................................................................209
AT^SMSO Switch off mobile station ....................................................................................212
AT^SNFA Set or query microphone attenuation..................................................................213
Audio programming model ....................................................................................................214
AT^SNFD Set audio parameters to manufacturer default values........................................215
AT^SNFI Set microphone path parameters .........................................................................216
AT^SNFM Mute microphone................................................................................................217
AT^SNFO Set audio output (= loudspeaker path) parameter..............................................218
AT^SNFPT Call progress tones ..........................................................................................220
AT^SNFS Select audio hardware set...................................................................................221
AT^SNFV Set loudspeaker volume......................................................................................224
AT^SNFW Write audio setting in non-volatile store .............................................................225
AT^SPBC Search the first entry in the sorted telephone book ............................................226
AT^SPBD Delete the given phone book ..............................................................................227
AT^SPBG Read entry from active telephone book via sorted index ...................................228
AT^SPBS Step through the selected phone book alphabetically ........................................231
AT^SPIC Display PIN counter..............................................................................................234
AT^SPLM Read the PLMN list .............................................................................................236
AT^SPLR Read entry from the preferred operators list .......................................................237
AT^SPLW Write an entry to the preferred operators list......................................................238
AT^SPWD Change password for a lock ..............................................................................239
AT^SRTC Select, query, test ring tone parameters.............................................................241
AT^SSCONF SMS Configuration........................................................................................243
AT^SSDA Set Display Availability.......................................................................................244
AT^SSET Settings for Unsolicited Result Code "SIM READY" ...........................................245
AT^SSMSS Set Short Message Storage Sequence...........................................................246
AT^SSYNC Configure SYNC Pin.........................................................................................247
AT^STCD Display Total Call Duration .................................................................................248
AT\V Set CONNECT result code format ..............................................................................248
AT%D Automatic dial on DTR line activation.......................................................................249
Autodialing responses...........................................................................................................250
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 6 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8
APPENDIX .................................................................................................251
8.1
8.1.1
8.1.2
8.1.3
8.1.4
8.1.5
8.1.6
8.1.7
8.1.8
8.1.9
8.1.10
8.1.11
8.1.12
8.1.13
8.1.14
8.1.15
8.1.16
8.1.17
8.1.18
8.2
8.3
8.4
8.4.1
8.5
8.6
Summary of ERRORS and Messages..................................................................................251
Summary of CME ERRORS related to GSM 07.07..............................................................251
Summary of CMS ERRORS related to GSM 07.05..............................................................253
Summary of Unsolicited Result Codes (URC) ......................................................................256
Result codes .........................................................................................................................259
Cause Location ID for the extended error report (AT+CEER) ..............................................260
GSM release cause for L3 Radio Resource (RR) (AT+CEER) ...........................................260
SIEMENS release cause for L3 Radio Resource (RR) (AT+CEER) ...................................261
GSM release cause for Mobility Management (MM) (AT+CEER) ........................................262
SIEMENS release cause for L3 Mobility Management (MM) (AT+CEER) ...........................263
GSM release cause for L3 Call Control (CC) (AT+CEER) ...................................................263
SIEMENS release cause for L3 Call Control (CC) (AT+CEER) ...........................................264
SIEMENS release cause for L3 Advice of Charge (AOC) (AT+CEER) ...............................265
GSM release cause for Supplementary Service call (AT+CEER) ........................................265
Siemens release cause for Call related Supplementary Services (CRSS) (AT+CEER) ....266
SIEMENS cause for Supplementary Services Entity............................................................266
SIEMENS cause for Supplementary Services Manager.......................................................267
GSM release cause for Session Management (SM) (AT+CEER) ........................................268
GSM cause for L3 Protocol module or other local cause (AT+CEER) .................................268
Summary of PIN requiring AT Commands............................................................................269
AT commands available before entering the SIM PIN..........................................................271
Standard GSM service codes ...............................................................................................273
Additional notes on ^SCCFC, +CCWA, ^SCLCK .................................................................275
GSM alphabet tables and UCS2 character values ...............................................................276
Sort order for phone books ...................................................................................................278
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 7 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Figures
Figure 1: AT audio programming model...............................................................................................214
Tables
Table 1: Product specific use of AT commands .....................................................................................11
Table 2: Types of AT commands and responses...................................................................................13
Table 3: Illegal combinations of AT commands......................................................................................14
Table 4: Character definitions depending on alphabet (examples)........................................................15
Table 5: Factory settings ........................................................................................................................39
Table 6: AT&V responses on channel 1 (with or without multiplex moded enabled) .............................42
Table 7: AT&V responses on channel2 or 3 (with multiplex moded enabled) .......................................43
Table 8: List of settings stored to user profile on multiplex channel 1 ...................................................44
Table 9: List of settings stored to user profile on multiplex channel 2 and 3 .........................................45
Table 10: Service Classes supported by ME .........................................................................................55
Table 11: Summary of AT commands available in Alarm mode ............................................................73
Table 12: Wake-up events in NON-CYCLIC and CYCLIC SLEEP modes ............................................90
Table 13: Availability of AT commands on virtual channels .................................................................115
Table 14: Summary of AT commands with different behavior in Multiplex mode ...............................116
Table 15: Timing algorithm of incorrect password input.......................................................................132
Table 16: Summary of AT commands available in Charge-only and Alarm mode ..............................193
Table 17: Functions of the ME indicated by status LED (if <mode> = 1):............................................247
Table 18: Summary of URCs................................................................................................................256
Table 19: Summary of Fax Class 2 URCs defined by EIA PN-2388 ...................................................258
Table 20: GSM service codes ..............................................................................................................273
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 8 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
0 Document history
This chapter reports modifications and improvements over previous versions of the document.
"AT Command Set" Version TC35i-ATC_V01.03=> TC35i-ATC_V01.05
Chapter
AT command
2.10
2.35
4.19
ATDL
AT&F
AT&V
3
4.2
4.11
4.19
4.28
4.35.1
4.33
5.6
4.41
4.39
7.17
7.24
7.27
7.29
What is new
Added note regarding “LD” phonebook.
Added to list of factory settings: CSSN, CUSD
Updated list of current settings. Added note regarding AT^SMGO.
Added note regarding ^CSDH.
AT Commands for FAX: Revised introduction. Modified table of supported Service
Classes.
AT+CALA
Modified description of parameter <n>.
Corrected notes on usage of alarm functions on several channels.
AT+CFUN
CYCLIC SLEEP mode requires hardware flow control.
Added note on how to set SLEEP mode if Mux mode is active.
AT+CIND
More detailed description of “call”.
AT+CMUX
Deleted notes regarding usage of +++ in Mux mode.
Deleted note regarding AT1^SMSO in Mux mode.
Updated Table 16.
--In subsection PIN1/PUK1, option AT+CPWD deleted.
AT+CPBS
“LD” phonebook only intended for voice call numbers.
AT+CMGS
More detailed description of send errors.
AT+CREG
More detailed description of parameters and log-in attempts.
AT+CR
Deleted note regarding influence of PLMN.
AT^SM20
Description of parameter <CmgwMode> applies also to
AT+CMGS.
AT^SNFA
More detailed description of parameters.
AT^SNFI
More detailed description of parameters.
AT^SNFO
Parameter <outCalibrate>: Corrected formula for the calculation of
volume steps.
"AT Command Set" Version TC35i-ATC_V00.01 => TC35i-ATC_V01.00
Chapter
AT command
Throughout document:
nd
2 cover page
2.3
AT\Qn
2.5
ATD
2.6
ATD><mem>
2.7
2.8
2.20
ATD><n>
ATD><str>
ATS0
2.35
AT&F
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
What is new
Applies to TC35i and TC35i Terminal.
New version of General Note
If XON/XOFF control is effective, send XON character to resume
data transmission prior to using +++ .
Further details on CUG. Added notes regarding blacklist. Further
details regarding responses returned after dialing with ATD.
Removed note that quotation marks (“”) are required for <mem> if
<mgsm> is used. Removed note regarding ATX.
Removed note regarding ATX.
Further details regarding usability autoanswer mode during multiplex mode.
Updated list of restored parameters.
Page 9 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Chapter
AT command
What is new
2.37
2.38
2.44
2.45
AT&V
AT&W
AT+ICF
AT+IFC
4.19
4.21
AT+CIND
AT+CLCK
4.25
4.26
AT+CME
AT+CMER
4.28
4.30
4.32
4.34
4.39
4.40
4.45
5.4
5.5
7.2
7.3
7.5
AT+CMUX
AT+COPS
AT+CPBR
AT+CPBW
AT+CR
AT+CRC
AT+CSNS
AT+ CMGL
AT+CMGR
AT^MONI
AT^MONP
AT^SAIC
7.6
AT^SBC
7.18
7.19
7.22
AT^SMGL
AT^SMGR
AT^SMOND
7.23
7.31
AT^SMSO
AT^SNFS
7.34
AT^SPBC
7.36
7.37
7.44
7.46
7.51
7.48
8.6
---
AT^SPBG
AT^SPBS
AT^SSCONF
AT^SSET
AT%D
AT^SSYNC
--AT+CMMS
Updated list of responses returned by AT&V
Updated list parameters storable to user profile.
Modified description of parameters. Added notes.
Modified parameter names. Revised description of commands and
parameters. Corrected syntax.
Renamed parameters to <indDescr> and <indValue>.
Added note regarding different result codes for voice and fax/data
calls in case of call release
Added chapter reference pointing to error code tables.
Deleted list of <descr> and <value>, as the full description is contained in Chapter 4.19. Renamed parameters to <indDescr> and
<indValue> of AT+CIND.
Multiplex mode requires 8 bits, no parity and 1 stop bit
Modified description of defaults of parameter <mode>.
More detailed description of parameters.
More detailed description of parameters.
Write command requires PIN. AT&W, AT&F apply.
AT&W, AT&F apply.
Dependency on PIN authentication explained.
New Error code: SIM busy
New Error code: SIM busy
Deleted note regarding RING line activation.
Deleted note regarding RING line activation.
Added instructions of how to use audio modes 2, 3 and 6 with
TC35i Terminal
Command does not apply to TC35i Terminal.
Modified description of overvoltage URCs.
New Error code: SIM busy
New Error code: SIM busy
More detailed description of parameters.
Deleted note regarding RING line activation.
Power-off procedure described in greater detail.
Added instructions and example of how to use audio modes 2, 3
and 6 with TC35i Terminal
More detailed description of parameters. Renamed parameter
<schar>.
More detailed description of parameters.
More detailed description of parameters.
Syntax of Write command corrected: <FF> is optional.
More detailed description of URC “^SSIM READY”
Modified and added error codes.
Extra notes regarding TC35i Terminal.
New chapter: “Sort order for phone books”
Chapter removed
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 10 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
1 Introduction
1.1
Scope of the document
This document presents the AT Command Set for the Siemens cellular engines
TC35i Module
TC35i Terminal
The AT commands detailed in this document are supported by both products. Where differences occur, they are noted in the chapter that refers to the command. In the present version, the only exceptions concern these commands:
Table 1: Product specific use of AT commands
AT command
AT+ILRR, Chapter 2.46
TC35i Module
Maximum bit rate: 230400 bps
TC35i Terminal
Maximum bit rate: 115200 bps
AT+IPR, Chapter 2.47
Maximum bit rate: 230400 bps
Maximum bit rate: 115200 bps
AT+CALA, Chapter 4.2
Alarm mode and reminder message fully applicable.
Does not support Alarm mode.
Please ignore any information relating to the subject.
The reminder message can be
used as described.
AT^SAIC, Chapter 7.5
AT^SNFS, Chapter 7.31
All parameters usable as described.
Additional recommendations for using audio modes 2, 3, and 6 with
TC35i Terminal
AT^SBC, Chapter 7.6
All functions fully applicable.
Command not relevant.
AT^SSYNC, Chapter 7.48
Factory default: <mode>=0
Factory default: <mode>=1
Both the TC35i Module and TC35i Terminal feature basic SIM Application Toolkit (SAT) functionality
which enables SIM cards to run additional network based applications, such as value added services,
online banking, information services etc. To give you an idea, Chapter 6 provides a brief overview. In
greater detail, the SAT functions and the required AT commands are described in [3].
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 11 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
1.2
Related documents
[1] TC35i Hardware Interface Description
[2] TC35i Terminal Hardware Interface Description
[3] Remote-SAT User's Guide
[4] Multiplexer User's Guide
[5] Multiplex Driver Developer’s Guide for Windows 2000 and Windows XP
[6] Multiplex Driver Installation Guide for Windows 2000 and Windows XP
[7] DSB35 Support Box – Evaluation Kit for Siemens Cellular Engines
[8] Application Note 02: Audio Interface Design for TC35i Modules
[9] Application Note 14: Audio and Battery Parameter Download
[10] Application Note 16: Upgrading TC35i Firmware
[11] Application Note 16: Upgrading TC35i Terminal Firmware
[12] TC35i Release Notes, Release 01.05
[13] Application Note 24: Application Developer’s Guide
Prior to using TC35i or upgrading to a new firmware release, be sure to carefully read the latest product information provided in the Release Notes.
To visit the Siemens Website you can use the following link:
http://www.siemens.com/wm
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 12 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
1.3
Conventions and abbreviations
Throughout the document, the GSM engines are referred to as ME (Mobile Equipment), MS (Mobile
Station), TA (Terminal Adapter), DCE (Data Communication Equipment) or facsimile DCE (FAX modem, FAX board).
To control your GSM engine you can simply send AT Commands via its serial interface. The controlling device at the other end of the serial line is referred to as TE (Terminal Equipment), DTE (Data
Terminal Equipment) or plainly “the application” (probably running on an embedded system).
All abbreviations and acronyms used throughout this document are based on the GSM specifications.
For definitions please refer to TR 100 350 V7.0.0 (1999-08), (GSM 01.04, version 7.0.0 release 1998).
1.4
AT command syntax
The "AT" or "at" prefix must be set at the beginning of each command line. To terminate a command
line enter <CR>.
Commands are usually followed by a response that includes “<CR><LF><response><CR><LF>”.
Throughout this document, only the responses are presented, <CR><LF> are omitted intentionally.
Table 2: Types of AT commands and responses
Test command
AT+CXXX=?
Read command
AT+CXXX?
Write command
Execution command
AT+CXXX=<...>
AT+CXXX
The mobile equipment returns the list of parameters and
value ranges set with the corresponding Write command
or by internal processes.
This command returns the currently set value of the parameter or parameters
This command sets user-definable parameter values.
The execution command reads non-variable parameters
affected by internal processes in the GSM engine.
1.4.1 Using parameters
· Factory defaults are underlined or, if necessary, explicitly stated in the parameter description. A
factory value will be loaded on power-up if the parameter is not storable (for example if not stored
when AT^SMSO is executed, or not stored to the user profile specified with AT&W, or not stored to
the audio profile defined with AT^SNFW). To restore factory defaults use AT&F. A variety of audio
parameters can be reset to their factory defaults using AT^SNFD.
· Optional parameters are enclosed in square brackets, for example [0]. If optional parameters are
omitted, the bracketed value will be used by default. If a parameter is not enclosed in brackets and
no other behavior is stated, the current setting remains unchanged when the parameter is omitted.
· To ensure the correct sequence of optional and mandatory parameters, a comma must be kept for
each omitted parameter that is followed by further parameters. Example:
AT+CPBW=,<number>,<type>,<text> writes a phone book entry to the first free memory location.
AT+CPBW=<location>,<number>,<type>,<text> writes a phone book entry to the memory location
specified by <location>.
· When the parameter is a character string, e.g. <text> or <number>, the string must be enclosed in
quotation marks, e.g. "Charlie Brown" or "+49030xxxx". Symbols within quotation marks will be
recognized as strings.
· All spaces will be ignored when using strings without quotaton marks.
· It is possible to omit the leading zeros of strings which represent numbers.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 13 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
1.4.2 Combining AT commands on the same command line
You may enter several AT commands on the same line. This eliminates the need to type the "AT" or
"at" prefix before each command. Instead, it is only needed once at the beginning of the command
line. Use a semicolon as command delimiter.
The command line buffer accepts a maximum of 391 characters. If this number is exceeded none of
the commands will be executed and TA returns ERROR.
The table below lists the AT commands you cannot enter together with other commands on the same
line. Otherwise, the responses may not be in the expected order.
Table 3: Illegal combinations of AT commands
V.25ter commands
GSM 7.07 commands
GSM 7.05 commands (SMS)
Commands starting with AT&
AT+IPR
With
With
-------
FAX commands, Prefix AT+F
Siemens commands, Prefix AT^S
To be used standalone
To be used standalone
To be used standalone
Note: When concatenating AT commands please keep in mind that the sequence of processing may
be different from the sequential order of command input. Therefore, if the consecutive order of
the issued commands is your concern, avoid concatenating commands on the same line.
1.4.3 Entering successive AT commands on separate lines
When you enter a series of AT commands on separate lines, leave a pause between the preceding
and the following command until the final response (for example OK, CME error, CMS error) appears.
This avoids sending too many AT commands at a time without waiting for a response for each.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 14 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
1.5
Supported character sets
The ME supports two character sets: GSM 03.38 (7 bit, also referred to as SMS alphabet) and UCS2
(16 bit, refer to ISO/IEC 10646). See Chapter 4.44 for information about selecting the character set.
Character tables are provided in Chapter 8.5.
The behaviour when encountering characters, that are not valid characters of the supported alphabets, is undefined.
Due to the constraints described below it is recommended to prefer the USC2 alphabet in any external
application.
If the GSM alphabet is selected all characters sent over the serial line are in the range from 0 ... 127.
CAUTION: GSM alphabet is not ASCII alphabet!
Several problems resulting from the use of the GSM alphabet:
1. "@" character with GSM alphabet value 0 is not printable by an ASCII terminal program (e.g. Mi©
®
crosoft Hyperterminal ).
2. "@" character with GSM alphabet value of binary 0 will terminate any C string!
This is because the \0 is defined as C string end tag. Therefore, the GSM Null character may
cause problems on application level when using a ´C´-function as „strlen()“. This can be avoided if
it is represented by an escape sequence as shown in Table 4.
By the way, this may be the reason why even network providers often replace "@"with “@=*” in
their SIM application.
3. Other characters of the GSM alphabet are misinterpreted by an ASCII terminal program. For example, GSM "ö" (as in "Börse") is assumed to be "|" in ASCII, thus resulting in "B|rse". This is because both alphabets mean different characters with values hex. 7C or 00 and so on.
4. In addition, decimal 17 and 19 which are used as XON/XOFF control characters when software
flow control is activated, are interpreted as normal characters in the GSM alphabet.
When you write characters differently coded in ASCII and GSM (e.g. Ä, Ö, Ü), you need to enter escape sequences. Such a character is translated into the corresponding GSM character value and,
when output later, the GSM character value can be presented. Any ASCII terminal then will show
wrong responses.
Table 4: Character definitions depending on alphabet (examples)
GSM 03.38
character
Ö
"
ò
@
GSM character
hex. value
5C
22
08
00
Corresponding
ASCII character
\
“
BSP
NULL
ASCII
Esc sequence
\5C
\22
\08
\00
Hex
Esc sequence
5C 35 43
5C 32 32
5C 30 38
5C 30 30
CAUTION: Often, the editors of terminal programs do not recognize escape sequences. In this case,
an escape sequence will be handled as normal characters. The most common workaround to this
problem is to write a script which includes a decimal code instead of an escape sequence. This way
you can write, for example, short messages which may contain differently coded characters.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 15 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
1.6
Flow control
Flow control is essential to prevent loss of data or avoid errors when, in a data or fax call, the sending
device is transferring data faster than the receiving side is ready to accept. When the receiving buffer
reaches its capacity, the receiving device should be capable to cause the sending device to pause until it catches up.
There are basically two approaches to regulate data flow: software flow control and hardware flow
control. The High Watermark of the input / output buffer should be set to approximately 60% of the total buffer size. The Low Watermark is recommended to be about 30%. The data flow should be
stopped when the capacity rises close to the High Watermark and resumed when it drops below the
Low Watermark. The time required to cause stop and go results in a hysteresis between the High and
Low Watermarks.
In Multiplex mode, it is recommended to use hardware flow control. For details please refer to [4].
1.6.1 Software flow control (XON/OFF flow control)
Software flow control sends different characters to stop (XOFF, decimal 19) and resume (XON, decimal 17) data flow. The only advantage of software flow control is that three wires would be sufficient
on the serial interface.
1.6.2 Hardware flow control (RTS/CTS flow control)
Hardware flow control sets or resets the RTS/CTS wires. This approach is faster and more reliable,
and therefore, the better choice. When the High Watermark is reached, CTS is set inactive until the
transfer from the buffer has completed. When the Low Watermark is passed, CTS goes active once
again.
To achieve smooth data flow, ensure that the RTS/CTS lines are present on your application platform.
The application should include options to enable RTS/CTS handshake with the GSM engine. This
needs to be done with the AT commands AT\Q3 or AT+IFC - it is not sufficient to set RTS/CTS handshake in the used Terminal program only. For details refer to Chapter 2.3 and Chapter 2.45.
Often, fax programs run an intialization procedure when started up. The intialization commonly includes enabling RTS/CTS hardware handshake, eliminating the need to set AT\Q3 once again. However, before setting up a CSD call, you are advised to check that RTS/CTS handshake is set.
Note:
After deactivating the RTS line, the ME may still send up to 264 bytes (worst case). This can
be easily managed if the buffer of the host application is sufficiently sized, and if a hysteresis
is implemented in its Rx buffer as mentioned in Chapter 1.6. For host applications that are required to handle a large amount of data at high speed, a total buffer capacity of at least 512
bytes is recommended.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 16 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2 Standard V.25ter AT Commands
These AT Commands are related to ITU-T (International Telecommunication Union, Telecommunication sector) V.25ter document.
TC35i supports the registers S0-S29. You can change S0,S3,S4,S5,S6,S7,S8,S10,S18 by using the
appropriate ATSn commands. All the other registers are read-only and for internal usage only!
2.1
A/ Repeat previous command line
Execute command
Response
A/
Repeats previous command line. Line does not need to end with terminating
character.
Parameter
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· After beginning with the character “a“ or „A“, a second character “t“ ,”T“ or “/“
has to follow. In case of using a wrong second character, it is necessary to
start again with character “a“ or “A“.
· If autobauding is active (see Chapter 2.47) A/ (and a/) cannot be used.
2.2
+++ Switch from data mode to command mode
Execute command
Response
+++
This command is only available during a data call. The +++ character sequence
causes the TA to cancel the data flow over the AT interface and switch to command mode. This allows you to enter AT commands while maintaining the data
connection to the remote device.
OK
To prevent the +++ escape sequence from being misinterpreted as data, it must
be preceded and followed by a pause of at least 1000 ms. The +++ characters
must be entered in quick succession, all within 1000 ms.
Reference
Note:
V.25ter
To return from command mode to data mode: Enter ATO as described in Chapter
2.17.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 17 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.3
AT\Qn Flow control
Execute command
Response
AT\Q<n>
OK
If RTS/CTS flow control is not supported by interface and <n> is 2 or 3
ERROR
Parameter
<n>
Reference
0
AT\Q0
No flow control
1
AT\Q1
XON/XOFF software flow control
2
AT\Q2
Only CTS by DCE
3
AT\Q3
RTS/CTS hardware flow control
Recommended for the following procedures: incoming or outgoing data calls, fax calls, MUX
mode.
Often, the initialization routine of Fax programs includes enabling RTS/CTS handshake, eliminating
the need to issue AT\Q3 once again.
Note
· Factory default is 0 (no flow control). The setting of AT\Qn is stored volatile.
For use after restart it should be stored to the user defined profile (AT&W).
· When using XON/XOFF flow control ( AT\Q 1) in online mode, +++ should not
be used while the data transmission is paused with XOFF. Before entering the
command mode with +++ the paused transmission should be resumed using
the XON character.
· For compatibility reasons, the AT\Qn command can be used in Multiplex mode,
though the settings will not take effect. However, be aware that whenever you
use the AT\Qn write command in Multiplex mode and then save the current
configuration to the user profile with AT&W, the changed AT\Qn setting will become active after restart.
· Flow control can also be set using AT+IFC. See Chapter 2.45.
· See also Chapter 1.6 for general information on flow control.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 18 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.4
ATA Answer a call
Execute command
ATA
TA causes remote station to go off-hook (e.g. answer call).
Note1:
Any additional commands on the same command line are ignored.
Note2:
This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during
execution. It can´t be aborted in some connection setup states, such as
handshaking.
Response
Response in case of data call, if successfully connected:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data mode.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
Response in case of voice call, if successfully connected:
OK
When TA returns to command mode:
OK
Response if no connection:
NO CARRIER
Parameter
Reference
Note
V.25ter
See also AT+ATX and Chapter 8.1.4 for <text>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 19 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.5
ATD Mobile originated call to dial a number
Execute command
ATD[<n>]
[<mgsm][;]
This command can be used to set up outgoing voice, data or fax calls. It also
serves to control supplementary services.
The command may be aborted generally when receiving an ATH command during
execution. Abortion is not possible during some states of connection setup such as
handshaking.
Response
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<n>
String of dialing digits and optionally V.25ter modifiers (dialing digits): 09, * , #, +, A, B, C
V.25ter modifiers: these are ignored: ,(comma), T, P, !, W, @
Emergency call:
<n>
= Standardized emergency number 112 (no SIM needed)
<mgsm> String of GSM modifiers:
I
Activates CLIR (disables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
i
Deactivates CLIR (enables presentation of own phone number
to called party)
G
Activates Closed User Group invocation for this call only.
g
Deactivates Closed User Group invocation for this call only.
<;>
Reference
V.25ter
GSM 07.07
GSM 02.07
Annex A
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Only required to set up voice calls. TA remains in command mode.
General remarks:
· Before setting up a data call, check that RTS/CTS handshake is enabled. See
Chapters 1.6 and 2.3.
· Parameter ”l“ and ”i“ only if no *# code is within the dial string.
· <mgsm> is not supported for data calls.
· <n> is default for last number that can be dialed by ATDL.
· *# codes sent with ATD are treated as voice calls. Therefore, the command
must be terminated with a semicolon “;”.
· If ATD is used with a USSD command (e.g. ATD*100#;) an AT+CUSD=1 is
Page 20 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
executed implicitly (see AT+CUSD, pg. 151).
· Parameter ‘G’ or ‘g’ will be ignored if Closed User Group was already activated,
or accordingly, deactivated with AT+CCUG command. Call by call invocation of
CUG uses the settings provisioned by the provider or, if available, the settings
of the parameters <index> and <info> made with AT+CCUG. See also Chapter
4.8.
· See ATX command in Chapter 2.31 for setting result code and call monitoring
parameters. Refer to Chapter 8.1.4 for <text>.
Blacklist management:
· The ME provides a blacklist function according to GSM02.07 Annex A. After a
predefined number of failed call attempts to the same number, the dialed number is entered into a read-only phonebook called “blacklist” (phonebook “BL”).
Call attempts to numbers contained in the blacklist will be barred by the ME and
not signaled to the network. An attempt to start a voice call to a barred phone
number will be stopped with CME ERROR 257 “Call barred”. An attempt to start
a data or fax call to a barred phone number will be answered immediately with
the result code “NO CARRIER”.
· The barred numbers are automatically removed from the blacklist according to
the timing conditions specified in GSM02.07 Annex A.
Different call release indications
· Upon termination, an outgoing fax or data call may show a different result code
than a voice call would deliver under identical conditions. In order to track down
the actual reason for call release, ATS18 (see Chapter 2.28) or AT+CEER (see
chapter 4.10) should be used.
Different response modes
· For voice calls two different response modes can be determined: TA returns
“OK” either after dialing was completed or after the call has been established.
The setting is made with AT^SM20 (see Chapter 7.17 for more details).
Factory default is AT^SM20=1. This causes the ME to return “OK” in case of
successful connection, otherwise one of the call release indications “NO CARRIER”, “NO DIAL TONE”, “NO CARRIER” will follow.
· Data calls: In data connections, call setup always terminates when the call has
been established (indicated by result code “CONNECT<text>”) or when it fails
(indicated by “NO CARRIER”).
Using ATD during an active voice call:
· When a user originates a second voice call while there is already an active
voice call, the first call will be automatically put on hold.
· The second call attempt is acknowledged with “OK” immediately after dialing
with ATD has completed, without relation to a successful call setup. In case of
failure, the additional result codes “NO CARRIER”, “NO DIAL TONE”, “NO
CARRIER” will be presented afterwards (see example below).
This behavior is similar to the mode set with AT^SM20=0, but occurs also if
AT^SM20=1 and cannot be changed. To avoid different behavior in all procedures of voice call setup simply give priority to AT^SM20=0 (“OK” appears always immediately after dialing).
· The current states of all calls can be easily checked at any time by using the
AT+CLCC command. For details refer to Chapter 4.20.
Example
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
The following example shows the call setup procedure when a call is already active and a second call attempt fails because the line of the called party is busy:
atd0301234567;
Dialing out the first party’s number.
OK
The first call is established.
Page 21 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
atd0302222222;
OK
The number of the second party is dialed.
The response “OK” is issued immediately though no call
is established (same behavior as if you had chosen
AT^SM20=0).
BUSY
Line of the second called party is busy.
Page 22 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.6
ATD><mem><n> Originate call to phone number <n> in memory <mem>
This command allows you to dial a phone number from a specific phone book. To initiate a call, enter a two letter abbreviation for the phone book <mem>, followed by the memory location <n> of the
desired entry. The location range of each phone book can be queried with AT+CPBR (see Chapter
4.32).
Execute command
ATD><mem>
<n>[<mgsm>];
TA attempts to set up an outgoing call to the specified number.
This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during execution. Abortion is not possible during some states of connection setup such as
handshaking.
Response
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected:
OK
Parameter
<mem> Phone book:
"SM” SIM phone book (storage depending on SIM card)
”FD” SIM fixdialing phone book (storage depending on SIM card)
”LD” Last-dialing-phone book (list of up to 10 most recently dialed
numbers. Depending on the SIM card, the storage is located
either on the SIM card only or shared by SIM and ME).
”MC” ME missed (unanswered received) calls list (up to 10 numbers)
”RC” Received calls list (up to 10 numbers stored in ME)
”ME” ME phone book (up to 250 numbers)
”ON” Own numbers (MSISDNs) list. Storage depending on SIM
card.
Notes:
Refer to Chapter 4.33 for more information regarding the capacity of
each phone book and types of storage (ME / SIM card).
<n>
Integer type memory location in the range of locations available in the
selected memory, i.e. the <location> returned by AT+CPBR.
<mgsm>
String of GSM modifiers:
<;>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
I
Activates CLIR (disables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
i
Deactivates CLIR (enables presentation of own phone number
to called party)
The semicolon is mandatory since dialing from a phone book is only
supported for voice calls.
Page 23 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Reference
Note
V.25ter/GSM
07.07
· There is no <mem> for emergency call (“EN”).
· The command is not applicable to data calls. Any attempt to dial a data call
number from <mem> causes the result code “NO CARRIER” to appear.
· Parameter <mgsm> only if no *# code is within the dial string.
· *# codes sent with ATD are treated as voice calls. Therefore, the command
must be terminated with a semicolon “;”.
· See ATX command in Chapter 2.31 for setting result code and call monitoring
parameters.
Example
To query the location number of the phone book entry:
AT+CPBR=1,xx
TA returns the entries available in the active phone book.
To dial a number from the SIM phone book, for example the number stored to location 15:
ATD>SM15;
OK
To dial a phone number stored in the last dial memory on the SIM card:
ATD>LD9;
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 24 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.7
ATD><n> Originate call to phone number selected from active memory
This command can be used to dial a phone number selected from the active memory. The active
memory is the phone book selected with AT+CPBS (see Chapter 4.33). To set up a call simply enter
the memory location of the desired entry. The memory location range of each phone book can be
queried by AT+CPBR (see Chapter 4.32).
Execute command
ATD><n>[<mgsm>];
TA attempts to set up an outgoing call to the stored number.
The command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during
execution. Abortion is not possible during some states of connection setup
such as handshaking.
Response
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected:
OK
Parameter
<n>
Integer type memory location should be in the range of locations
available in the memory used, i.e. the <location> number returned
by AT+CPBR.
<mgsm> String of GSM modifiers:
I Activates CLIR (disables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
i Deactivates CLIR (enables presentation of own phone number
to called party)
<;>
The semicolon is mandatory since dialing from a phone book is
only supported for voice calls.
Reference
Note
V.25ter/GSM 07.07
· Parameter <mgsm> only if no *# code is within the dial string.
· The command is not applicable to data calls. Any attempt to dial a data
call number from <mem> causes the result code “NO CARRIER” to appear.
· *# codes sent with ATD are treated as voice calls. Therefore, the command must be terminated with a semicolon “;”.
· See ATX command in Chapter 2.31 for setting result code and call monitoring parameters.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 25 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.8
ATD><str> Originate call to phone number in memory with corresponding field
This command searches the active phone book for a given string <str> and dials the assigned phone
number. The active phone book is the one set with AT+CPBS.
Execute command
ATD><str>[mgsm];
TA attempts to set up an outgoing call to stored number.
This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during execution. Abortion is not possible during some states of connection setup such
as handshaking.
Response
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected:
OK
Parameter
<str>
String type value (“x”), which should equal an alphanumeric field in
at least one phone book entry in the searched memories; used
character set should be the one selected with AT+CSCS. <str> can
contain escape sequences as described in Chapter 1.5.
<str> must be enclosed in quotation marks (""), if escape sequences
or parameter <mgsm> are used or if the alphanumeric string contains a blank. If not, quotation marks are optional.
<mgsm>
String of GSM modifiers:
I Activates CLIR (disables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
i Deactivates CLIR (enables presentation of own phone number to
called party)
The semicolon is mandatory since dialing from a phone book is only
supported for voice calls.
<;>
Reference
Note
V.25ter/GSM 07.07
· The command is not applicable to data calls. Any attempt to dial a data call
number from <mem> causes the result code “NO CARRIER” to appear.
· See ATX command in Chapter 2.31 for setting result code and call monitoring parameters.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 26 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.9
ATDI Mobile originated call to dialable ISDN number <n>
Execute command
ATDI<n>[;]
TA attempts to set up an outgoing call to ISDN number.
This command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during execution. Abortion is not possible during some states of connection setup such as
handshaking.
Response
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successful connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<n>
[+]<d>
phone number
string with maximum length of 20 characters
+
international dialing format
<d>
ISDN number
string of digits: +,0-9, A, B, C
<;>
voice call
Reference
Note
V.25ter
See ATX command in Chapter 2.31 for setting result code and call monitoring parameters. Refer to Chapter 8.1.4 for <text>.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 27 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.10 ATDL Redial last telephone number used
Execute command
ATDL[;]
This command redials the last voice and data call number used in the ATD command.
· To redial the last data call number simply enter ATDL
· To redial the last voice call number type ATDL;
The command may be aborted generally by receiving a character during execution. Abortion is not possible during some states of connection setup such as
handshaking.
Response
If there is no last number or number is not valid:
+CME ERROR
If no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4):
NO DIALTONE
If busy (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4):
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up:
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected and non-voice call:
CONNECT<text> TA switches to data state.
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
When TA returns to command mode:
OK
If successfully connected and voice call:
OK
Parameter
<;>
voice call
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· See ATX command in Chapter 2.31 for setting result code and call monitoring
parameters. Refer to Chapter 8.1.4 for <text>.
· The last 10 dialed voice call numbers are also stored in the “LD” phonebook.
See Chapter 4.33.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 28 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.11 ATE Enable command echo
Write command
ATE[<value>]
This setting determines whether or not the TA echoes characters received from
TE during command state.
Response
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 Echo mode off
1 Echo mode on
Reference
Note
V.25ter
In case of using the command without parameter, <value> is set to 0.
2.12 ATH Disconnect existing connection
Execute command
ATH[n]
Disconnects any call in progress, such as voice, fax or CSD calls. See notes below for multiplex mode.
Response
OK
Note:
OK is issued after circuit 109 (DCD) is turned off, if it was previously on.
Parameter
<n>
[0]
terminate call
Reference
Note
V.25ter
Using ATH in Multiplex mode:
· ATH terminates every voice, fax or CSD call, no matter on which logical channel ATH was executed.
For example, if ATH is executed on channel 2 or 3, a voice call on channel 1
will be disconnected, too.
This behavior is in accordance with ITU-T V.25 ter; (07/97, see “6.3.6 Hook
control“: "ATH is terminating any call in progress").
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 29 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.13 ATI Display product identification information
Execute command
Response
ATI
ME issues product information text
SIEMENS
TC35i
REVISION xx.yy
OK
Explanation of “Revision“ parameter:
Version xx and variant yy of software release.
Reference
Note
V.25ter
2.14 ATI[value] Display additional identification information
Execute command
Response
ATI[value]
<value>=9 delivers the following information. Other values are not supported and
only return OK.
ATI9
SIEMENS Gipsy Soft Protocolstack V2.550
OK
Reference
Note
V.25ter
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 30 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.15 ATL Set monitor speaker loudness
Execute command
Response
ATL[val]
OK
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· The two commands ATL and ATM are implemented only for V.25ter compatibility reasons and have no effect.
· In multiplex mode the command is supported on logical channel 1 only.
2.16 ATM Set monitor speaker mode
Execute command
Response
ATM[val]
OK
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· The two commands ATL and ATM are implemented only for V.25ter compatibility reasons and have no effect.
· In multiplex mode the command is supported on logical channel 1 only.
2.17 ATO Switch from command mode to data mode
Execute command
Response
ATO[n]
ATO is the corresponding command to the +++ escape sequence described in
Chapter 2.2: When you have established a data call and TA is in command mode,
ATO causes the TA to resume the data connection and takes you back to data
mode.
If connection is not successfully resumed
NO CARRIER
or
TA returns to data mode from command mode
CONNECT <text>
Note: <text> output only if +ATX parameter setting with value > 0.
Parameter
<n>
Reference
[0]
switch from command mode to data mode
Note
V.25ter
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 31 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.18 ATQ Set result code presentation mode
Write command
Response
ATQ[<n>]
Specifies whether or not the TA transmits any result code to the TE. Information
text transmitted in response is not affected by this setting.
If <n>=0:
OK
If <n>=1:
(none)
Parameter
<n>
0 DCE transmits result code
1 Result codes are suppressed and not transmitted
Reference
Note
V.25ter
2.19 ATP Select pulse dialing
Execute command
Response
ATP
OK
Reference
Note
V.25ter
No effect for GSM
2.20 ATS0 Set number of rings before automatically answering the call
Read command
Response
ATS0?
<n> OK
Write command
Specifies whether or not the TA will accept an incoming call without user intervention. <n> determines the number of rings to wait before the TA will automatically answer.
ATS0=<n>
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
000
disables automatic answer mode
001-255 enables automatic answering after specified number of rings
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· If <n> is set too high, the calling party may hang up before the call can be
automatically answered.
· The correlation between ATS7 and ATS0 is important.
Example: Call setup may fail if ATS0=20 and ATS7=30.
· The selected value is local to the interface. It is possible to set different values
on different interfaces (channels). In such cases the interface ‘wins’ which is
idle and uses the smallest ATS0 value.
· Autoanswer mode can be set on each multiplexer channel. On Channels 2
and 3 it applies only to voice calls.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 32 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.21 ATS3 Write command line termination character
Read command
Response
ATS3?
<n> OK
This parameter setting determines the character recognized by TA to terminate
an incoming command line.
Write command
ATS3=<n>
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
000-013-127
command line termination character
Reference
Note
V.25ter
Using other value than 13 can cause problems when entering commands.
2.22 ATS4 Set response formatting character
Read command
Response
ATS4?
<n> OK
Write command
This parameter setting determines the character generated by the TA for result
code and information text.
ATS4=<n>
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
Reference
000-010-127
response formatting character.
Note
V.25ter
2.23 ATS5 Write command line editing character
Read command
Response
ATS5?
<n> OK
Write command
This parameter setting determines the character recognized by TA as a request
to delete the immediately preceding character from the command line.
ATS5=<n>
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
Reference
000-008-127
command line editing character
Note
V.25ter
2.24 ATS6 Set pause before blind dialing
Read command
Response
ATS6?
<n> OK
Write command
No effect for GSM
ATS6=<n>
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
Reference
000-255 number of seconds to wait before blind dialing.
Note
V.25ter
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 33 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.25 ATS7 Set number of seconds to wait for connection completion
Read command
Response
ATS7?
<n> OK
Write command
Specifies the number of seconds the TA will wait for the completion of the call
setup when answering or originating a call. Also referred to as "no answer timeout". To put it plainly, this is the time to wait for the carrier signal. If no carrier signal is received within the specified time, the TA hangs up.
ATS7=<n>
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
000 – 060
no. of seconds to wait for connection completion.
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· Values greater than 60 cause no error, but <n> will be restored to the maximum value of 60.
· If called party has specified a high value for ATS0=<n>, call setup may fail.
· The correlation between ATS7 and ATS0 is important.
Example: Call setup may fail if ATS7=30 and ATS0=20.
2.26 ATS8 Set number of seconds to wait for comma dial modifier
Read command
Response
ATS8?
<n> OK
Write command
No effect for GSM
ATS8=<n>
Response
OK
Reference
Note
V.25ter
2.27 ATS10 Set disconnect delay after indicating the absence of data carrier
Read command
Response
ATS10?
<n> OK
This parameter setting determines the amount of time that the TA remains connected in absence of a data carrier. If the data carrier is detected before disconnect, the TA remains connected.
Write command
ATS10=<n>
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
Reference
001-002-254
number of tenths of seconds of delay
Note
V.25ter
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 34 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.28 ATS18 Extended error report
Read command
Response
ATS18?
<n> OK
Write command
The write command enables or disables the presentation of more detailed error
messages reported in the case of unsuccessful CSD or fax calls.
ATS18=<n>
Parameter of the write command
<n>
0 – 255
Odd numbers enable the presentation of extended error reports.
Even numbers disable the presentation of extended error reports.
Response
OK
Extended error report
If the presentation is enabled (odd number), the TA returns an extended error report every time it fails to establish a data or fax call. Errors are reported only for
failures that occur before call setup is complete, for example if the result code
NO CARRIER, NO DIALTONE or BUSY appears.
Extended error report
+CAUSE: <location ID>: <reason >
Parameters of the extended error report
<location ID> Location ID as number code
Location IDs are listed in Chapter 8.1.5. Each ID is related to another table that contains a list of <reason>s.
<reason>
Reason for last failure, stated as number code
<reason> numbers and associated descriptions are listed in several tables, sorted by different categories (see Chapters 8.1.6 to
8.1.18). The Chapter numbers can be found proceeding from the
Location ID table in Chapter 8.1.5.
Reference
Note
Siemens
This command applies only to circuit switched data calls and fax calls. For voice
calls, extended error reports can be retrieved using the execute command
AT+CEER (Chapter 4.10).
Example
To enable the presentation of extended error reports:
ats18=1
OK
Now, a mobile originated data call fails. Call setup is terminated with an extended
error report, followed by the result code NO CARRIER:
atd0301234567
+CAUSE: 8:16
NO CARRIER
The Location ID 8 stated in Chapter 8.1.5 points to Chapter 8.1.11, where 16 =
“Normal call clearing”.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 35 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.29 ATT Select tone dialing
Execute command
Response
ATT
OK
Reference
Note
V.25ter
No effect for GSM
2.30 ATV Set result code format mode
Write command
Response
ATV[<value>]
This parameter setting determines the contents of the header and trailer transmitted with result codes and information responses.
When <value> =0
0
When <value> =1
OK
Parameter
<value>
[0] Information response: <text><CR><LF>
Short result code format: <numeric code><CR>
1 Information response: <CR><LF><text><CR><LF>
Long result code format: <CR><LF><verbose code><CR><LF>
Reference
Note
V.25ter
In case of using the command without parameter <value> will be set to 0.
Information responses are listed in Chapter 8.1.4 (verbose code and numeric
code).
2.31 ATX Set CONNECT result code format and call monitoring
Write command
Response
ATX[<value>]
This parameter setting determines whether or not the TA detects the presence of
dial tone and busy signal and whether or not TA transmits particular result codes.
OK
Parameter
<value>
[0]
CONNECT result code only returned, dial tone and busy detection are both disabled
1
CONNECT<text> result code only returned, dial tone and busy
detection are both disabled
2
CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone detection is
enabled, busy detection is disabled
3
CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone detection is
disabled, busy detection is enabled
4
CONNECT<text> result code returned, dial tone and busy
detection are both enabled
Reference
Note
V.25ter
See chapter 8.1.4 for related <text>.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 36 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.32 ATZ Set all current parameters to user defined profile
Execute command
Response
ATZ[<value>]
TA sets all current parameters to the user profile stored with AT&W. If a connection is in progress, it will be terminated.
Note: Any additional commands on the same command line will be ignored. A delay of 300 ms is required before next command is sent, otherwise “OK” response
may be corrupted.
OK
Parameter
<value> [0] Reset to user profile
Reference
Note
V.25ter
TC35i can be assigned two profiles: the factory profile (restored with AT&F) and
the user profile (stored with AT&W).
Related chapters: AT&F in chapter 2.35, AT&W in chapter 2.38.
2.33 AT&C Set circuit Data Carrier Detect (DCD) function mode
Write command
Response
AT&C[<value>]
This parameter determines how the state of circuit 109 (DCD) relates to the detection of received line signal from the distant end.
OK
If DCD is not supported by the interface
ERROR
Parameter
<value>
[0]
DCD line is always ON.
1
DCD line is ON in the presence of data carrier only.
Reference
Note
V.25ter
Factory default is 1.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 37 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.34 AT&D Set circuit Data Terminal Ready (DTR) function mode
Write command
Response
AT&D[<value>]
This command is only intended for data calls. The <value> parameter determines
how the TA responds when circuit 108/2 (DTR) is changed from ON to OFF during data mode.
OK
If DTR is not supported by the interface and <value> is 1 or 2
ERROR
Parameter
<value>
[0]
TA ignores status on DTR.
1
ON->OFF on DTR: Change to command mode while retaining
the connected call.
2
ON->OFF on DTR: Disconnect data call, change to command
mode. During state DTR = OFF is auto-answer off.
Reference
Note
V.25ter
Factory default is 2 if DTR is supported by the interface, otherwise 0.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 38 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.35 AT&F Set all current parameters to manufacturer defaults
Execute command
Response
AT&F[value]
TA sets all current parameters to the manufacturer defined profile.
OK
Parameter
<value>
0
Set all TA parameters to manufacturer default.
See Table 5: Factory settings.
Reference
Note
V.25ter
In addition to the default profile, you can store an individual one with
AT&W. To alternate between the two profiles enter either ATZ (loads
user profile) or AT&F (restores factory profile). Refer to Chapter 2.38 for
AT&W and Chapter 2.32 for ATZ.
Audio parameters set with AT^SAIC, AT^SNFA, AT^SNFO and
AT^SNFI can be restored with AT^SNFD. See Chapter 7.26.
Table 5: Factory settings
AT command
Restored parameters
AT\Q
ATE
ATQ
ATS0
ATS3
ATS4
ATS5
ATS6
ATS7
ATS10
ATS18
ATV
ATX
AT&C
AT&D
AT&S
AT+ILRR
AT+FCLASS
AT+CBST
AT+CFUN
AT+CLIP
AT+CMEE
AT+CMER
AT+COPS
AT+CPBS
AT+CR
AT+CRC
<n>=0
<value>=1
<n>=0
<n>=000
<n>=013
<n>=010
<n>=008
<n>=000
<n>=060
<n>=002
<n>=0
<value>=1
<value>=4
<value>=1
<value>=2
<value>=0
<value>=0
<n>=0
<speed>=7, <name>=0, <ce>=1
<fun>=1
<n>=0
<n>=0
<mode>=0, <keyp>=0, <disp>=0, <ind>=0, <bfr>=0
<format>=0
<storage>=”SM”
<mode>=0
<mode>=0
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 39 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
AT command
Restored parameters
AT+CREG
AT+CRLP
AT+CSCS
AT+CSSN
AT+CUSD
AT+VTD
AT+CMGF
AT+CNMI
AT+CSDH
AT+CSMS
AT+CSMP
AT^SMGO
AT^SSCONF
AT^SSDA
AT^SACM
AT^SCKS
AT^SCTM
AT^SM20
AT^SSMSS
AT^SPBS
AT\V
AT%D
<n>=0
<iws>=61, <mws>=61, <T1>=78, <N2>=6
<chset>=”GSM”
<n>=0, <m>=0
<n>=0, <n>=1
<duration>=1
<mode>=0
<mode>=0, <mt>=0, <bm>=0, <ds>=0, <bfr>=1
<show>=0
<service>=0, <mt>=1, <mo>=1, <bm>=1
<dcs>=0, <fo>=17, <pid>=0, <vp>=167
<n>=0
<ra>=0, <ff>=0
<da>=0
<n>=0
<n>=0
<n>=0
<CallMode>=1, <CmgwMode>=1
<seq>=0
Internal counter = 0
<value>=1
<state>=0, <type>=””
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 40 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.36 AT&S Set circuit Data Set Ready (DSR) function mode
Write command
Response
AT&S<value>
This parameter determines how the TA sets circuit 107 (DSR) depending on the
communication state of the TA interfacing TE.
OK
If DSR is not supported by the interface
ERROR
Parameter
<value>
0
DSR always on.
1
TA in command mode: DSR is OFF.
TA in data mode: DSR is ON.
Reference
Note
V.25ter
Factory default is 0.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 41 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.37 AT&V Display current configuration
Execute command
AT&V[<n>]
TA returns the current parameter setting. The configuration varies depending on
whether PIN authentication has been done, or Multiplex mode has been activated.
Parameter
<n>
[0] Profile number
Reference
Notes:
V.25ter
· The value of \Q (flow control) is also affected by the AT+IFC command (see
Chapter 2.45). If the value set by AT+IFC cannot be represented by a \Q
equivalent, \Q255 will be displayed.
· The parameters of AT^SMGO can only be displayed after the SMS data from
the SIM have been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after
successful SIM authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30
seconds depending on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress,
an attempt to read the parameter will result in empty values.
· The parameter of AT+CSDH will only be displayed in SMS text mode, i.e. if
AT+CMGF=1.
Table 6: AT&V responses on channel 1 (with or without multiplex moded enabled)
PIN authentication done
No PIN authentication
ACTIVE PROFILE:
ACTIVE PROFILE:
E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D2 &S0 \Q0 \V1
E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D2 &S0 \Q0 \V1
S0:000 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008 S6:000 S7:060 S0:000 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008 S6:000 S7:060
S8:000
S8:000
S10:002 S18:000
S10:002 S18:000
+CBST: 7,0,1
+CBST: 7,0,1
+CRLP: 61,61,78,6
+CRLP: 61,61,78,6
+CR: 0
+CR: 0
+FCLASS: 0
+FCLASS: 0
+CRC: 0
+ICF: 3
+CMGF: 0
+IFC: 0,0
+ CSDH: 0
+ILRR: 0
+CNMI: 0,0,0,0,1
+IPR: 57600
+ICF: 3
+CMEE: 2
+IFC: 0,0
ˆSCKS: 0,1
+ILRR: 0
ˆSSET: 0
+IPR: 57600
OK
+CMEE: 2
ˆSMGO: 0,0
+CSMS: 0,1,1,1
ˆSACM: 0,”000000”,”000000”
ˆSCKS: 0,1
ˆSSET: 0
+CREG: 0,1
+CLIP: 0,2
+CAOC: 0
+COPS: 0,0,”operator”
%D: 0
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 42 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Table 7: AT&V responses on channel2 or 3 (with multiplex moded enabled)
PIN authentication done
No PIN authentication
ACTIVE PROFILE:
E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D0 &S0 \Q0
S0:000 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008
+CRC: 0
+CMGF: 0
+CSDH: 0
+CNMI: 0,0,0,0,1
+ICF: 3
+IFC: 0,0
+ILRR: 0
+IPR: 57600
+CMEE: 2
ˆSMGO: 0,0
+CSMS: 0,1,1,1
ˆSACM: 0,”000000”,”000000”
ˆSCKS: 0,1
ˆSSET: 0
+CREG: 0,1
+CLIP: 0,2
+CAOC: 0
+COPS: 0,0,”operator”
OK
ACTIVE PROFILE:
E1 Q0 V1 X4 &C1 &D0 &S0 \Q0
S0:000 S3:013 S4:010 S5:008
+ICF: 3
+IFC: 0,0
+ILRR: 0
+IPR: 57600
+CMEE: 2
ˆSCKS: 0,1
ˆSSET: 0
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 43 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.38 AT&W Store current configuration to user defined profile
Execute command
TA stores the current settings to a user defined profile in the non-volatile memory.
AT&W[<n>]
Response
OK or if error is related to ME functionality: ERROR / +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n>
[0]
Number of profile
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· The user defined profile will be loaded automatically after power-up. Use ATZ
to restore the user profile and AT&F to restore factory settings. Until the first
use of AT&W, ATZ works as AT&F. See Chapter 2.32 for details on ATZ and
Chapter 2.35 for AT&F.
· User defined profiles in multiplex mode: On each channel you can save an individual profile.
Table 8: List of settings stored to user profile on multiplex channel 1
AT command
Stored parameters
AT\Q
ATE
ATQ
ATS0
ATS3
ATS4
ATS5
ATS6
ATS7
ATS8
ATS10
ATS18
ATV
ATX
AT&C
AT&D
AT&S
AT+ICF
AT+IFC
AT+ILRR
AT+FCLASS
AT+CBST
AT+CLIP
AT+CMEE
AT+CMER
AT+COPS
<n>
<value>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<format>, <parity>
<TEflowcontrol>, <TAflowcontrol>
<value>
<n>
<speed>, <name>, <ce>
<n>
<n>
<mode>, <ind>
<format>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 44 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
AT command
Stored parameters
AT+CR
AT+CRC
AT+CREG
AT+CRLP
AT+CMGF
AT+CNMI
AT+CSDH
AT^SMGO
AT^SACM
AT^SCKS
AT\V
AT%D
<mode>
<mode>
<n>
<iws>, <mws>, <T1>, <N2>
<mode>
<mode>, <mt>, <bm>, <ds>, <bfr>
<show>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<value>
<state>, <type>
Table 9: List of settings stored to user profile on multiplex channel 2 and 3
AT command
Stored parameters
ATE
ATQ
ATS0
ATS3
ATS4
ATS5
ATV
ATX
AT&C
AT&D
AT&S
AT+CLIP
AT+CMEE
AT+CMER
AT+COPS
AT+CRC
AT+CREG
AT+CMGF
AT+CNMI
AT+CSDH
AT^SMGO
AT^SACM
AT^SCKS
<value>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<n>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<value>
<n>
<n>
<mode>, <ind>
<format>
<mode>
<n>
<mode>
<mode>, <mt>, <bm>, <ds>, <bfr>
<show>
<n>
<n>
<n>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 45 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.39 AT+GCAP Request complete TA capabilities list
Test command
Response
AT+GCAP=?
OK
Parameter
Execute command
Response
AT+GCAP
TA reports a list of additional capabilities.
+GCAP: <name>
OK
Parameter
<name> e.g.: +CGSM,+FCLASS
Reference
Note
V.25ter
+CGSM: The response text shows which GSM commands of the ETSI standard
are supported.
2.40 AT+GMI Request manufacturer identification
Test command
Response
AT+GMI=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+GMI
TA reports information to identify the manufacturer.
SIEMENS
OK
Reference
Note
V.25ter
See also ”AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification”, Chapter 4.12.
2.41 AT+GMM Request TA model identification
Test command
Response
AT+GMM=?
OK
Execute command
TA reports one or more lines of information text which permit the user to identify
the specific model of device.
TC35i
OK
AT+GMM
Reference
Note
V.25ter
See also ”AT+CGMM Request model identification”, Chapter 4.13.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 46 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.42 AT+GMR Request TA revision identification of software status
Test command
Response
AT+GMR=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+GMR
TA returns product software version identification text.
REVISION xx.yy
OK
xx.yy
Version xx and variant yy of software release.
Reference
Note
V.25ter
See also AT+CGMR Request revision identification of software status, Chapter
4.14.
2.43 AT+GSN Request TA serial number identification(IMEI)
Test command
Response
AT+GSN=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+GSN
TA reports one or more lines of information text which permit the user to identify
the individual device.
<sn>
OK
Parameter
<sn>
IMEI of the telephone (International Mobile station Equipment Identity)
Reference
Note
V.25ter
The serial number (IMEI) varies for every individual ME device.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 47 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.44 AT+ICF Set TE-TA control character framing
The command AT+ICF can be used to set or query the character framing.
Test command
The Test command returns the values of the supported character framings.
AT+ICF=?
Response
+ICF: (list of supported <format>s), (list of supported <parity>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
The Read command returns the currently selected character framing.
AT+ICF?
Response
+ICF: <format>[, <parity>]
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+ICF=
[<format>][,<parity>]
The parameter setting determines the serial interface character framing format and parity used for sending and receiving.
Response
OK
ERROR
Parameter
<format>
(numeric)
Specifies the character format used for receiving and transmitting.
<parity>
1
8 data 0 parity 2 stop
2
8 data 1 parity 1 stop
[3]
8 data 0 parity 1 stop
5
7 data 1 parity 1 stop
(numeric)
Specifies the method of calculating the parity bit, if a parity bit is
supported. If <format> does not support parity this parameter has
to be omitted.
0
odd
1
even
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· The setting of AT+ICF is stored volatile. For use after restart it should be
stored to the user defined profile (AT&W).
· The following settings are supported:
- 7 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
- 7 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
- 8 bits, even parity, 1 stop bit
- 8 bits, no parity, 1 stop bit
- 8 bits, odd parity, 1 stop bit
- 8 bits, no parity, 2 stop bits
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 48 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
· If <format>2, the parity bit will not be transported on the radio path.
· When using a bit rate of 300 bps there must be a delay of 500ms before
entering the next command. At bit rates of 1200 bps the delay must be
300ms. For higher rates a delay of 100ms is sufficient.
· The autobauding feature (see Chapter 2.47 ) also detects the character
framing. If autobauding is enabled, the AT+ICF Read command does not
show the active character framing, but the character framing that will be
used when the autobauding is disabled.
· For compatibility reasons, the command can be used in Multiplex mode,
though the settings will not take effect. Please note that changes made on
multiplex channel 1 will be saved with AT&W and will become active when
restarting the ME after AT^SMSO.
· To restart the multiplexer it is necessary to set the character framing to
8 bits, no parity and 1 stop bit.
· If a <format> is selected without parity (“no parity”), e.g. <format>=3, and
you try to activate a format with <parity>, e.g. <format>=2, the parameter
<parity> must be explicitly stated, e.g. ICF=2,1. Otherwise you will get
'+CME ERROR: invalid index'. This is because for <format>=3, the parameter <parity> is set to the internal value “no parity” which is not supported by <format>=2.
Remember that if an optional parameter is omitted for which no default is
stated in this specification, the value of this parameter remains unchanged.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 49 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.45 AT+IFC Set Flow Control separately for data directions
The command AT+IFC can be used to set or query the type of flow control separately for each data
direction.
Test command
The Test command returns the values of the supported methods of flow control.
AT+IFC=?
Response
+IFC: (list of supported <TEflowcontrol>s), (list of supported <TAflowcontrol>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
The Read command returns the currently selected method of flow control.
AT+IFC?
Response
+IFC: <TEflowcontrol>, <TAflowcontrol> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+IFC=
<TEflowcontrol>,
<TAflowcontrol>
The parameter setting determines the data flow control on the serial interface.
Response
OK
ERROR
Parameter
<TEflowcontrol> (numeric)
Specifies the method that will be used by the TE when data is received from the TA.
[0]
none
1
XON/XOFF. Terminate flow control in the cellular engine.
2
RTS line
3
XON/XOFF. Evaluate flow control in the cellular engine and
pass it through (over the air) to the opposite TE.
<TAflowcontrol> (numeric)
Specifies the method that will be used by the TA when data is received from the TE.
[0]
none
1
XON/XOFF
2
CTS line
Reference
Note
V.25ter
· The setting of AT+IFC is stored volatile. For use after restart it should be
stored to the user defined profile (AT&W).
· The type of flow control set with AT\Qn is valid in both data directions. See
Chapter 2.3.
· When using XON/XOFF flow control ( AT+IFC =1,x or AT+IFC =3,x) in data
mode, +++ should not be used while the data transmission is paused with
XOFF. Before entering the command mode with +++ the paused transmission should be resumed using the XON character.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 50 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
· For compatibility reasons, the AT+IFC command can be used in Multiplex
mode, though the settings will not take effect. However, be aware that
whenever you use the AT+IFC write command in Multiplex mode and then
save the current configuration to the user profile with AT&W, the changed
AT+IFC setting will become active after restart.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 51 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.46 AT+ILRR Set TE-TA local rate reporting
Test command
Response
AT+ILRR=?
+ILRR: (list of supported <value>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+ILRR?
+ILRR: <value> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+ILRR=
<value>
The write command specifies whether or not an intermediate result code shall indicate the currently used local rate when an incoming or outgoing data call is established. The rate is reported from the DCE (= TA) to the DTE (=TE) before the
final result code of the connection setup (e.g. CONNECT) is transmitted to the TE.
Response
OK
Parameter
<value> 0 Disables reporting of local port rate
1 Enables reporting of local port rate
Intermediate result code
+ILRR:<rate>
Parameter
<rate>
Port rate setting (in bit per second)
0 (Autobauding, see Chapter 2.47.1)
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
19200
28800
38400
57600
115200
230400 (This rate cannot be used with TC35i Terminal.)
Reference
Note
V.25ter
Example
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
ATD”030112233445”
+ILRR: 57600
CONNECT 9600/RLP
Page 52 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
2.47 AT+IPR Set fixed local rate
Test command
Response
AT+IPR=?
+IPR: (list of supported auto-detectable <rate>s), (list of supported fixed-only
<rate>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+IPR?
+IPR: <rate> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+IPR=<rate>
This command specifies the DTE-DCE bit rate. When you set a fix rate, make sure
that both DTE (TE) and DCE (= TA) are configured to the same rate. When you
select autobauding the DCE will automatically recognize the bit rate currently used
by the DTE.
A selected bit rate takes effect following the issue of any result code associated
with this command (e.g. OK).
The setting is stored in the non-volatile memory and will be used whenever the
engine is powered up again. However, in case of autobaud mode (+IPR=0) the
detected DCE bit rate will not be saved and, therefore, re-synchronized after restarting the GSM engine (see Chapter 2.47.1).
Response
OK or if error is related to ME functionality: ERROR / +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<rate> bit rate per second
0 (Autobauding, see Chapter 2.47.1)
300
600
1200
2400
4800
9600
14400
19200
28800
38400
57600
115200
230400 (This rate cannot be used with TC35i Terminal.)
In order to account for greater amounts of data it is recommended to choose a
minimum bit rate of 2400 bps. If the ME is operated in Multiplex mode we suggest
a minimum bit rate of 4800 bps.
Reference
Note
V.25ter
Factory setting is AT+IPR=0 (autobauding). It cannot be restored with AT&F. The
current setting will be preserved when you download new firmware or when the
ME is powered down.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 53 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Generally, AT+IPR=x should be used as a standalone command. If nevertheless
combinations with other commands on the same line cannot be avoided, there are
several constraints to be considered:
· Avoid combinations with the AT commands listed in Chapter 1.4.2.
· Take into account that a delay of 100 ms is required between a response to the
last command (e.g. OK) and the next command on the same line.
· When you enter AT+IPR=0, autobauding will be activated after the response to
the last command is received.
· When local echo is active (ATE1) and you enter AT+IPR=x with other commands you may encounter the following problem: If switching to the new bit
rate takes effect while a response is being transmitted, the last bytes may be
sent at the new bit rate and thus, not properly transmitted. The following commands will be correctly sent at the new bit rate.
2.47.1 Autobauding
Synchronization between DTE and DCE
Ensure that DTE and DCE are correctly synchronized and the bit rate used by the DTE is detected by
the DCE (= ME). To allow the bit rate to be synchronized simply issue an "AT" or "at" string. This is
necessary
· after you have activated autobauding
· when you start up the module while autobauding is enabled. It is recommended to wait 3 to 5 seconds before sending the first AT character. Otherwise undefined characters might be returned.
If you want to use autobauding and autoanswer at the same time, you can easily enable the DTE-DCE
synchronization, when you activate autobauding first and then configure the autoanswer mode
(ATS0¹0).
Restrictions on autobauding operation
· The serial interface has to be operated at 8 data bits, no parity and 1 stop bit (factory setting).
· The A/ command (and a/) cannot be used.
· Only the strings “AT“ or “at“ can be detected (neither “aT“ nor “At“).
· Unsolicited Result Codes that may be issued before the ME detects the new bit rate (by receiving
the first AT command string) will be sent at the previously detected bit rate.
· The Unsolicited Result Codes "^SYSSTART" and "^SYSSTART ALARM MODE" and “SYSSTART
CHARG-ONLY MODE” are not indicated when you start up the ME while autobauding is enabled.
· It is not recommended to switch to autobauding from a bit rate that cannot be detected by the autobaud mechnism (e.g. 300 baud). Responses to +IPR=0 and any commands on the same line might
be corrupted.
· When entering several AT commands on the same line, consider the requirements described in the
Notes of Chapter 2.47.
· See also Chapter 2.46.
Autobauding and bit rate after restart
The most recently detected bit rate cannot be stored when the ME is powered down (with AT^SMSO).
Therefore, the ME will use 57600 bps by default, until the first AT character was transmitted and the bit
rate was correctly detected.
For example, URCs generated after restart will be output with 57600 bps. The same applies to
autoanswer calls if SIM PIN1 authentication is done automatically and autoanswer mode ATS0¹0 is
stored to the user profile determined with AT&W (if not stored to the user profile ATS0 is reset to its
default 000 after restart and thus not relevant for autobauding).
Autobauding and multiplex mode
If autobauding is active you cannot switch to multiplex mode (see Chapter 4.28). Vice versa, when you
run the multiplex mode, the write command AT+IPR=<rate> cannot be used.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 54 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3 AT Commands for FAX
The following commands can be used for FAX transmission. If the ME is acting as a Fax modem to a
PC-based application (e.g. “WinFax“) it is necessary to select the proper Service Class (Fax Class)
provided by the ME. The ME reports its Service Class capabilities, the current setting and the range of
services available. This is provided by the AT+FCLASS command (see pg. 58).
Table 10: Service Classes supported by ME
+FCLASS parameter
0
1
2
Service Class
Data modem
Service Class 1
Manufacture specific
Reference, Standard
e.g. TIA/EIA-602 or ITU V.25ter
EIA/TIA-578-A
This document and EIA PN2388 (draft)
When sending a FAX with a standard FAX application for Personal Computers it is recommended to
use autobauding (AT+IPR=0).
Responses that may occur during a fax call are presented in the form of Unsolicited Result Codes
(URCs). A summary of Fax specific URCs is listed in Chapter 8.1.3, Table 19.
The following AT commands are dummy commands. Invoking these commands will not cause ERROR result codes, but the commands have no functionality.
AT+FAA
AT+FECM
AT+FLNFC
AT+FLPL
AT+FMINSP
AT+FRBC
AT+FREL
AT+FSPL
AT+FTBC
AT+FWDFC
Auto Answer mode
Error Correction Mode control
Page Length format conversion
Indicate document available for polling
Minimum Phase C speed
Phase C data receive byte count
Phase C received EOL alignment
Enable polling
Phase C data transmit byte count
Page width format conversion
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 55 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.1
AT+FBADLIN Bad Line Threshold
Read command
AT+FBADLIN?
This command defines the “Copy-Quality-OK”-threshold. If <badline> consecutive lines have pixel count errors in normal resolution (98 dpi) mode, then the
copy quality is unacceptable. If <badline> * 2 consecutive lines have pixel count
errors in fine resolution (196 dpi) mode, then the copy quality is unacceptable.
“Copy Quality Not OK” occurs if either the error percentage is too high or too
many consecutive lines contain errors. A value of 0 implies that error checking
is not present or disabled.
Response
<badlin> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FBADLIN=
<badlin>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<badlin>
0 – 10 – 255 bad lines
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.2
AT+FBADMUL Error Threshold Multiplier
Read command
AT+FBADMUL?
This command defines the “Copy-Quality-OK” multiplier. The number of lines
received with a bad pixel count is multiplied by this number. If the result exceeds the total number of lines on the page the error rate is considered too
high. A threshold multiplier value of 20 corresponds to a 5% error rate. A value
of 0 implies that error checking is not present or disabled.
Response
<badmul> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FBADMUL=
<n>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<n>
0 – 20 – 255
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 56 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.3
AT+FBOR Query data bit order
Test command
AT+FBOR=?
Query the bit order for receive mode. The mode is set by the ME depending on
the selected Service Class, see “AT+FCLASS Fax: Select, read or test service
class”, pg. 58.
Response
(list of supported bit order modes <bor>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+FBOR?
<bor> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FBOR=<bor>
OK
Parameter
<bor>
0
direct bit order for both Phase C and for Phase B/D data.
[1]
Reversed bit order for Phase C data, direct Bit Order for
Phase B/D data.
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 57 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.4
AT+FCIG Query or set the Local polling id
Test command
Response
AT+FCIG =?
(max. length of Local Polling ID string) (range of supported ASCII character
values) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+FCIG?
<id> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FCIG =<id>
OK
Parameter
<id>
Local Polling ID string, max. length and possible content as reported
by test command. Default value is empty string (“”).
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
See also “AT+FLID Query or set the Local Id setting capabilities”, pg. 64.
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.5
AT+FCLASS Fax: Select, read or test service class
Test command
See introduction to fax commands, pg. 55.
AT+FCLASS=?
Response
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+FCLASS?
<n> OK
Parameter
Write command
AT+FCLASS=
<n>
See write command
The ME is set to a particular mode of operation (data, fax). This allows the ME
to process information in a manner suitable for that type of information.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
[0]
data (e.g. EIA/TIA-602 or ITU V.25ter)
1
Fax Class 1 (EIA/TIA-578-A, Service Class 1)
2
Fax Class 2 (EIA/TIA SP-2388, an early draft version of
EIA/TIA-592-A – Service class 2.1)
Reference
Note
EIA/TIA-592-A
Using Error Correcting Mode (ECM) when sending FAXes over GSM should be
avoided.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 58 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.6
AT+FCQ Copy Quality Checking
Test command
This command controls Copy Quality checking when receiving a fax.
AT+FCQ =?
Response
(list of supported copy quality checking <cq>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+FCQ?
<cq> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FCQ =<cq>
OK
Parameter
<cq>
0
No copy quality checking. The ME will generate Copy Quality OK (MCF) responses to complete pages.
[1]
ME can check 1-D phase data. The connected application
must check copy quality for 2-D phase C data
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for for Fax Class 2 only.
3.7
AT+FCR Capability to receive
Write command
Response
AT+FCR=<cr>
OK
Parameter
<cr>
[0]
ME will not receive message data. This can be used when
the application has insufficient storage. The ME can send
and can be polled for a file.
1
ME can receive message data.
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 59 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.8
AT+FDCC Query or set capabilities
Test command
AT+FDCC =?
This command allows the connected application to sense and constrain the
capabilities of the facsimile DCE (=ME), from the choices defined in CCITT
T.30 Table 2.
Response
(list of <VR>s), (list of <BR>s), (list of <WD>s), (list of <LN>s), (list of <DF>s),
(list of <EC>s), (list of <BF>s), (list of <ST>s)
OK
Parameter
VR: Vertical Resolution, BR: Bit Rate, WD: Page Width, LN: Page Length, DF:
Data Compression Format, EC: Error Correction Mode, BF: Binary File Transfer Mode, ST: Scan Time/Line.
Note: For further information see AT+FDIS, pg. 62
Read command
Response
AT+FDCC?
<VR>,<BR>,<WD>,<LN>,<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,<ST>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FDCC=<VR>,
<BR>,<WD>,<LN>,
<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,
<ST>
OK
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Parameter
VR: Vertical Resolution, BR: Bit Rate, WD: Page Width, LN: Page Length, DF:
Data Compression Format, EC: Error Correction Mode, BF: Binary File Transfer Mode, ST: Scan Time/Line.
Note: For further information see AT+FDIS, pg. 62
Page 60 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.9
AT+FDFFC Data Compression Format Conversion
Test command
AT+FDFFC=?
This parameter determines the ME response to a mismatch between the data
format negotiated for the facsimile session, reported by the +FDCS:DF subparameter, and the Phase C data desired by the controlling application, indicated by the optional +FDT:DF subparameter, or the +FDIS=DF subparameter
for the +FDR operation.
Response
(list of supported <df>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+FDFFC?
<df> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FDFFC =<df>
OK
Parameter
<df>
[0]
Mismatch checking is always disabled. The controlling application has to check the +FDCS: DF subparameter and
transfer matching data.
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 61 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.10 AT+FDIS Query or set session parameters
Test command
AT+FDIS =?
This command allows the controlling application to sense and constrain the
capabilities used for the current session. It uses +FDIS to generate DIS or
DTC messages directly, and uses +FDIS and received DIS messages to generate DCS messages.
Response
(list of <VR>s), (list of <BR>s), (list of <WD>s), (list of <LN>s), (list of <DF>s),
(list of <EC>s), (list of <BF>s), (list of <ST>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+FDIS?
<VR>,<BR>,<WD>,<LN>,<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,<ST>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FDIS =
<VR>,<BR>,<WD>,
<LN>,<DF>,<EC>,
<BF>,<ST>
OK
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Parameter
Vertical Resolution
VR
0
normal, 98 lpi
1
fine, 196 lpi
Bit Rate
BR 0
2400 bit/s, V.27ter
1
4800 bit/s, V.27ter
2
7200 bit/s, V.29
3
9600 bit/s, V.29
Page Width
WD 0 *)
1728 pixels in 215mm
1
2048 pixels in 255 mm
2
2432 pixels in 303 mm
3
1216 pixels in 151 mm
4
864 pixels in 107 mm
Page Length
LN
0
A4, 297mm
1
B4, 364mm
2
unlimited length
Data Compression Format DF
0 *)
1-D modified Huffman
1
2-D modified read
2
2-D uncompressed mode
Error correction
EC 0 *)
disable ECM
(Annex A/T.30)
1
enable ECM, 64 bytes/frame
2
enable ECM, 256 bytes/frame
Binary File mode
BF
0 *)
disable BFT
Transfer Mode
1
enable BFT
Scan Time/Line
ST
0 *)
0 ms (at VR= normal)
1
5 ms
2
10 ms
3
10 ms
4
20 ms
5
20 ms
6
40 ms
7
40 ms
*) Note: Only the default value needs to be implemented. Use test command
to check which parameter values are really possible.
Page 62 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.11 AT+FDR Begin or continue phase C data reception
Execute command
The +FDR command initiates transition to Phase C data reception.
AT+FDR
Response
CONNECT
or
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.12 AT+FDT Data Transmission
Execute command
AT+FDT
This command requests the ME to transmit a Phase C page. When the ME is
ready to accept Phase C data, it issues the negotiation responses and the
CONNECT result code to the application.
In Phase B, the +FDT command releases the ME to proceed with negotiation,
and releases the DCS message to the remote station. In Phase C, the +FDT
command resumes transmission after the end of a data stream transmited before.
Response
CONNECT
Write command
Response
AT+FDT=
<DF>,<VR>,<BR>,
<WD>,<LN>
CONNECT
Parameter
<dt>
DF,VR,BR,WD,LN comma separated parameter list
Data Compression Format
DF
0
1
2
1-D modified Huffman
2-D modified read
2-D uncompressed mode
Vertical Resolution
VR
Bit Rate
BR
0
1
0
1
2
3
normal, 98 lpi
fine, 196 lpi
2400 bit/s, V.27ter
4800 bit/s, V.27ter
7200 bit/s, V.29
9600 bit/s, V.29
Page Width
WD
Page Length
LN
0
1
2
3
4
0
1
2
1728 pixels in 215mm
2048 pixels in 255 mm
2432 pixels in 303 mm
1216 pixels in 151 mm
864 pixels in 107 mm
A4, 297mm
B4, 364mm
unlimited length
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 63 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.13 AT+FET End a page or document
Write command
AT+FET=<ppm>
This command indicates that the current page or partial page is complete. An
ERROR response code results if this command is issued while the mode is onhook.
Response
OK
Parameter
<ppm>
Post Page Message Codes
1 another document next
2 no more pages or documents
4 another page, procedure interrupt
5 another document, procedure interrupt
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.14 AT+FK Kill operation, orderly FAX abort
Execute command
This command causes the TA to terminate the session in an orderly manner.
AT+FK
Response
OK
Reference
Note
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.15 AT+FLID Query or set the Local Id setting capabilities
Test command
Response
AT+FLID =?
(max. character length of Local ID string) (range of supported ASCII character
values) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+FLID?
< lid > OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FLID =<lid>
OK
Parameter
<lid>
Local ID string, max. length and possible content as reported by test
command. Default value is empty string (“”).
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
See also “AT+FCIG Query or set the Local polling id”, pg. 57.
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 64 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.16 AT+FMDL Identify Product Model
Read command
Send the model identification to the TA
AT+FMDL?
Response
Gipsy Soft Protocolstack
OK
Reference
Note
Siemens
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.17 AT+FMFR Request Manufacturer Identification
Read command
Send the manufacturer identification to the TA
AT+FMFR?
Response
SIEMENS
OK
Reference
Note
Siemens
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.18 AT+FOPT Set bit order independently
Write command
AT+FOPT=<opt>
Model specific command to set bit order independently of the understanding
which is "mirrored" and which is direct.
Response
OK
Parameter
<opt>
0 non-standard
1 standard
Reference
Note
Siemens
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 65 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.19 AT+FPHCTO DTE Phase C Response Timeout
Read command
AT+FPHCTO?
The time-out value <tout> determines how long the DCE will wait for a command
after reaching the end of data when transmitting in Phase C. When time-out is
reached, the DCE assumes that there are no more pages or documents to send.
Response
<tout> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Parameter
AT+FPHCTO=
<tout>
<tout>
0 – 30 – 255
time-out value in 100ms units.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.20 AT+FREV Identify Product Revision
Test command
Sends the revision identification to the TA
AT+FREV?
Response
V2.550
OK
Reference
Note
Siemens
Used for Fax Class 2 only
3.21 AT+FRH Receive Data Using HDLC Framing
Execute command
This command causes the TA to receive frames using the HDLC protocol and the
AT+FRH=<mod> modulation defined below. An ERROR response code results if this command is
issued while the modem is on-hook.
Response
CONNECT
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<mod>
modulation mode
3
V21 Ch2
24
V.27ter
2400 bps
48
V.27ter
4800 bps
72
V.29
7200 bps
96
V.29
9600 bps
Reference
Note
TIA/EIA-578
Used for Fax Class 1 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
300 bps
Page 66 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.22 AT+FRM Receive Data
Test command
Response
AT+FRM=?
(List of supported modulation modes <mod>s) OK
Parameter
Write command
AT+FRM=<mod
>
See write command
This command causes the TA to enter the receive mode using the modulation
defined below. An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while
the modem is on-hook.
Response
CONNECT
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<mod>
96
V.29
9600 bps
72
V.29
7200 bps
48
V.27ter
4800 bps
24
V.27ter
2400 bps
Reference
Note
TIA/EIA-578
Used for Fax Class 1 only
3.23 AT+FRS Receive Silence
Write command
AT+FRS=<time>
+FRS=n causes the TA to report an OK result code to the TE after <time> 10 millisecond intervals of silence have been detected on the line. This command is
aborted if any character is received by the DTE. The modem discards the aborting character and issues an OK result code. An ERROR response code results if
this command is issued while the mode is on-hook.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<time>
0 – 255 no. of 10 millisecond intervals
Reference
Note
TIA/EIA-578
Used for Fax Class 1 only
3.24 AT+FTH Transmit Data Using HDLC Framing
Write command
AT+FTH=<mod>
This command causes the TA to transmit data using HDLC protocol and the
modulation mode defined below. An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while the modem is on-hook.
Response
CONNECT
Parameter
<mod>
3 V.21 Ch2
300 bps
Reference
Note
TIA/EIA-578
Used for Fax Class 1 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 67 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.25 AT+FTM Transmit Data
Test command
Response
AT+FTM=?
(List of supported modulation modes) OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
This command causes the TA to transmit data using the modulation mode deAT+FTM=<mod> fined below. An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while
the modem is on-hook.
Response
CONNECT
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
Parameter
<mod>
modulation mode
96
V.29
9600 bps
72
V.29
7200 bps
48
V.27ter
4800 bps
24
V.27ter
2400 bps
Reference
Note
TIA/EIA-578
Used for Fax Class 1 only
3.26 AT+FTS Stop Transmission and Wait
Write command
AT+FTS=<time>
This command causes the TA to terminate a transmission and wait for <time> 10
millisecond intervals before responding with the OK result code to the DTE.
Response
An ERROR response code results if this command is issued while the modem is
on-hook.
Parameter
<time>
0 – 85
no. of 10 millisecond intervals
Reference
Note
TIA/EIA-578
Used for Fax Class 1 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 68 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
3.27 AT+FVRFC Vertical resolution format conversion
Test command
AT+FVRFC =?
This command determines the DCE response to a mismatch between the vertical
resolution negotiated for the facsimile session and the Phase C data desired by
the DTE.
Response
(List of supported mismatch checking modes) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+FVRFC?
<vrfc> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+FVRFC
=<vrfc>
OK
Parameter
<vrfc>
0
disable mismatch checking.
[2]
enable mismatch checking, with resolution conversion of 1-D
data in the DCE, and an implied AT+FK command executed
on 2-D mismatch detection
Reference
Note
EIA PN-2388
Used for Fax Class 2 only
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 69 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4 AT Commands originating from GSM 07.07
These AT Commands are according to ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute)
GSM 07.07 document.
4.1
AT+CACM Accumulated call meter (ACM) reset or query
Test command
Response
AT+CACM=?
OK
Parameter
Read command
Response
AT+CACM?
TA returns the current ACM value.
+CACM: <acm> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<acm>
string type; three bytes of the current ACM value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30) 000000 – FFFFFF
Write command
Parameter
AT+CACM=
[<passwd>]
<passwd> string type:
SIM PIN2
Response
TA resets the Advice of Charge related to the accumulated call meter (ACM)
value in SIM file EF(ACM). ACM contains the total number of home units both
for the current and preceding calls.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Reference
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 70 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.2
AT+CALA Set alarm time
Test command
AT+CALA=?
Test command returns supported array index values <n>, alarm types <type>,
and maximum length of the text <tlength> to be output.
Response
+CALA: (list of supported <n>s), (list of supported <type>s), (range of supported <tlength>) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Read command returns the list of current active alarm settings in the ME.
AT+CALA?
Response
+CALA: <time>[,<n>[,<type>[,<text>]]]
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CALA=<time>
[,<n>[,<type>
[,<text>]]]
The write command sets an alarm time in the ME. When the alarm is timed out
and executed the ME returns an Unsolicited Result Code (URC) and the alarm
time is reset to “00/01/01,00:00:00”.
The alarm can adopt two functions, depending on whether or not you switch the
GSM engine off after setting the alarm:
Reminder message:
You can use the alarm function to generate reminder messages. For this purpose, set the alarm as described below and
do not switch off or power down the ME. When executed the
message comes as an Unsolicited Result Code.
Alarm mode: Applies to TC35i module only. Alarm mode is not permitted for
use with TC35i Terminal. For details see [2].
You can use the alarm function to restart the ME when powered down. For this purpose, set the alarm as described below.
Then power down the ME by entering the AT^SMSO command
(pg. 208). When the alarm time is reached, the ME will wake up
to Alarm mode. To prevent the ME from unintentionally logging
into the GSM network, Alarm mode provides restricted operation. Upon wake-up, the ME indicates an Unsolicited Result
Code which reads: ^SYSSTART ALARM MODE. A limited
number of AT commands is available during Alarm mode:
AT+CCLK, AT+CALA, AT^SBC, AT^SCTM, AT^SMSO. The
ME remains deregistered from the GSM network.
If you want the ME to return to full operation (normal operating
mode) it is necessary to drive the ignition line (IGT pin of application interface) to ground. If your application is battery powered note that charging cannot be started while the ME is in
Alarm mode. For details please refer to [1].
Response
OK
If setting fails:
+CME ERROR: <err> Refer to Chapter 8.1.1, pg. 251, for <err> values.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 71 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Parameter
<time>
string type value; format is "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss", where characters
th
indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes. E.g. 6 of
May 2003, 22:10:00 hours equals to “03/05/06,22:10:00" (see also
AT+CCLK in Chapter 4.7). Note: if <time> equals current date and
time or is set to an earlier date, TA returns +CME ERROR: <21>.
<n>
Integer type value indicating the array index of the alarm.
The ME allows to set only one alarm at a time. Therefore, the list of
supported alarm events indicated by the test command AT+CALA=?
is <n>=0. If a second alarm time is set, the previous alarm will be deleted. Therefore, the read command AT+CALA will always return
<n>=0. This is also true if individual settings are made on the various
Multiplexer channels, for details see notes below.
<type>
Integer type value indicating the type of the alarm
0 Alarm indication: text message via serial interface
<text>
String type value indicating the text to be displayed when alarm time
is reached; maximum length is <tlength>. By factory default, <text> is
undefined.
Note: <text> will be stored to the non-volatile flash memory when the
device enters the Power Down mode via AT^SMSO (pg. 208). Once
saved, it will be available upon next power-up, until you overwrite it by
typing another text. This eliminates the need to enter the full string
when setting a fresh alarm.
For text coding see Chapters 1.5 and 8.5.
<tlength> integer type value indicating the maximum length of <text>. The
maximum length is 16.
Unsolicited result code
Indicates reminder message:
+CALA: <text>
Indicates ME wake-up into Alarm mode:
^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
+CALA: <text>
If autobauding is active (AT+IPR=0) the URCs ^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
and +CALA: <text> do not appear. Therefore, avoid using Alarm mode in conjunction with autobauding.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· After the alarm was executed the parameter <time> of AT+CALA will be reset to "00/01/01,00:00:00", but <text> will be preserved as described above.
· If the ME is totally disconnected from power supply the most recently saved
configuration of +CALA: <time>[,<n>[,<type>[,<text>]]] will be retained
when the ME is powered up.Yet take into account that the RTC will be reset
to its default <time> = “02/01/01,00:00:00” (see Chapter 4.7).
· Each time TC35i is restarted it takes 1s to re-initialize the RTC and to update the current time. Therefore, it is recommended to wait 1s before using
the commands AT+CCLK and AT+CALA (for example 1s after ^SYSSTART
has been output).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 72 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
· Alarm settings on different Multiplexer channels (see Chapter 4.28):
- On each channel an individual <text> message can be stored, but only
one time setting applies. This means an alarm <time> set on one of the
channels overwrites the time setting on all remaining channels. Therefore, the total number of alarm events returned by the read command
AT+CALA? will always be <n>=0, no matter whether different text messages are stored.
- When the alarm is timed out and executed the ME sends the URC only
on the channel where the most recent alarm setting was made. The
alarm time will be reset to “00/01/01,00:00:00” on all channels.
Examples
Example 1:
You may want to configure a reminder message for May 31, 2003, at 9.30h, including the message "Good Morning".
Write command:
AT+CALA="03/05/31,09:30:00",0,0,"Good Morning"
OK
Do not switch off the GSM engine. When the alarm is executed the ME returns
the following URC:
+CALA: Good Morning
Example 2:
To set a fresh alarm using the same message as in Example 1, simply enter
date and time. <n>, <type>, <text>, <tlength> can be omitted:
AT+CALA="03/05/31,08:50:00"
OK
When the alarm is executed the URC comes with the same message:
+CALA: Good Morning
Example 3:
To configure the alarm mode, e.g. for May 20, 2003, at 8.30h, enter
AT+CALA="03/05/20,08:30:00"
OK
Next, power down the ME:
AT^SMSO
^SMSO: MS OFF
When the alarm is executed the ME wakes up to Alarm mode and displays a
URC. If available, this line is followed by the individual <text> most recently
saved. If no individual message was saved only the first line appears.
^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
+CALA: Good Morning
Table 11: Summary of AT commands available in Alarm mode
AT command
AT+CALA
AT+CCLK
AT^SBC
AT^SCTM
AT^SMSO
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Use
Set alarm time
Set date and time of RTC
Enable / disable presentation of URC ^SBC for indication of undervoltage or
overvoltage conditions. Query average current consumption of TC35i
Query temperature of GSM engine
Power down GSM engine
Page 73 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.3
AT+CAMM Accumulated call meter maximum (ACMmax) set or query
Test command
Response
AT+CAMM=?
OK
Parameter
Read command
Response
AT+CAMM?
TA returns the current ACMmax value.
+CAMM: <acmmax> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CAMM=
[<acmax>[,<passwd>]]
TA sets the Advice of Charge related to the accumulated call meter maximum value in SIM file EF (ACMmax). ACMmax contains the maximum
number of home units allowed to be consumed by the subscriber.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<acmmax>
<passwd>
string type; three bytes of the max. ACM value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30) 000000
disable ACMmax feature 000001-FFFFFF
string type
SIM PIN2
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 74 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.4
AT+CAOC Advice of Charge information
Test command
Response
AT+CAOC=?
+CAOC: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CAOC?
+CAOC: <mode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CAOC=<mode> TA sets the Advice of Charge supplementary service function mode.
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If <mode>=0, TA returns the current call meter value
OK
Parameter
<mode> 0 query CCM value
<ccm>
string type; three bytes of the current CCM value in hexadecimal
format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); bytes are similarly coded as ACMmax value in the SIM 000000-FFFFFF
Execute command
Response
AT+CAOC
TA returns the current call meter value
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If <mode>=0, TA returns the current call meter value
+CAOC: <ccm> OK
Parameter
See write command
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 75 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.5
AT+CBST Select bearer service type
Test command
Response
AT+CBST=?
+CBST: (list of supported <speed>s),(list of supported <name>s),(list of supported <ce>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CBST?
+CBST: <speed>,<name>,<ce>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CBST=
<speed>[,<name>
[,<ce>]]
TA selects the bearer service <name>, the data rate <speed> and the connection element <ce> to be used when data calls are originated. The settings also
apply to mobile terminated data calls, especially when single numbering
scheme calls or calls from analog devices are received (see also Chapter
4.45).
OK
Parameter
<speed> 0
4
2400 bps ( V.22bis)
6
4800 bps ( V.32)
7
9600 bps (V.32)
14
14400 bps (V.34)
68
2400 bps (V.110)
70
4800 bps (V.110)
71
9600 bps (V.110)
75
14400 bps (V.110)
<name> 0
<ce>
autobauding
1
asynchronous modem
non-transparent
Transparent mode is not supported.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
GSM 02.02[1]: List of allowed combinations of subparameters.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 76 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.6
AT+CCFC Call forwarding number and conditions control
Test command
Response
AT+CCFC=?
+CCFC: (list/range of supported <reas>s) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Write command
Response
AT+CCFC=<reas>,
<mode>[,<number>
[,<type>[,<class>
[,<time>]]]]
TA controls the call forwarding supplementary service. Registration, erasure,
activation, deactivation and status query are supported.
If <mode> ¹ 2 and command successful:
OK
If <mode> = 2, <reas> ¹ 2 and command successful:
+CCFC: <status>, <class1>[, <number>, <type>]
[<CR><LF>+CCFC: ....] OK
If <mode> = 2, <reas> = 2 and command successful:
+CCFC: <status>, <class1>[, <number>, <type> [, <time>]]
[<CR><LF>+CCFC: ....] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<reas>
unconditional
mobile busy
no reply
not reachable
all call forwarding (includes reasons 0, 1, 2 and 3)
all conditional call forwarding (includes reasons 1, 2 and 3)
<mode> 0
1
2
3
4
disable call forwarding
enable call forwarding
query status of call forwarding
register <number> and activate call forwarding
erase <number> and deactivate call forwarding
<number>
string type phone number of forwarding address in format specified by <type>.
If you select <mode> = 3, the phone <number> will be registered
in the network. This allows you to disable / enable CF to the
same destination without the need to enter the phone number
once again. Depending on the services offered by the provider
the registration may be mandatory before CF can be used. The
number remains registered in the network until you register another number or erase it using <mode> = 4.
<type>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
0
1
2
3
4
5
type of address in integer format; default 145 when dialing string includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129
Page 77 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<class>
integer or sum of integers each representing a <class> of information:
1
voice
2
data
4
fax
8
short message service
16
data circuit sync
32
data circuit async
64
dedicated packet access
128
dedicated PAD access
x
combination of some of the above classes.
For example, the default setting 7 represents the sum of
the integers 1, 2 and 4 (CF for voice, data and fax). The
value 255 covers all classes. If the <class> parameter is
omitted, the default value 7 is used.
<time>
time to wait before call is forwarded, rounded to a multiple of 5 sec..
1...20..30 (only for <reas>=no reply)
<status> 0 not active
1 active
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
GSM 02.04
GSM 02.82
GSM 03.82
GSM 04.82
· You can register, disable, enable and erase <reas> 4 and 5 as described
above. However, querying the status of <reas> 4 and 5 with AT+CCFC will
result in an error (“CME error: Operation not supported”). As an alternative,
you may use the ATD command followed by *'# codes to check the status
of these two reasons. See Chapter 8.4 for a complete list of *# GSM
codes. See also examples below.
· The AT+CCFC command offers a broad range of call forwarding options
according to the GSM specifications. However, when you attempt to set a
call forwarding option which is not provisioned or not yet subscribed to, the
setting will not take effect regardless of the response returned. The responses in these cases vary with the network (for example “OK”, “Operation not allowed”, “Operation not supported” etc.). To make sure check the
call forwarding status with <mode>=2.
· <class> 2 (data) comprises all those <class> values between 16 and 128,
that are supported both by the network and the MS. This means, a setting
made for <class> 2 applies to all remaining data classes (if supported). In
addition, you can assign a different setting to a specific class. For example, you can activate Call Forwarding for all data classes, but deactivate it
for a specific data class.
· The command has been implemented with the full set of <class> parameters according to GSM 07.07. For actual applicability of SS “call forwarding” to a specific service or service group (a specific <class> value) please
consult table A.1 of GSM 02.04.
· Most networks will not permit registration of new parameters for conditional
call forwarding (reasons 1,2,3,5) while unconditional call forwarding is enabled.
4.6.1 Examples: Call forwarding
Please note that when you configure or query call forwarding without specifying any classes, the settings will refer to classes 1, 2 and 4 only (=default).
Example 1
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
To register the destination number of unconditional call forwarding (CFU) for
the default classes voice, data and fax:
at+ccfc=0,3,"+493012345678",145
OK
Page 78 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example 2
Example 3
Remember that call forwarding will be activated when you register the destination number.
To query the status of CFU without specifying <class>:
at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 1,1,"+493012345678",145
+CCFC: 1,2,"+493012345678",145
+CCFC: 1,4,"+493012345678",145
OK
To deactivate CFU without specifying <class>:
at+ccfc=0,0
OK
To check whether CFU was successfully deactivated (note that the destination number remains registered in the network when you disable CFU):
at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 0,1,"+493012345678",145
+CCFC: 0,2,"+493012345678",145
+CCFC: 0,4,"+493012345678",145
OK
Example 4
To erase the registered CFU destination number:
at+ccfc=0,4
OK
Now, when you check the status, no destination number will be indicated:
at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 0,1
+CCFC: 0,2
+CCFC: 0,4
Example 5
To query the status of CFU for all classes:
at+ccfc=0,2,,,255
+CCFC:
+CCFC:
+CCFC:
+CCFC:
+CCFC:
+CCFC:
+CCFC:
+CCFC:
OK
Example 6
0,1
0,2
0,4
0,8
0,16
0,32
0,64
0,128
<reas>=4 or 5 cannot be used to query the status of all call forwarding reasons (see also notes above):
at+ccfc=4,2
+CME error: operation not supported
at+ccfc=5,2
+CME error: operation not supported
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 79 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.7
AT+CCLK Real Time Clock
Test command
Response
AT+CCLK=?
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CCLK?
+CCLK: <time>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter:
<time>:
string type value; format is "yy/MM/dd,hh:mm:ss", where characters
indicate year (two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds;
th
e.g. 6 of May 2003, 22:10:00 hours equals to “03/05/06,22:10:00"
Write command
Response
AT+CCLK=<time>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter:
<time>
see read command
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· Each time TC35i is restarted it takes 1s to re-initialize the RTC and to update the current time. Therefore, it is recommended to wait 1s before using
the commands AT+CCLK or AT+CALA command (for example 1s after
^SYSSTART has been output).
· <time> is retained if the device enters the Power Down mode via
AT^SMSO (pg. 212).
· <time> will be reset to its default value if power is totally disconnected. In
this case, the clock starts with <time> = “02/01/01,00:00:00” upon next
power-up.
· See AT+CALA, pg. 71.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 80 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.8
AT+CCUG: Closed User Group
Test command
The Test command returns the supported parameters.
AT+CCUG=?
Response
+CCUG: (list of supported <n>s),(list of supported <index>),(list of supported
<info>) OK
Read command
AT+CCUG?
The Read command returns if the permanent CUG invocation is activated,
which CUG index is chosen, and if Preferential Group or Outgoing Access is
suppressed.
Response
+CCUG: <n>, <index>,<info> OK
Write command
AT+CCUG=[[<n>[,
<index>[,<info>]]
The write command serves to activate or deactivate permanent CUG invocation, to set the desired CUG index, and to specify if Preferential Group or Outgoing Access shall be suppressed.
Parameter
<n>
<index>
(numeric)
0
Deactivate permanent CUG mode
1
Activate permanent CUG mode
(numeric)
0…9 Explicit selection of CUG index
10
<info>
No index (preferred CUG taken from subscriber data)
State of the call (numeric)
0
No information
1
Suppress Outgoing Access
2
Suppress preferential CUG
3
Suppress preferential CUG and Outgoing Access.
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
Note
GSM 02.85,
GSM 03.85,
GSM 04.85,
Siemens
· The active settings of omitted parameters are retained without changes.
· Upon delivery, settings are predefined with <n>=0, <index>=10, <info>=0.
These delivery defaults cannot be recalled automatically.
· Some combinations of parameters may lead to the rejection of CUG calls by
the network. For more information please consult GSM 04.85.
· ATZ or AT&F have no impact on the current settings.
· See Chapter 2.5 for instructions of how to activate or deactivate the CCUG
feature call by call.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 81 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.9
AT+CCWA Call waiting
Test command
Response
AT+CCWA=?
+CCWA: (list of supported <n>s)
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CCWA?
+CCWA: <n>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CCWA=
[<n>,[<mode>
[,<class>]]]
This command controls the Call Waiting supplementary service according to
GSM 02.83. Activation, deactivation and status query are supported.
Response
If command is successful:
If <mode>=2
+CCWA: <status>, <class>
[<CR><LF>+CCWA: ...]
<CR><LF>OK
otherwise
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
<n>
Sets/shows the presentation mode of URC in the TA
0
disable display of the URC “+CCWA” or “^SCWA”
1
enable display of the URC “+CCWA” or “^SCWA”
<status>
0
1
<mode>
When <mode> is not given, network is not interrogated.
0
disable
1
enable
2
query status
<class>
Sum of integers each representing a class of information (default 7). Specifies the class of the active call.
1
voice
2
data
4
fax
7
voice, data and fax (1+2+4)
8
SMS
16
data circuit sync
32
data circuit async
64
dedicated packet access
128 dedicated PAD access
Call Waiting service not active
Call Waiting service active
Page 82 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Notes regarding <class>:
· The AT+CCWA command offers a broad range of options according to the
GSM specifications. However, when you attempt to set a <class> which is
not provisioned or not supported, the setting will not take effect regardless of
the response returned. The responses in these cases vary with the network
(for example “OK”, “Operation not allowed”, “Operation not supported” etc.).
To make sure check the current Call Waiting settings with <mode>=2.
· <class> 2 (data) comprises all those <class> values between 16 and 128,
that are supported both by the network and the MS. This means, a setting
made for <class> 2 applies to all remaining data classes (if supported). In
addition, you can assign a different setting to a specific class. For example,
you can activate Call Waiting for all data classes, but deactivate it for a specific data class.
· Despite the specifications stated in GSM 02.04 Call Waiting is not handled
uniformly among all networks:
GSM 02.04, Annex A, provides the following specification:
“The applicability of Call Waiting refers to the telecommunication service of
the active call and not of the waiting call. The incoming, waiting, call may be
of any kind.”
Nevertheless, networks do differ on the actual implementation of the service.
For example, the activation of “call waiting” for <class> 4, “fax”, causes
some networks to send a call waiting indication if a call “of any kind” comes
in during an active fax call, but others may (with the same settings active)
indicate a waiting fax call during any kind of active call. Thus, the only reliable way to receive or prevent a call waiting indication under any circumstances and in any network, is to activate or deactivate call waiting for all
tele- and bearer services (<class> 255).
Unsolicited Result
Codes
If <n>=1 and the Call Waiting service is enabled the following URCs indicate a
waiting call to the TE:
+CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,,<CLI validity>
This URC appears while the waiting call is still ringing.
or
^SCWA:
This URC indicates that a waiting call rang when the ME was in online mode
during a CSD call, but the calling party hang up before the ME went to command mode.
Parameters of the URC +CCWA
<number>
String type phone number of calling address in format specified by <type>
<type>
Type of address octet in integer format (refer to GSM 04.08
subclause 10.5.4.7)
<class>
Indicates the class of the waiting call. See Write command for
possible values.
<CLI validity> 0
1
2
CLI valid
CLI has been withheld
CLI is not available
If the active call is a CSD call, and a waiting call is received, then ME produces
a BREAK while still in online mode, and displays
· +CCWA URC (as above) when ME goes back to command mode while the
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 83 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
waiting call is still active and can be accepted
· or ^SCWA URC (as above) when ME goes back to command mode after the
waiting call has ended.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07,
GSM 02.04,
GSM 02.83
· With the AT+CHLD command, it is possible to establish a multiparty call or
to set the active voice call on hold and then accept a waiting voice call. For
instructions and examples see AT+CHLD in Chapter 4.16.
· Users should be aware that if Call Waiting is activated (<mode>=1), the
presentation of URCs needs to be enabled, too (<n>=1). Otherwise, on the
one hand, a waiting caller would be kept waiting due to lack of BUSY signals, while, on the other hand, the waiting call would not be indicated to the
called party.
Example
at+ccwa=1,1
To enable the presentation of the URC and to switch
on the indication of waiting calls during active voice,
data, fax calls (default classes).
OK
at+ccwa=,2
+CCWA: 1,1
+CCWA: 1,2
+CCWA: 1,4
To query the status of CW for default classes.
CW is activated during voice calls.
CW is activated during data calls.
CW is activated during fax calls.
OK
at+ccwa=0,0
To deactivate CW for default classes.
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 84 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.10 AT+CEER Extended error report
Test command
Response
AT+CEER=?
OK
Execute command
TA returns an extended error report of the reason for
· the last failure to set up a call (both mobile originated or terminated)
· the last call release
· the last failure to modify a call by using Supplementary Services
· the last failed attempt to activate, register, deactivate or deregister a Supplementary Service
AT+CEER
The error report is presented in numeric format. A description associated with
each number can be found in the Appendix.
The first parameter <location ID> serves to locate the other two parameters.
Depending on the failure either <reason> or <ss_release> are applicable.
Response
+CEER: <location ID>, <reason > , <ss_release>OK
Parameter
<location ID>
Location ID as number code.
Location IDs are listed in Chapter 8.1.5. Each ID is related
with another table that contains a list of <reason>s or
<ss_release>s.
<reason>
Reason for last failure as number code.
<reason> numbers and associated descriptions are listed in
several tables, sorted by different categories (see Chapters
8.1.6 to 8.1.18. The chapter numbers can be found proceeding from the Location ID table in Chapter 8.1.5.
<ss_release>
Reason for last failure related to a Supplementary Service.
<ss_release> numbers and associated descriptions are
listed in several tables (see Chapters 8.1.13 and 8.1.14. The
chapter numbers can be found proceeding from the Location ID table in Chapter 8.1.5.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· AT+CEER is not available for data calls, please use ATS18=1.
· Default output in the case of a no-error-situation is +CEER: 0,0,0.
· If <reason> ¹ 0, then <ss_release> = 0. Vice versa, if <reason> = 0, then
<ss_release> may be ¹ 0.
Example 1
A mobile originated call is rejected by the called party. Call setup is terminated
with NO CARRIER. To check for the cause the caller enters AT+CEER:
Atd”017511223344”;
NO CARRIER
at+ceer
+CEER: 8,21,0
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Call is rejected by called party.
Location ID stated in Chapter 8.1.5: 8 = GSM call
for L3 Call Control. The reference points to Chapter
8.1.10 where 21 = “Call rejected” and 0 = “No error”
(parameter <ss_release> is not applicable).
Page 85 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example 2
User attempts to set up a multiparty call, though there are only two parties involved in the present conversation:
Atd”017511223344”;
OK
at+chld=2
OK
at+chld=3
+CME ERROR: operation temporary not allowed
at+ceer
+CEER: 22,0,2
Location ID stated in Chapter 8.1.5: 22 = SIEMENS
cause for L3 call related SS. The reference points
to Chapter 8.1.14 where 2 = “Initial conditions not
fulfilled” (one active, one held call). 0 = “No error”
(parameter <reason> is not applicable).
Example 3
User attempts to activate call barring. Activation is denied by the network since
the password is blocked after previous failures to enter the password.
at+clck=”oi”,1,”0000”,3
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at+ceer
+CEER: 35,0,43
Location ID stated in Chapter 8.1.5: 35 = Supplementary Services network error. The reference
points to Chapter 8.1.13 where 43 = “NumberOfPWAttemptsViolation” (for example if wrong
password has been entered 3 times or more). 0 =
“No error” (parameter <reason> is not applicable).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 86 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.11 AT+CFUN Set phone functionality
Test command
Response
AT+CFUN=?
+CFUN: (list of supported <fun>s), (list of supported <rst>s)
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See below
Read command
Response
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: <fun>
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See below
Write command
AT+CFUN=
[<fun>[,<rst>]]
The write command can be used to reset the ME, to choose one of the SLEEP
modes or to return to full functionality.
Intended for power saving, SLEEP mode reduces the functionality level of the
ME to a minimum and, thus, minimizes the current consumption. SLEEP mode
falls in two categories: NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode <fun>=0 and CYCLIC
SLEEP modes, selectable as <fun>= 5, 6, 7 and 8.
NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode permanently blocks the serial interface. The CYCLIC SLEEP mode, however, is a dynamic process which alternatingly enables
and disables the serial interface. The major benefit of CYCLIC SLEEP mode is
that the serial interface remains accessible and that packet-switched calls can
be done without exiting the SLEEP mode. Also, NON-CYCLIC and CYCLIC
SLEEP mode provide different ways to wake up the ME. For details see Chapter 4.11.1.
For CYCLIC SLEEP mode (<fun>=5, 6, 7 and 8) the application must be configured to use hardware flow control. This is necessary since the CTS signal is
set/reset every time when the ME listens to a paging message from the base
station. This is the way how the module indicates to the application when the
UART is active. For detailed information on the timing of the CTS signal refer to
[1]. The default setting of hardware flow control is AT\Q0 which must be altered
to AT\Q3 (see Chapter 2.3). For use after restart you are advised to add it to
the user profile saved with AT&W.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fun>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
0
NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode:
In this mode, the AT interface is not accessible.
Consequently, once you have set <fun> level 0, do not
send further characters. Otherwise these characters remain
in the input buffer and may delay the output of an unsolicited
result code.
The first wake-up event stops power saving and takes the
ME back to full functionality level <fun>=1.
Page 87 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<rst>
1
Full functionality.
If the ME is in one of the two CYCLIC SLEEP modes you
can issue AT+CFUN=1 to stop power saving and return to
full functionality. Keep in mind that, unlike the reset
command described below, this action does not restart the
ME but only changes the level of functionality. See
parameter <rst> for details on the reset.
5
CYCLIC SLEEP mode:
In this mode, the serial interface is shortly enabled during
paging. If characters are recognized on the serial interface,
the ME stays active for 2 seconds after the last character
was sent or received.
6
CYCLIC SLEEP mode:
In this mode, the serial interface is shortly enabled during
paging. If characters are recognized on the serial interface,
the ME stays active for 10 minutes after the last character
was sent or received.
7
CYCLIC SLEEP mode:
In this mode, the serial interface is shortly enabled during
paging. If characters are recognized on the serial interface,
the ME stays active for 2 seconds after the last character
was sent or received.
ME exits SLEEP mode only if AT+CFUN=1 is entered.
8
CYCLIC SLEEP mode:
In this mode, the serial interface is shortly enabled during
paging. If characters are recognized on the serial interface,
the ME stays active for 10 minutes after the last character
was sent or received.
ME exits SLEEP mode only if AT+CFUN=1 is entered.
[0]
The <rst> parameter can only be used if the serial interface
is enabled. Due to the command syntax, you need to enter
<fun>, followed by <rst>, where <fun> is only a placeholder
and has no effect. See examples below.
1
ME resets and restarts to full functionality.
After reset and restart, PIN 1 authentication is necessary
(AT+CPIN). If autobauding is enabled it is recommended to
wait 3 to 5 seconds before entering the first AT command.
For details on autobauding refer to Chapter 2.47.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· If the ME is in Multiplexer mode, it is not recommended to activate SLEEP
mode with AT+CFUN=<n>. The best approach to properly control SLEEP
mode in this case is to issue the PSC messages described in [4], chapter
“Power saving control (PSC)”.
· In Multiplex mode, the CFUN profile is shared by all multiplexer channels.
· When a circuit-switched call is in progress, <fun>=7 or 8 can be activated
without terminating the call. However, setting <fun>=0, 5 or 6 during a circuit-switched call immediately disconnects this call.
· Please keep in mind that power saving works only while the ME is registered
to the GSM network. If you attempt to activate one of the SLEEP modes
while the ME is deregistered, the selected <fun> level will be set, but power
saving does not work to its full extent. Furthermore, in order to accept incoming calls, SMS or network related URCs in SLEEP mode the ME must
be registered when it enters the SLEEP mode.
· To check that power saving is on, you can query the status with AT+CFUN?,
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 88 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
if you have chosen CYCLIC SLEEP mode. If available, you can take advantage of the status LED controlled by the SYNC pin. See Chapter 7.48 and
[1]. The LED stops flashing once the module starts power saving.
Example 1
To check the level of functionality use the read command:
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: 1
Default mode after ME was restarted.
Remember that the AT interface is not accessible in NON-CYCLIC SLEEP
mode. Consequently, the read command is only useful when the ME is set to
full functionality or, when <fun> is set to 5, 6, 7 or 8.
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: 5
Example 2
CYCLIC SLEEP mode.
To set the ME to NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode enter
AT+CFUN=0
OK
When, for example, an SMS is being received and indicated by an unsolicited
result code (URC), the ME wakes up to full operation.
+CMTI: "SM",5
Note that the URC used in this example will appear
only if CMTI=1,1 was configured before. See Chapters
5.10 and 8.1.3.
After this, you may want to verify the operating status:
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: 1
Indicates that ME has entered full functionality mode.
Example 3
To stop CYCLIC SLEEP mode and return to full functionality:
AT+CFUN?
+CFUN: 5
OK
AT+CFUN=1
OK
Remember that this approach is not applicable to the NON-CYCLIC SLEEP
mode (since the serial interface is disabled). The NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode
ends with the first wake-up event.
Example 4
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
To reset and restart the ME:
AT+CFUN=1,1 or alternatively, AT+CFUN=0,1 or 5,1 or 6,1 or 7,1 or 8,1
OK
^SYSSTART
The ^SYSSTART URC confirms that the ME has been
rebooted.
Note that ^SYSSTART appears only if AT+IPR¹0. If the
ME is in autobaud mode, it is recommended to wait 3 to
5 seconds before entering the first AT command.
Remember to enter the SIM PIN after restart.
Page 89 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.11.1 Wake up the ME from SLEEP mode
A wake-up event is any event that switches off the SLEEP mode and causes the ME to return to full
functionality. In short, it takes the ME back to AT+CFUN=1.
Definitions of the state transitions described in Table 12:
Yes = ME exits SLEEP mode.
No = ME does not exit SLEEP mode.
Table 12: Wake-up events in NON-CYCLIC and CYCLIC SLEEP modes
Event
From SLEEP mode
AT+CFUN=0 to
AT+CFUN=1
From SLEEP mode
AT+CFUN=5 or 6 to
AT+CFUN=1
From SLEEP mode
AT+CFUN=7 or 8 to
AT+CFUN=1
Ignition line
No
No
No
Activation of /RTS0
Yes
No
No
Unsolicited Result Code
(URC)
Yes
Yes
No
Incoming voice or data call
Yes
Yes
No
Any AT command
(incl. outgoing voice or data
call, outgoing SMS)
Not possible
(UART disabled)
No
No
AT+CNMI=0,0 (= default, no
indication of received SMS)
No
No
No
AT+CNMI=1,1 (= displays
URC upon receipt of SMS)
Yes
Yes
No
RTC alarm
Yes
Yes
No
AT+CFUN=1
Not possible
(UART disabled)
Yes
Yes
Incoming SMS depending on
mode selected by AT+CNMI:
Recommendation:
· In NON-CYCLIC SLEEP mode, you can set an RTC alarm to wake up the ME and return to full
functionality. This is a useful approach because, in this mode, the AT interface is not accessible.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 90 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.12 AT+CGMI Request manufacturer identification
Test command
Response
AT+CGMI=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+CGMI
TA returns manufacturer identification text.
SIEMENS
OK
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
See also ”AT+GMI Request manufacturer identification”.
4.13 AT+CGMM Request model identification
Test command
Response
AT+CGMM=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+CGMM
TA returns product model identification text.
TC35i
OK
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
See also ”AT+GMM Request TA model identification”.
4.14 AT+CGMR Request revision identification of software status
Test command
Response
AT+CGMR=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+CGMR
TA returns product firmware version identification text.
REVISION xx.yy
OK
xx.yy
Version xx and variant yy of software release
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
See also AT+GMR Request TA revision identification of software status
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 91 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.15 AT+CGSN Request product serial number identification (IMEI) identical
to GSN
Test command
Response
AT+CGSN=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+CGSN
TA returns identification text for determination of the individual ME.
<sn> OK
Parameter
<sn> IMEI of the telephone (International Mobile station Equipment Identity)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
See also ”AT+GSN Request TA serial number identification”.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 92 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.16 AT+CHLD Call hold and multiparty
Test command
Response
AT+CHLD=?
+CHLD: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Write command
AT+CHLD=[<n>]
TA controls the supplementary services Call Hold, MultiParty and Explicit Call
Transfer. Calls can be put on hold, recovered, released, added to conversation
and transferred.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n>
0
Terminate all held calls; or set UDUB (User Determined User
Busy) for a waiting call, i.e. reject the waiting call.
1
Terminate all active calls (if any) and accept the other call
(waiting call or held call)
1X
Terminate the active call X (X= 1-7)
2
Place all active calls on hold (if any) and accept the other call
(waiting call or held call) as the active call
2X
Place all active calls except call X (X= 1-7) on hold
3
Add the held call to the active calls
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· The AT+CHLD command offers a broad range of options according to the
GSM specifications. However, many of these options are dependent on the
SIM card / service provider. If you attempt to invoke an option which is not
provisioned by the network, or not subscribed to, invocation of this option will
fail. The responses in these cases may vary with the network (for example
“Operation not allowed”, “Operation not supported” etc.).
· The supplementary service is only applicable to teleservice 11 (Speech telephony). AT+CHLD can be used to both accept a waiting voice call and put
an active voice call on hold.
A data or fax call, however, cannot be put on hold. But it is possible to place a
voice call on hold in order to accept a waiting data or fax call, and afterwards
to recover the voice call. In this case, the only difference over speech telephony is that AT+CHLD only puts the voice call on hold, the data or fax call need
to be manually accepted (via ATA).
Use the AT+CCWA command to activate the Call Waiting service. The
classes (bearer services) of waiting calls can be easily distinguished if the
URC +CCWA: <number>,<type>,<class>,,<CLI validity> is enabled.
For step-by-step instructions refer to the example below. A description of the
AT+CCWA command can be found in Chapter 4.9.
· The NO CARRIER result code is not displayed when a held call has been disconnected from either party. In order to get an indication of this disconnection,
please refer to AT+CSSN command (see Chapter 4.47).
· In conflicting situations, e.g. when a waiting call comes while there are already
held calls, the above procedures apply to the waiting call only. For example,
<n>=0 rejects the waiting call, but does not affect the held calls.
· The current states of all calls can be easily checked at any time by using the
AT+CLCC command. For details refer to Chapter 4.20.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 93 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example 1
^SYSSTART
at+cpin="9999"
OK
+CREG: 2
+CREG: 1,"0145","0016"
at+ccwa=1,1,1
OK
You are now registered.
You activate the indication of waiting calls
during active voice calls.
atd"0301234567";
OK
You start a voice call.
+CCWA: "+4901772222",145,32,,0
You receive a URC indicating a waiting data
call.
You set the voice call on hold.
You receive now the RING of the data call.
at+chld=2
OK
RING
RING
ata
CONNECT 9600/RLP
OK
You accept the data call.
With “+++” you go in command mode.
at+clcc
You interrogate the status of established calls.
+CLCC: 1,0,1,0,0,"0301234567",129
+CLCC: 2,1,0,1,0,"+491772222",145
OK
at+chld=1
The active data call is terminated and the held
voice call becomes active.
OK
at+clcc
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"0301234567",129
OK
Example 2
The example shows how to place a voice call on hold in order to accept a waiting
voice call and then return to the first call.
You query the status of CW during voice calls.
at+ccwa=,2,1
+CCWA: 1,1
Indication of waiting calls during active
voice calls is switched on.
OK
atd03038639839;
OK
You start a voice call.
+CCWA: "017511111",129,1,,0
You receive a URC indicating a waiting voice
call.
You interrogate the status of established calls.
at+clcc
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"03038639839",129,"Test"
+CLCC: 2,1,5,0,0,"01755812934",129,"D1_Voice"
OK
at+chld=2
OK
You put the first voice call on hold and accept
the waiting voice call.
at+clcc
You interrogate the status of established calls.
+CLCC: 1,0,1,0,0,"03038639839",129,"Test"
+CLCC: 2,1,0,0,0,"01755812934",129,"D1_Voice"
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 94 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
OK
at+chld=1
OK
at+clcc
+CLCC: 1,0,0,0,0,"03038639839",129,"Test"
OK
ath
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 95 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.17 AT+CHUP Hang up call
Test command
Response
AT+CHUP=?
OK
Execute command
Cancels all active and held calls.
AT+CHUP
Response
OK/ERROR
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
AT+CHUP implements the same behavior as ATH (see Chapter 2.12).
4.18 AT+CIMI Request international mobile subscriber identity
Test command
Response
AT+CIMI=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+CIMI
TA returns < IMSI> for identifying the individual SIM which is attached to ME.
<IMSI> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<IMSI> International Mobile Subscriber Identity (string without quotes)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 96 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.19 AT+CIND Indicator control
TC35i supports indicator event reporting for the following items: signal quality, service availability,
generation of sound in the ME, indication of unread short messages, full SMS storage, call in progress and roaming activities.
There are two ways to display the status and event reports by indicators:
1. You can directly query the current status of each indicator, simply by using the Read command
AT+CIND?. The Read command returns the status no matter whether the indicator has been registered with the Write command AT+CIND=[<stat>[,<stat>[,...]]].
2. You can take advantage of Unsolicited Result Codes. These are the +CIEV URCs which the ME
automatically sends to the application, whenever the value of the associated indicator changes.
The presentation of these URCs depends on two settings:
a) The indicators must be registered with the Write command AT+CIND=[<stat>[,<stat>[,...]]].
By default, all of them are registered each time the ME is switched on. Any URCs you do not
need can easily be excluded if deregistered with <stat>=0.
b) The URC presentation mode must be enabled with AT+CMER (see Chapter 4.26).
Test command
Response
AT+CIND=?
+CIND: (<indDescr>,(list of supported <indValue>s)) [,(<indDescr>,(list of supported <indValue>s))[,...]]
Parameters
indicator names and their <indValue> ranges.
<indDescr>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
"battchg"
Battery charge level (0-5),
where (0-5) means 0, 20, 40, 60, 80 or 100 per
cent of the remaining battery capacity. If no battery is connected to the ME, then the value will be
always equal to 5. See also Chapter 7.6.
"signal"
Signal quality (0-7 or 99 if not measurable). The
indicated value is the bit error rate of the signal
received. See also AT+CSQ in Chapter 4.46.
"service"
Service availability (0-1).
0: Not registered to any network
1: Registered to home network or, if ”roam”=1
then registered to another network
"sounder"
Sounder activity (0-1). The indicator provides information about tones generated in the ME. The
value 1 means for example:
Incoming call - ME is ringing. Note that the URC
+CIEV: sounder will be output only if ringing tones
are activated with AT^SRTC (see Chapter 7.43).
Waiting call – ME generates waiting call tone (if
call waiting is enabled).
Outgoing call – ME generates Call Progress tone.
Outgoing call – ME generates BUSY tone.
The value changes to 0, when the tone stops.
"message"
Unread short message(s) at memory location
<mem1> (0-1). See AT+CPMS (Chapter 5.11).
"call"
Call in progress (0-1).
Applies to voice, data and fax calls. Indicator
value is "1" if at least one call is in state "active" or
"held".
The indicator is issued each time a call status
transition ends in the "active" state or when a call
is removed from the list of current calls.
Page 97 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
"roam"
Roaming indicator (0-1).
0: Registered to home network or not registered
1: Registered to other network
"smsfull"
A short message memory storage in the MT has
become full (1) or memory locations are available
(0); i.e. the range is (0-1).
“rssi”
Received signal (field) strength, scaled to value
range 0…5, or 99 if not measurable.
0:
Signal strength < 112 dBm
1 – 4:
Signal strength in 15 dBm steps
5:
Signal strength > -51 dBm
See also AT+CSQ in Chapter 4.46. Value range
of AT+CSQ is 0 – 31.
<indValue> integer type value, in the range stated above for the corresponding
<indDescr>.
Read command
Response
AT+CIND?
TA returns the status of the ME indicators.
+CIND: <indValue>[,<indValue>[,...]]
OK
If error is related to ME functionality
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See Test command
Write command
AT+CIND=
[<state>
[,<state>[,...]]]
The Write command simply controls the registration / deregistration of indicators.
<state>
0
Indicator is deregistered. The indicator cannot be presented as
+CIEV URC, but can be directly queried with AT+CIND?.
1
Indicator is registered, indicator event report is allowed.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
Values of the <state> parameters are stored to the user profile (see AT&W, ATZ).
Examples
at+cind?
+CIND: 5,99,1,0,1,0,0,0,5 The battery is either full or no battery is connected to the ME. The bit error rate of the signal quality is not available (since there is no
call in progress). The ME is registered to the
home network. Unread short message(s)
available. Signal strength greater or equal -51
dBm.
at+cmer=2,0,0,2
OK
+CIEV: battchg,5
+CIEV: signal,99
+CIEV: service,1
+CIEV: sounder,0
+CIEV: message,0
+CIEV: call,0
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Activate Indicator Event Report with at+cmer
Page 98 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
+CIEV: roam,0
+CIEV: smsfull,0
+CIEV: rssi,4
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
atd"0123456";
OK
You make a call.
+CIEV: sounder,1
+CIEV: call,1
+CIEV: sounder,0
+CIEV: call,0
NO CARRIER
A set of +CIEV URCs reports is presented.
The receiver hangs up.
at+cind=,,,0,,0
OK
You deregister the indicators ‘sounder’ and
‘call’.
atd"0123456";
OK
NO CARRIER
You make a call.
This time, no +CIEV URCs are displayed.
Page 99 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.20 AT+CLCC List current calls of ME
Test command
Response
AT+CLCC=?
OK
Parameters
Execute command
Response
AT+CLCC
TA returns a list of current calls of ME. If command successful, but no calls are
available, no information response is sent to TE.
[+CLCC: <idx>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>,[<number>,<type>,[<alpha>]]]
[+CLCC: <idx>,<dir>,<stat>,<mode>,<mpty>,[<number>,<type>,[<alpha>]]]
[...]]]
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<idx>
Integer type; call identification number as described in GSM 02.30,
subclause 4.5.5.1. This number can be used in +CHLD command
operations.
<dir>
0
mobile originated (MO) call
1
mobile terminated (MT) call
<stat>
<mode>
<mpty>
Reference
state of the call:
0
active
1
held
2
dialing (MO call)
3
alerting (MO call)
4
incoming (MT call)
5
waiting (MT call)
bearer/teleservice:
0
voice
1
data
2
fax
9
unknown
0
call is not one of multiparty (conference) call parties
1
call is one of multiparty (conference) call parties
<number>
string type phone number in format specified by <type>
<type>
type of address octet in integer format; 145 when dialing string includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129
<alpha>
string type alphanumeric representation of <number> corresponding to the entry found in phone book; used character set should be
the one selected with command Select TE Character Set +CSCS.
The maximum displayed length of <alpha> is 16 characters. If
<alpha> has more than 16 characters, only the first 15 characters
will be displayed. To indicate an overflow, a special character will
th
be used for the 16 character: This will be a space if the character
set selected with +CSCS is “GSM”, or “E400” if the character set is
“UCS2”.
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 100 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.21 AT+CLCK Facility lock
Test command
Response
AT+CLCK=?
+CLCK: (list of supported <fac>s) OK
Parameter
Execute command
AT+CLCK=<fac>,
<mode>
[,<passwd>
[,<class>]]
See execute command
Use this command to lock, unlock or interrogate a ME or a network facility
<fac>. The command can be aborted when network facilities are being set or interrogated.
Response
If <mode> ¹ 2 and command is successful
OK
If <mode> = 2 and command is successful
+CLCK: <status>[,<class1>[<CR><LF>
+CLCK: <status>, class2....]] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> Phone security locks:
“SC” SIM (lock SIM cards). SIM requests password upon ME powerup and when this lock command is issued.
<password>: SIM PIN1. The password can be modified with
AT+CPWD or AT^SPWD (see Chapters 4.38 and 7.42).
“PS” Phone locked to SIM card. ME requests password when other
than current SIM card is inserted.
<password>: User defined password. It is needed before the first
use of <fac>”PS and, therefore, must first be specified with
AT+CPWD or AT^SPWD.
“FD” SIM fixed dialing memory: If the mobile is locked to "FD", only
the phone numbers stored to the "FD" memory can be dialed
(depending on the SIM card, usually up to 7 numbers).
<password>: SIM PIN2 (or equivalent authorisation via
AT+CPIN2, see Chapter 4.36.)
If a lock on the SIM fixed dialing memory is active, call related
Supplementary Services such as call barring, call waiting or call
forwarding cannot be accessed via AT command. The response
will be “ +CME ERROR: call barred”. In this case, access to call
related Supplementary Services is possible only if the corresponding public MMI *# code is stored in the fixed dialing number phone book, or by deactivation of the SIM fixed dialing facility
lock)
Note:
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
"PS" lock is frequently referred to as "phone lock", or "device
lock". Accordingly, the password may be called "phone code" or
"device code". The "PS" password is not associated with the
PUK of the SIM card. If incorrectly entered three times, the Master Phone Code is required to lift the lock. This is an 8-digit device code associated to the IMEI number of the mobile which can
only by obtained from the manufacturer of the TC35i module.
Once the Master Phone Code has been acctepted, the mobile is
operational, and the "PS" lock is no longer active. See Chapter
4.35.1 and examples below for further details.
Page 101 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Factory set SIM locks
<password>: Factory set password. See note below.
“PF” lock Phone to the very First SIM card
“PN” Network Personalisation
“PU” Network subset Personalisation
“PP” Service Provider Personalisation
“PC” Corporate Personalisation
Note:
Typical examples of factory set SIM locks are prepaid phones or
network locks, used to restrict the operation of a mobile to a specific provider or operator. The end user should be aware that
each of these lock types can only be unlocked if the associated
password is available. For example, a mobile can be locked to
accept only SIM cards from the respective provider, or even one
single SIM card. Once a different SIM card is inserted the ME will
prompt the client to enter a specific code. This is not the PUK of
the SIM card, but usually an 8-digit code which needs to be requested from the provider.
The locks can only be set by the manufacturer of the TC35i
modules and need to be agreed upon between the parties concerned, e.g. provider, operator, distributor etc. on the one side
and the manufacturer on the other side. For details contact your
local dealer or Siemens AG.
See Chapter 4.35 and 4.35.1 for further instructions.
Supplementary Service: Call barring:
<password>: Network dependent password. See note below.
“AO” BAOC (Bar All Outgoing Calls)
“OI” BOIC (Bar Outgoing International Calls)
“OX” BOIC-exHC (Bar Outgoing International Calls except to Home
Country)
“AI” BAIC (Bar All Incoming Calls)
“IR” BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home
country)
“AB” All Barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
“AG” All outGoing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
“AC” All inComing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
Note:
The availability of the Supplementary Services varies with the
network. To benefit from call barring services the client will need
to subscribe them, though a limited number of call barring types
may be included in the basic tariff package. Call barring is protected by a password supplied from the provider or operator.
Usually there is one password which applies to all call barring
options. For details contact your provider. With AT+CPWD or
AT^SPWD the default password can be changed individually. After 3 failed attempts to enter the correct password, the client is
required to contact the provider.
When you attempt to set a <fac> or <class> which is not provisioned, not yet subscribed to, or not supported by the module,
the setting will not take effect regardless of the response returned. The responses in these cases vary with the network (for
example “OK”, “Operation not allowed”, “Operation not supported” etc.). To make sure check the call barring status with
<mode>=2.
<mode> 0 unlock
1 lock
2 query status
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 102 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<passwd> password. For each <fac> a different type of password is required.
See Chapters 4.38 and 7.42 for instructions of how to specify passwords.
<class>
integer or sum of integers each representing a <class> of information:
1
voice
2
data
4
fax
8
short message service
16
data circuit sync
32
data circuit async
64
dedicated packet access
128
dedicated PAD access
x
combination of some of the above classes.
For example, the default setting 7 represents the sum of the
integers 1, 2 and 4 (call barring for voice, data and fax). The
value 255 covers all classes. If the <class> parameter is
omitted, the default value 7 is used.
See examples in 4.21.3 for correct handling of class numbers.
<class> 2 (data) comprises all those <class> values between 16 and
128, that are supported both by the network and the MS. This means,
a setting made for <class> 2 applies to all remaining data classes (if
supported). In addition, you can assign a different setting to a specific
class. For example, you can activate call barring for all data classes,
but deactivate it for a specific data class.
<status> 0 off
1 on
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
GSM 02.04
GSM 02.88
GSM 03.88
GSM 04.88
· If an outgoing international voice call is rejected due to active call barring
supplementary service, the call will be terminated with result code NO
DIALTONE.
Under the same conditions, an outgoing fax or data call will be terminated
with result code NO CARRIER.
· The command has been implemented with the full set of <class> parameters
according to GSM 07.07. For actual applicability of a specific <fac> to a
specific service or service group (a specific <class> value) please consult
table A.1 of GSM 02.04.
· AT^SLCK is a Siemens defined command equivalent to AT+CLCK. See
Chapter 7.15.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 103 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.21.1 Examples: Enabling / disabling PIN 1 authentication
Example 1
Example 2
To lock or unlock the SIM card: The "SC" parameter enables or disables the
SIM PIN authentication (PIN 1) when you power up the GSM engine:
AT+CLCK="SC",1,”9999”
Activates SIM card lock.
OK
As a result, SIM PIN 1 must be entered to enable ME to register to the GSM network.
AT+CLCK="SC",0,”9999”
Unlocks SIM card.
OK
When powered up, ME registers to the GSM
network without requesting SIM PIN1.
Note: Depending on the services offered by the
provider, this feature is not supported by all
SIM card types. If so, the command returns
ERROR when you attempt to unlock the card.
To query the status of the SIM card lock:
AT+CLCK="SC",2
+clck: 1
SIM card is locked. SIM PIN1 must be entered
to enable ME to register to the GSM network.
4.21.2 Examples: Phone lock
Example 1
Be sure that PIN 1 authentication is valid:
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: SIM PIN
OK
AT+CPIN=”9999”
OK
To lock the mobile to the currently inserted SIM card, first specify a password (=
a phone code):
AT+CPWD="PS",,”1234”
If "PS" lock has not been set before: enter new
OK
password.
or:
AT+CPWD="PS",”1234”,”3333”
OK
To replace existing "PS" pass
word: Enter old and new one.
Then, activate the phone lock:
AT+CLCK="PS",1,”3333”
Locks the mobile to the current SIM card.
OK
Example 2
To deactivate the phone lock:
AT+CLCK="PS",0,”3333”
Enter lock type "PS", followed by 0 to lift the
OK
lock. Then type "PS" lock password.
As a result, the mobile accepts any SIM card and can be operated after the
card's SIM PIN 1 was entered.
Example 3
To operate the mobile with the SIM card for which "PS" lock was activated:
AT+CPIN?
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Enter SIM PIN used when locking the mobile.
Page 104 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
"PS"lock password is not needed.
+CPIN: SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=”9999”
OK
Example 4
To operate the mobile with other SIM card than the one used for the "PS" lock:
Enter SIM PIN of present card, followed by "PS" lock password.
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=”1111”
Enter SIM PIN of present SIM card.
OK
SIM PIN accepted.
AT+CPIN?
Example 5
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=”3333”
"PS" lock password is required.
OK
"PS" lock password has been accepted.
Attempt to unblock the "PS" lock using an invalid password:
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: SIM PIN
AT+CPIN=”1111”
Enter SIM PIN of present SIM card.
OK
SIM PIN accepted.
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN
"PS" lock password is required.
AT+CPIN=”4444”
Bad password is given:
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
After the "PS" lock password was incorrectly entered three times in a row:
AT+CPIN?
+CPIN: PH-SIM PUK
Master Phone Code is required (8-digit code
available from the manufacturer. See Chapter
4.35.1).
AT+CPIN=”12345678”
Master Phone Code has been accepted. As a
result, the mobile is operational, and the "PS"
lock is totally removed. If needed, it must be set
once again.
Example 6
Attempt to unblock the "PS" lock using an invalid Master Phone Code: Due to
the timing algorithm explained in Chapter 4.35.1 the intervals between each attempt are getting longer. See also AT^SPIC in Chapter 7.38.
Example 7
As an alternative to the AT+CPIN command you can use AT+CPWD. In this
case the following syntax shall be observed: AT+CPWD=PS,Master Phone
Code[,new password].
AT+CPWD=”PS”,”12345678”
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 105 of 278
Deactivates the "PS" lock.
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Or
AT+CPWD=”PS”,”12345678”,”3333”
Deactivates the present "PS" lock
and sets a new "PS" lock.
4.21.3 Examples: Call barring
Please note that when you configure or query call barring without specifying any classes, the settings
will refer to classes 1, 2 and 4 only (default setting).
Usually, the service is subject to a password supplied from the provider.
Example 1
Example 2
When checking the status of barring for outgoing international calls without
specifying classes, please note that the ME returns only the status of voice,
data, fax calls. The status of SMS and other classes is not reported.
at+clck=”oi”,2,”0000”
or without <passwd>: at+clck=”oi”,2
+CLCK: 1,1
outgoing international voice calls barred
+CLCK: 1,2
outgoing international data calls barred
+CLCK: 1,4
outgoing international fax calls barred
OK
To check the call barring status for outgoing international calls and all classes,
you are required to enter the integer sum referring to all classes:
at+clck=”oi”,2,”0000”,255 or w/o <passwd>: at+clck=”oi”,2,,255
+CLCK: 1,1
outgoing international voice calls barred
+CLCK: 1,2
outgoing international data calls barred
+CLCK: 1,4
outgoing international fax calls barred
+CLCK: 1,8
outgoing international SMS barred
+CLCK: 0,16
no barring (e.g. not supported or not activated at all)
+CLCK: 1,32
outgoing international data calls barred
+CLCK: 0,64
no barring (e.g. not supported or not activated at all)
+CLCK: 0,128
no barring (e.g. not supported or not activated at all)
OK
Example 3
Example 4
To activate call barring for outgoing international voice and data calls:
at+clck=”oi”,1,”0000”,3
(where 3 is the sum of class 1 + class 2)
OK
To disable call barring for outgoing international fax (class 4) and SMS (class 8)
calls:
at+clck=”oi”,0,”0000”,12
OK
Example 5
(where 12 is the sum of class 4 + class 8)
To disable call barring for all outgoing international calls:
at+clck=”oi”,0,”0000”,255
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 106 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.22 AT+CLIP Calling line identification presentation
This command refers to the GSM supplementary service CLIP (Calling Line Identification Presentation) that enables a called subscriber to get the calling line identity (CLI) of the calling party when receiving a mobile terminated call.
Test command
Response
AT+CLIP=?
+ CLIP: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CLIP?
+CLIP: <n>, <m> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Write command
AT+CLIP=<n>
See write command
The write command enables or disables the presentation of the CLI at the TE. It
has no effect on the execution of the supplementary service CLIP in the network.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n>
0 suppress unsolicited result codes
1 display unsolicited result codes
<m>
0 CLIP not provisioned
1 CLIP provisioned
2 unknown
Unsolicited result
code
If CLIP is enabled at the TE (and is permitted by the calling subscriber), an unsolicited result code is presented after every RING (or +CRING: <type>) when there
is a mobile terminated call.
Voice call response format:
+CLIP: <number>, <type>,,,,<CLI validity>
Data/FAX call response format:
+CLIP: <number>, <type>
Parameter
string type phone number of calling address in format specified by
<type>
<type>
type of address octet in integer format; 145 when dialing string includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129.
<CLI validity>
<number>
Reference
0
CLI valid
1
CLI has been withheld by the originator.
2
CLI is not available due to interworking problems or limitations
of originating network. <number> shall be an empty string ("")
and <type> value will not be significant.
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 107 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.23 AT+CLIR Calling line identification restriction
This command refers to the GSM supplementary service CLIR (Calling Line Identification Restriction).
Test command
Response
AT+CLIR=?
+CLIR: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Defined values
<n>
0
Presentation indicator is used according to the
subscription of the CLIR service
1
CLIR invocation (incognito)
2
CLIR suppression (not incognito)
Read command
Response
AT+CLIR?
+CLIR: <n>,<m>
Defined values
<n>
See test command
<m>
Parameter shows the subscriber CLIR service status in
the network:
0
CLIR not provisioned
1
CLIR provisioned in permanent mode
2
Unknown (e.g. no network, etc.)
3
CLIR temporary mode presentation restricted
4
CLIR temporary mode presentation allowed
Write command
Response
AT+CLIR=[<n>]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter:
Reference
See test command
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 108 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.24 AT+CLVL Loudspeaker volume level
Test command
Response
AT+CLVL=?
+CLVL: (list of supported <level>s)OK
Read command
Response
AT+CLVL?
+CLVL: <level>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Write command
Response
AT+CLVL=<level>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<level> Loudspeaker Volume Level (0-4)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· The write command can only be used in audio mode 2 – 6.
· The values of the volume steps are specified with the parameters
<outCalibrate[0]>,...<outCalibrate[4]> of the AT^SNFO command (see
Chapter 7.29).
· As an alternative to AT+CLVL, you can use AT^SNFO and AT^SNFV
(Chapter 7.32). The parameter <level> is identical with <outStep>
used by both commands.
· Any change to <level> (or <outStep>) takes effect in audio modes 2 to
6. That is, when you change <level> (or <outStep>) and then select
another mode with AT^SNFS, the same step will be applied.
The only exception is audio mode 1 which is fixed to <level>=4 (or accordingly <outStep>=4).
· <level> (or <outStep> is stored non-volatile when the ME is powered
down with AT^SMSO or reset with AT+CFUN=1,1.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 109 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.25 AT+CMEE Report mobile equipment error
Test command
Response
AT+CMEE=?
+CMEE: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CMEE?
+CMEE: <n> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CMEE=<n>
This command controls the presentation of the result codes +CME ERROR:
<err> and CMS:<err> that indicate errors relating to ME functionality.
When you power down or reset the ME with AT+CFUN=1,1 the setting will be reset to its default. The levels 1 or 2 need to be selected every time you reboot the
ME, or may be included, for permanent use, in the user profile saved with AT&W.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
0 disable result code (only 'ERROR' will be displayed)
1 enable result code and use numeric values
2 enable result code and use verbose values
Example
To obtain enhanced error messages it is recommended to choose <n>=2.
AT+CMEE=2
OK
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· The possible error result codes are listed in Chapters 8.1.1and 8.1.2.
· In multiplex mode (see “AT+CMUX Enter multiplex mode”, pg. 114) the setting applies only to the logical channel where selected. The setting on the
other channels may differ.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 110 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.26 AT+CMER Mobile equipment event reporting
Test command
Response
AT+CMER=?
+CMER: (list of supported <mode>s),(list of supported <keyp>s),(list of supported
<disp>s),(list of supported <ind>s),(list of supported <bfr>s)
Parameters
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CMER?
+CMER: <mode>,<keyp>,<disp>,<ind>,<bfr>
Parameters
See write command
Write command
AT+CMER=
[<mode>
[,<keyp>
[,<disp> [,<ind>
[,<bfr>]]]]]
The Write command enables and disables the presentation of Unsolicited Result
Codes for event reporting. TC35i supports only the type +CIEV (indicator event
reporting). If enabled the +CIEV URCs are sent whenever the value of an indicator
changes.
Response
OK
Parameters
If a parameter is not specified the current value remains unchanged.
0
Discard CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes
1
Discard CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes when TA-TE link is
reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode); otherwise forward them
directly to the TE
2
Buffer CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes in the TA when TA-TE
link is reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode) and flush them to
the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the
TE.
3
Forward CIEV Unsolicited Result Codes directly to the TE; TATE link specific inband technique used to embed result codes
and data when TA is in on-line data mode: While the ME is in
online data mode, no URC will be displayed. Each +CIEV URC
is replaced with a Break (100 ms), and is stored in a buffer.
Once the ME goes into command mode (after +++ was
entered), all URCs stored in the buffer will be output.
<keyp>
0
No keypad event reporting
<disp>
0
No display event reporting
<ind>
0
No indicator event reporting
2
Indicator event reporting using result code
+CIEV: <indDescr>,<value>
<indDescr> is the indicator’s name and <value> is the current
value of this indicator. All indicator events shall be directed
from TA to TE.
0
TA buffer of Unsolicited Result Codes is cleared when <mode>
1...3 is entered
<mode>
<bfr>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 111 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Unsolicited Result Code:
+CIEV: <indDescr>,<indValue>
Parameters
<indDescr>
Name of indicator.
<indValue>
New value of this indicator.
For a list of supported indicators and <indDescr> and their values <indValue>
please refer to the AT+CIND command.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· Only the indicators which are registered (see AT+CIND command), will be reported if CMER is enabled.
· After CMER has been switched on, +CIEV URCs for all registered indicators
with their default value will be presented to the TE.
· Parameters <mode> and <ind> are stored in the user profile (see AT&W, ATZ).
· See AT+CIND in Chapter 4.19.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 112 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.27 AT+CMUT Mute control
Test command
Response
AT+CMUT=?
+CMUT: (list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CMUT?
+CMUT: <n>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Write command
Response
AT+CMUT=<n>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<n>:
0 mute off
1 mute on
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
This command can be used in all audio modes (1 to 6) and during a voice
call only. See AT^SNFS in Chapter 7.31 for more details on the various
audio modes.
Users should be aware that when they switch back and forth between different audio modes the value of <mute> does not change. This means
that the status of mute operaton is retained until explicitly changed.
As alternative, you can use the AT^SNFM command described in Chapter 7.28.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 113 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.28 AT+CMUX Enter multiplex mode
Multiplex mode according to the ETSI TS 101 669 and GSM 07.10 enables one physical serial
asynchronous interface to be partitioned into three virtual channels. This allows you to take advantage of up to 3 simultaneous sessions running on the serial interface. For example, you can send or
receive data or make a call on the first channel, while the other two channels are free to control the
module with AT commands.
The TC35i module incorporates an internal multiplexer and thus integrates all the functions needed
to implement full-featured multiplex solutions. For the application on top, customers have the flexibility to create their own multiplex programs conforming to the multiplexer protocol. To help system integrators save the time and expense of designing multiplexer applications, SIEMENS AG offers
WinMUX2k, a ready-to-use multiplex driver for Windows 2000 and Windows XP. Another approach
is to develop customized solutions based on the sources of the WinMux2k driver.
Refer to [4] which provides a detailed description of the multiplex architecture and step-by-step instructions of how to install and configure the multiplex mode. The WinMUX2k driver and its source
files can be supplied on request. Please contact your local distributor to obtain the latest installation
software and user's guide.
Test command
Response
AT+CMUX=?
+CMUX: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Read command
Response
AT+CMUX?
+CMUX: <mode> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Write command
Response
AT+CMUX=<mode>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<mode>
multiplexer transparency mechanism
0
basic option
Subparameters defined in GSM07.07 are adjusted for control and logical
channels as follows:
<subset>
0
UIH frames used only (control channel)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
GSM07.10
· The write command is used to enter the multiplex mode. The setup of the
logical channels is initiated by the TE, i.e. the TE acts as initiator. This
means that the TE shall ensure that logical channels are established before any further actions on the channels can be started.
· There is a timeout of five seconds, if the multiplexer protocol is enabled
and no multiplexer control channel is established. The GSM engine returns to the AT command mode.
· The parameter maximum frame size (N1) of AT+CMUX in GSM07.10 is
fixed to 97 and cannot be changed. All other parameters are not available.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 114 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
· Multiplex mode requires character framing to be set to 8 bits, no parity
and 1 stop bit. The setting can be made using AT+ICF (see Chapter
2.44).
4.28.1 Restricted use of AT commands in Multiplex mode
In multiplex mode, CSD and fax calls can only be set up on logical channel 1. Due to this restriction,
AT commands have a different behavior on channels 2+3 compared to channel 1. Several commands
are not available, others return different responses. This chapter summarizes the concerned commands. For general rules and restrictions to be considered in Multiplex mode please refer to [4].
Table 13: Availability of AT commands on virtual channels
Command
+++
AT+CBST
AT+CRLP
ATL
ATM
AT+F.... (Fax commands)
AT&S
ATDI<n>
ATO
Behavior on channel 1
2)
Usable
as described
as described
as described
as described
as described
as described
as described
as described
as described
Differences on channel 2+3
no CSD calls
not usable
not usable
not usable
not usable
not usable
not usable
not usable
not usable
not usable
1
as described
not usable
1
as described
not usable
ATS8 )
as described
not usable
1
as described
not usable
1
as described
not usable
as described
not usable
1
ATS5 )
ATS6 )
ATS7 )
1
ATS10 )
ATS18 )
AT\V
1)
2)
Siemens GSM engines support the registers S0 - S29. You can change S0, S3, S4, S5, S6, S7,S8,
S10 and S18 using the related ATSn commands (see starting from pg. 32).
The applicability of the +++ escape sequence depends on the customer’s external application
based on the Mulitplexer Protocol. The WinMux2k driver uses the +++ escape sequence as described in Chapter 2.2. Recommendations for implementing an appropriate modem status command (MSC) are provided in [4], Chapter “Escape Sequence”.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 115 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Table 14: Summary of AT commands with different behavior in Multiplex mode
Command
Description
Chapter
AT\Q<n>
It is recommended to use hardware flow control (AT\Q3). XON/XOFF
flow control (AT\Q1) is not supported in Multiplex mode.
2.3
See note regarding AT\Qn settings stored with AT&W if Multiplex
mode is active.
AT&V
Different configurations on channels 1, 2 and 3
2.37
AT&W
Different user profiles can be stored on each channel.
2.38
AT+IPR
Before you start Multiplex mode, it is recommended to set the ME to 2.47
57600 bps(minimum should be 4800 bps). For GPRS we suggest to
use 115200 bps or 230400 bps.
In Multiplex mode, the write command AT+IPR=<rate> will not change
the bit rate currently used, but the new bit rate will be stored and becomes active, when the module is restarted.
AT+IPR=0
Multiplex mode cannot be activated while autobauding is enabled.
AT+CALA
On each channel an individual <text> message can be stored. but 4.2
only one time setting applies to all channels. This means an alarm
<time> set on one of the channels overwrites the time setting on all
remaining channels.Therefore, the total number of alarm events returned by the read command AT+CALA? will always be <n>=0, no
matter whether individual text messages are stored.
When the alarm is timed out and executed the ME sends the URC
only on the channel where the most recent alarm setting was made.
The alarm time will be reset to “00/01/01,00:00:00” on all channels.
AT+CMEE
Presentation mode can be separately configured for each channel.
4.25
AT+CNMA
If Multiplex mode is activated the +CNMI parameter will be set to zero
on all channels, if one channel fails to acknowledge an incoming
message within the required time.
5.9
AT+CNMI
Phase 2+ parameters can only be used on one channel. The parameters for <mt> and <ds> on the other channels have to be set to zero. If
either a SM or a Status Report is not acknowledged, all +CNMI parameters will be set to zero on all channels.
5.10
AT+CFUN
If the ME is in Multiplexer mode, it is not recommended to activate 4.11
SLEEP mode with AT+CFUN=<n>. The best approach to properly
control SLEEP mode in this case is to issue the PSC messages described in [4], chapter “Power saving control (PSC)”.
AT+CPMS
Parameter <mem3> will be the same on all instances, but the settings 5.11
of <mem1> and <mem2> may vary on each instance.
AT^SSDA
If one instance is set to <da>=1 and <mt>=1, then all other instances 7.45
must be configured for <mt>=0.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 116 of 278
2.47.1
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.29 AT+COPN Read operator names
Test command
Response
AT+COPN=?
OK
Execute command
TA returns the list of operator names from the ME. Each operator code <numericn> that has an alphanumeric equivalent <alphan> in the ME memory is
returned.
AT+COPN
Response
+COPN: numeric <numeric1>,long alphanumeric <alpha1><CR><LF>
+COPN:.....OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<numericn>
<alphan>
string type; operator in numeric form; GSM location area identification number
string type; operator in long alphanumeric format; can contain
up to 16 characters
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
See also AT^SPLM, pg. 236
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 117 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.30 AT+COPS Operator selection
This command can be used to query the present status of the ME's network registration and to determine whether automatic or manual network selection shall be used.
Automatic mode:
Lets the ME automatically search for the home operator. If successful the ME
registers to the home network and enters the IDLE mode. If the home network
is not found, ME goes on searching. If then a permitted operator is found, ME
registers to this operator. If no operator is found the ME remains unregistered.
Manual mode:
Desired operator can be manually entered, using the AT+COPS write command. If the operator is found, ME immediately registers to this network. If the
selected operator is forbidden, the ME remains unregistered.
Manual/automatic: In this mode, the ME first tries to find the operator that was manually entered.
If the ME fails to register to this operator, then it starts to select automatically
another network.
Test command
AT+COPS=?
TA returns a list of quadruplets, each representing an operator present in the
network. The list of operators is presented in the following order: Home network, networks referenced in SIM, and other networks.
Response
+COPS: [list of supported: (<stat>, long alphanumeric <oper>,,numeric
<oper>)][,,list of supported <mode>s, list of supported <format>s] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<stat>
Read command
AT+COPS?
0
unknown
1
operator available
2
current operator (registered)
<oper>
3
forbidden operator
operator as per <format>
<mode>
[0] - 4 see write command
<format>
0 and 2 see write command
TA returns the current mode and, if registered, the currently used operator. If
the ME is unregistered, <format> and <oper> are omitted.
Response
+COPS: <mode>[, <format>[, <oper>]] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
See write command
Write command
AT+COPS=
<mode>
[,<format>[,<oper>]]
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
The write command allows you to choose whether the GSM network operator
is to be selected automatically or manually. When using the manual mode, the
<operator> must be entered, no matter whether you want to search for the
home operator or another one.
Page 118 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<mode>
Mode (numeric). Parameter values 0 and 1 are stored nonvolatile in the ME.
[0]
automatic mode; <oper> field is ignored.
1
manual operator selection
<oper> field must be present, <format> can only be = 2
2
manually deregister from network and remain unregistered
until mode 0,1,4 is selected
3
set <format> for read command +COPS?
4
combination of manual/automatic mode;
if manual selection fails, ME switches to automatic mode
(<mode>=0). (<oper> field must be present)
<oper>
Operator as per <format>. The numeric format is the GSM Location Area Identification number which consists of a 3-digit country
code plus a 2- or 3-digit network code.
<format>
Format (numeric)
Parameter can be stored non-volatile in the user profile using
AT&W.
0
long format alphanumeric <oper>; up to 16 characters.
Factory default can be restored with AT&F.
2
numeric <oper>; GSM Location Area Identification number
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
AT+COPS settings are effective over all Mux channels.
Example 1
To query the present status of ME's network registration using the test command:
AT+COPS=?
+COPS:
(2,"D2",,"26202"),(3,"E-Plus",,"26203"),(3,"TD1",,"26201"),(3,"Interkom",,"26207"),,(0-4),(0,2)
OK
Registered operator is D2. The other operators are present in the network, but
not allowed to be used with the current SIM card.
To query the status of the ME's network registration using the read command:
AT+COPS?
+COPS: 0,0,"D2" (command returns mode, format, registered operator)
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 119 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example 2
Attempt to manually select a forbidden operator:
AT+COPS=1,2,26203
OK
If the selected operator was not allowed, the ME is now unregistered. The
read command will return only the mode, but no operator:
AT+COPS?
+COPS: 1
In this case, the test command returns only that the desired operator is available (<stat=1). Nevertheless, the registration is not successful. Please use the
AT+CREG command (Chapter 4.41) to verify the registration status.
AT+COPS=?
+COPS:
(1,"D2",,"26202"),(3,"E-Plus",,"26203"),(3,"TD1",,"26201"),(3,"Interkom",,"26207"),,(0-4),(0,2)
OK
AT+CREG?
+CREG: 0,3
(where 3 = registration denied)
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 120 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.31 AT+CPAS Mobile equipment activity status
Test command
Response
AT+CPAS=?
+CPAS: (list of supported <pas>s) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
Response
AT+CPAS
TA returns the activity status of ME.
+CPAS: <pas> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<pas>
0 ready
3 incoming call (ringing)
4 call in progress or call hold
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 121 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.32 AT+CPBR Read current phone book entries
Test command
AT+CPBR=?
The test command returns the location range supported by the current storage,
the maximum length of the <number> field and the maximum length of the <text>
field. Note: If SIM storage is selected, the length may not be available. If storage
does not offer format information, the format list should be empty parentheses.
Response
+CPBR: (1-<maxloc>), <nlength>, <tlength> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command.
Write command
Response
AT+CPBR=
<location1>
[,<location2>]
The write command selects the memory location <location1>, or the range of locations <location1>…<location2> to be displayed.
If no <location2> is given, only the entry at <location1> will be displayed.
If no entries are found in the indicated range of locations, only ”OK” is returned.
+CPBR: <location1>, <number>, <type>, <text>[<CR><LF>+CPBR: .....+CPBR:
<location2>, <number>, <type>, <text>] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR
Parameter
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
<location1>
(numeric)
The first (lowest) location number within phonebook memory for
which the corresponding entry is to be displayed. The supported
range is given in the test command response.
If <location1>exceeds the upper bound <maxloc>(as indicated by
the test command), the AT command will return a CME ERROR
21 ”INVALID INDEX”.
<location2>
(numeric)
The last (highest) location number within phonebook memory for
which the corresponding entry is to be displayed. The supported
range is given in the test command response.
If both <location1> and <location2> are in the range indicated by
the test command in parameter <maxloc>, the list of entries will be
output and terminated with OK.
If <location2> exceeds the range indicated by the test command in
parameter <maxloc>, the list of entries will be output but terminated with a +CME ERROR 21 ”INVALID INDEX”.
<number>
(string)
String type phone number in format specified by <type>. The
number parameter may be an empty string.
<type>
(numeric)
Type of address octet
145 Dialing string <number>includes international access code
character ’+’
209 Dialing string <number> contains printable non-alphabetic
non-digit characters saved with the number string.
Page 122 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
For phonebook entries with this <type>, dialing from phonebook with ATD> is not possible. For further detail, check the
parameter descriptions referring to AT+CPBW.
129 Otherwise
<text>
(string)
Text assigned to the phone number. The maximum length for this
parameter is given in test command response parameter
<tlength>.
The text string is returned in the character set and format as specified with AT+CSCS .
When using an ASCII terminal, characters which are coded
di_erently in ASCII and GSM have to be entered via escape sequences as described in Chapter 1.5.
<maxloc>
(numeric)
Maximum location number of currently selected storage. For phone
books located on SIM, this value may vary with the SIM card.
<nlength>
(numeric)
Max. length of phone number for “normal” locations. Depending on
storage, a limited number of locations with extended memory is
available per phone book. These locations allow storing numbers
with twice the standard length, which is 2* <nlength> digits for normal numbers, but only <nlength> digits for number saved with parameter <type>=209.
<tlength>
(numeric)
Max. length of text assigned to phone number
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
This command can be used only after the phone book data from the SIM have
been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful SIM authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30 seconds depending on
the SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt to use any of the
phone book commands will result in “+CME Error: 14” (SIM busy).
Example
1. First, run the Test command to find out the maximum range of entries stored
in the active phone book:
AT+CPBR=?
TA returns the supported values in the format: +CPBR: (1-100),20,17 where
100 is the supported range of location numbers, 20 is the length of the phone
number and 17 is the maximum length of the associated text.
2. Now, run the Write command to display the phone book entries sorted by location numbers.
AT+CPBR =1,100
+CPBR 1,"+999999",145,"Charles"
+CPBR: 2,"+777777",145,"Bill"
+CPBR: 3,"+888888",145,"Arthur" .........
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 123 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.33 AT+CPBS Select phone book memory storage
This command is used to select the active phonebook storage, i.e. the phonebook storage that all
subsequent phone book commands will be operating on.
Phonebooks ”MC” (missed calls), ”RC” (Received Calls) and ”ME” are stored permanently within the
ME. Furthermore, depending on the facilities offered by the SIM, phonebook ”LD” (Last Dialed) may
reside partly or completely in ME memory.
In the”MC”, ”RC” and ”LD” phone books, automatic deletion of the entries stored in ME will be performed if the SIM card is changed. If the same SIM is removed and reinserted, no automatic deletion
is performed. Calls made after last switch-on will be lost from ”LD”, ”MC” and ”RC” phone book, if the
SIM is removed and reinserted during normal operation.
Test command
Response
AT+CPBS=?
+CPBS: (list of supported <storage>s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CPBS?
The read command returns the currently selected <storage>, the number of
<used> entries and the <total> number of entries available.
Response
+CPBS: <storage>,<used>,<total> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CPBS=
<storage>
The Write command selects current phone book memory storage, which can
then be used by other phone book commands.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<storage>
(string)
“SM” SIM phone book. Capacity depends on SIM card. By default, the SM phone book is selected each time the ME is
restarted.
“ME” ME phone book. Storage positions 1-250.
“FD” SIM fixdialing phone book. All records are located on the
SIM card. Capacity depends on SIM card.
If the mobile is locked to FD, only the numbers stored to the
FD memory can be dialed and call related Supplementary
Services can only be configured if the required *# code is in-
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 124 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
cluded in the FD phone book.
To edit the FD phone book PIN 2 is required. See Chapters
AT+CPIN2 Enter PIN2 and AT+CLCK Facility lock,
AT^SLCK Facility lock.
“LD” Last dialing phone book. Stores all voice call numbers dialed
with ATD, but no data call numbers. Storage positions 1-10
located on SIM card only or both on SIM card and ME.
The share of each storage is determined by the SIM card: If
the locations available on the SIM card are full, the memory
of the ME can be filled until a total of 10 locations is
reached.
AT+CPBW is not be applicable to this storage. The LD list
can be deleted with AT^SPBD (see Chapter 7.35) and
AT^SDLD (see Chapter 7.12).
“MC” List of missed (unanswered received) calls. Storage positions 1-10 based in ME.
AT+CPBW not applicable to this storage. The MC list can be
deleted with AT^SPBD.
“RC” List of received calls. Storage positions 1-10 based in ME.
AT+CPBW not applicable to this storage. The RC list can be
deleted with AT^SPBD.
“ON” Own numbers (MSISDNs). Capacity and handling is dependent on SIM card.
Can be edited with AT+CPBW.
<used>
(numeric)
Value indicating the number of used locations in selected memory
<total>
(numeric)
Value indicating the maximum number of locations allowed in the
selected memory
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
This command can be used only after the phone book data from the SIM have
been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful SIM
authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30 seconds depending
on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt to use any
of the phone book commands will result in “+CME Error: 14” (SIM busy).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 125 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.34 AT+CPBW Write phone book entry
Test command
AT+CPBW=?
The test command returns the location range supported by the current storage,
the maximum length of <number> field, the range of supported <type> values
and the maximum length of <text> field.
Note: The length may not be available while SIM storage is selected. If storage
does not offer format information, the format list should be empty parenthesises.
Response
+CPBW: <1-maxloc>), <nlength>, (list of supported <type>s), <tlength> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command.
Write command
AT+CPBW=
[<location>]
[,<number>
[[,<type>]
[,<text>]]]
This command writes a phone book entry to the memory location <location> of
the active storage selected with AT+CPBS.
If selected <storage>=”FD” (SIM fixed dialling numbers), PIN2 authentication
has to be performed prior to write access.
If no <location> is given, the first free entry will be used.
If <location> is given as the only parameter, the phonebook entry specified by
<location>is deleted.
If writing fails, an indication ”+CME ERROR” is returned.
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
<location>
(numeric)
Location number within phonebook memory. The supported
range is given in the test command response
<number>
(string)
String type phone number in format specified by <type>.
The number parameter must be present, although it may be an
empty string. Alphabetic characters are not permitted in the
number string.
<number> may contain printable non-alphabetic characters from
the standard GSM alphabet, including ”*”,”#” or ”+”, as dialstring
modifiers. However if <number> contains modifiers other than
”*”,”#” or ”+”, the following constraints must be considered:
If no <type> was specified explicitly, all accepted modifiers
from the GSM alphabet will be saved in the number string.
The <type> parameter will be set to 209 (ASCII). Limitations
as listed below for <type> 209 apply.
A <number> saved with parameter <type>= 209 requires
double memory. In order to fit into a standard location, the
number needs to be reduced to a maximum length of
<nlength>/2, inluding all digits and dial string modifier(s). Extended locations may be used as stated below for parameter <nlength>
Page 126 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<type>
(numeric)
Type of address octet
If parameter <type> is specified as 129 or 145, then any nondigit characters other than ”*”, ”#”, or ”+” will be removed from the
number string. If the number string contains such characters,
they can be saved with the number string by using <type> 209,
see below.
145 Dialing string <number>includes international access code
character ’+’
209 Dialing string <number> contains printable non-alphabetic
non-digit characters that should be saved with the number
string. Remarks as under parameter <number> apply. For
phonebook entries with this type, dialing from phonebook
with ATD> is not possible.
129 Otherwise
<text>
(string)
Text assigned to the phone number. The maximum length for
this parameter is given in test command response <tlength>. The
text string must be entered in the character set as specified with
AT+CSCS .
When using an ASCII terminal, characters which are coded
diferently in ASCII and GSM have to be entered via escape sequences as described in chapter section Chapter 1.5.
<maxloc>
(numeric)
Max. location for the currently selected storage. For phonebooks
located on SIM, this value may vary with the SIM card used. See
AT+CPBS for typical values.
<nlength>
(numeric)
Max. length of phone number for ”normal” locations. - Depending
on the storage, a limited number of locations with extended
memory is available per phonebook. These locations allow storing numbers with twice the standard length, which is 2*<nlength>
digits for normal numbers, but only <nlength>digits for numbers
saved with parameter <type>= 209. If all extended locations of
the selected phonebook are used up, then any attempt to write a
number which requires extended memory will be denied with
CME ERROR 260: INVALID DIAL STRING.
<tlength>
(numeric)
Max. length of <text>assigned to the telephone number
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
The AT+CPBW command can be used only after the phone book data from the
SIM have been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful SIM authentication has been performed, and may take several seconds
depending on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt
to use any of the phone book commands will result in “+CME Error: 14” (SIM
busy).
Examples
To write a phone book entry to the first free location number:
AT+CPBW=,+431234567,145,”Charles”
To delete a phone book entry simply enter the location number:
AT+CPBW=1
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 127 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example 2
The following examples are provided to illustrate the effect of writing phonebook
entries with different types of dialstring modifiers included in the <number>
string:
AT+CPBW=5,"12345678",,"Arthur"
OK
AT+CPBW=6,"432!+-765()&54*654#",,"John"
OK
AT+CPBW=7,"432!+-765()&54*654#",129,"Eve"
OK
AT+CPBW=8,"432!+-765()&54*654#",145,"Tom"
OK
AT+CPBW=9,"432!+-765()&54*654#",209,"Richard"
OK
Reading the above entries with AT+CPBR=5,9 returns the following response:
+CPBR:5,"12345678",129,"Arthur"
+CPBR:6,"432!+-765()&54*654#",209,"John"
+CPBR:7,"432+76554*654#",129,"Eve"
+CPBR:8,"+432+76554*654#",145,"Tom"
+CPBR:9,"432!+-765()&54*654#",209,"Richard"
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 128 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.35 AT+CPIN Enter PIN
Test command
Response
AT+CPIN=?
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CPIN?
TA returns an alphanumeric string indicating whether or not a password is required.
+CPIN: <code> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<code>
SIM PIN authentication
READY
PIN has already been entered. No further entry
needed.
SIM PIN
ME is waiting for SIM PIN1.
SIM PUK
ME is waiting for SIM PUK1 if PIN1 was disabled after three failed attempts to enter PIN1.
SIM PIN2
ME is waiting for PIN2, when the attempt to access PIN2 requiring features was acknowledged
with +CME ERROR:17 (e.g. if client attempts to
edit the FD phone book). This is only applicable
if the AT+CPIN read command also prompts for
SIM PIN2. Normally, the AT+CPIN2 command is
intended for SIM PIN2.
SIM PUK2
ME is waiting for PUK2 to unblock a disabled
PIN2. Necessary if preceding command was
acknowledged with error +CME ERROR:18 and
only if the AT+CPIN read command also
prompts for SIM PUK2. Normally, the AT+CPIN2
command is intended for SIM PUK2.
Phone security locks:
PH-SIM PIN
ME is waiting for phone-to-SIM card password if
"PS" lock is active and user inserts other SIM
card than the one used for the lock. ("PS" lock is
also referred to as phone or antitheft lock).
PH-SIM PUK
ME is waiting for Master Phone Code, if the
above "PS" lock password was incorrectly entered three times.
Factory set SIM locks
PH-FSIM PIN
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
ME is waiting for phone-to-very-first-SIM card.
Necessary when "PF" lock was set. When powered up the first time, ME locks itself to the first
SIM card put into the card holder. As a result,
operation of the mobile is restricted to this one
SIM card (unless the PH-FSIM PUK is used as
described below).
Page 129 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
PH-FSIM PUK
ME is waiting for phone-to-very-first-SIM card
unblocking password to be given. Necessary
when "PF" lock is active and other than first SIM
card is inserted.
PH-NET PIN
ME is waiting for network personalisation password
PH-NET PUK
ME is waiting for network personalisation unblocking password
PH-NS PIN
ME is waiting for network subset personalisation
password
PH-NS PUK
ME is waiting for network subset unblocking
password
PH-SP PIN
ME is waiting for service provider personalisation password
PH-SP PUK
ME is waiting for service provider personalisation unblocking password
PH-C PIN
ME is waiting for corporate personalisation
password
PH-C PUK
ME is waiting for corprorate personalisation unblocking password
See Chapters 4.21 and 7.15 for information on lock types.
Write command
Response
AT+CPIN=<pin>
[,<new pin>]
The write command lets the ME store the entered password. This may be for
example the SIM PIN1 to register to the GSM network, or the SIM PUK1 to replace a disabled PIN with a new one, or the PH-SIM PIN if the client has taken
precautions for preventing damage in the event of loss or theft etc. See above
for the list of passwords.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
If no PIN request is pending (for example if PIN authentication has been done
and the same PIN is entered again) ME responds +CME ERROR: operation not
allowed. No action is required from your part.
Parameter
<pin>
password (string type), for example SIM PIN or, if requested, one
of the unblocking keys, such as SIM-PUK or PH-SIM PUK.
<new pin>
If the ME is waiting for an unblocking key, use <pin> to enter the
unblocking key, followed by <newpin> to specify the password.
See Chapter 4.35.1 for more information about when you may
need to enter an unblocking key.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· Caution: After entering a password with AT+CPIN all other commands that
need access to data on the SIM card may be blocked for up to 20 seconds.
The response in these cases will be “+CME Error: 14” (SIM busy).
· Successful PIN authentication only confirms that the entered PIN was recognized and correct. The output of the result code OK does not necessarily
imply that the mobile is registered to the desired network.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 130 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
·
·
·
·
·
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Typical example: PIN was entered and accepted with OK, but the ME fails
to register to the network. This may be due to missing network coverage,
denied network access with currently used SIM card, no valid roaming
agreement between home network and currently available operators etc.
TC35i offers various options to verify the present status of network registration: For example, the AT+COPS? (Chapter 4.30) command indicates the
currently used network. With AT+CREG (Chapter 4.41) you can also check
the current status and activate an unsolicited result code which appears
whenever the status of the network registration changes (e.g. when the ME
is powered up, or when the network cell changes).
Wait 10 seconds after PIN input before using SMS related commands.
<pin> and <new pin> can also be entered in quotation marks (e.g. ”1234”).
To check the number of remaining attempts to enter the passwords use the
AT^SPIC command. See Chapter 7.38.
See also Chapter 8.2 “Summary of PIN requiring AT Commands“.
See Chapters 4.38 and 7.42 for information on passwords.
Page 131 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.35.1 What to do if PIN or password authentication fails?
PIN1 / PUK1:
After three failures to enter PIN1, the SIM card is blocked (except for emergency
calls). +CME ERROR: 12 will prompt the client to unblock the SIM card by entering the
associated PUK (= PIN Unblocking Key / Personal Unblocking Key). After ten failed attempts to enter the PUK, the SIM card will be invalidated and no longer operable. In
such a case, the card needs to be replaced. PIN1 consists of 4 to 8 digits, PUK1 is an
8-digit code only.
To unblock a disabled PIN1 you have two options:
§ You can enter AT+CPIN=PUK1,new PIN1.
§ You can use the ATD command followed by the GSM code
**05*PUK*newPIN*newPIN#;.
PIN2 / PUK2:
PIN2 allows access to the features listed in Chapter 4.36. The handling of PIN2 varies
with the provider. PIN2 may either be a specific code supplied along with an associated PUK2, or a default code such as 0000. In either case, the client is advised to replace it with an individual code. Incorrect input of PUK2 will permanently block the additional features subject to PIN2 authentification, but usually has no effect on PIN1.
PIN2 consists of 4 digits, PUK2 is an 8-digit code only.
To unblock a disabled PIN2 you have three options:
§ You can enter AT+CPIN2=PUK2,new PIN2.
§ You can enter AT+CPWD=”P2”,PUK2,new PIN2.
§ You can use the ATD command followed by the GSM code
**052*PUK*newPIN*newPIN#;.
Phone lock:
If the mobile was locked to a specific SIM card (= "PS" lock or phone lock), the PUK
that came with the SIM card cannot be used to remove the lock. After three failed attempts to enter the correct password, ME returns +CPIN: PH-SIM PUK (= response to
read command AT+CPIN?), i.e. it is now waiting for the Master Phone Code. This is
an 8-digit device code associated to the IMEI number of the mobile which can only by
obtained from the manufacturer of the TC35i module. When needed, contact Siemens
AG and request the Master Phone Code of the specific module.
There are three ways to enter the Master Phone Code:
§ You can enter AT+CPIN=Master Phone Code,new password.
§ You can enter AT+CPWD=”PS”,Master Phone Code,new password.
§ You can use the ATD command followed by the GSM
**052*PUK*newPIN*newPIN#;.
code
Usually, the Master Phone Code will be supplied by mail or e-mail. The received number may be enclosed in the *# codes typically used for the ATD option. If you use the
AT+CPIN or AT+CPWD command, it is important to crop the preceding *#0003* characters and the appended #.
Example: You may be given the string *#0003*12345678#. When prompted
for the PH-SIM PUK simply enter 12345678.
If incorrectly input, the Master Phone Code is governed by a specific timing algorithm:
(n-1)*256 seconds (see table below). The timing should be considered by system integrators when designing an individual MMI.
Table 15: Timing algorithm of incorrect password input
Number of failed attempts
st
1 failed attempt
nd
2 failed attempt
rd
3 failed attempt
th
4 failed attempt
th
5 failed attempt
th
6 failed attempt and so forth
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Time to wait before next input is allowed
No time to wait
4 seconds
3 * 256 seconds
4 * 256 seconds
5 * 256 seconds
6 * 256 seconds and so forth
Page 132 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
SIM locks:
These are factory set locks, such as "PF", "PN", "PU", "PP", "PC". An 8-digit unlocking
code is required to operate the mobile with a different SIM card, or to lift the lock. The
code can only be obtained from the provider.
Failure to enter the password is subject to the same timing algorithm as the Master
Phone Code (see Table 15).
Call barring:
Supported modes are "AO", "OI", "OX", "AI", "IR", "AB", "AG", "AC". If the call barring
password is entered incorrectly three times, the client will need to contact the service
provider to obtain a new one.
Summary of related chapters:
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
For further instructions and examples see Chapters 4.21 (AT+CLCK
Facility lock), Chapter 4.21.1 (examples), 7.15 (AT^SLCK Facility
lock, 4.38 (AT+CPWD Change password) and 7.42 (AT^SPWD
Change password for a lock, 4.35 (AT+CPIN Enter PIN), 4.36
(AT+CPIN2 Enter PIN2)
A complete list of *# codes is provided in Chapter 8.4.
Related +CME errors are listed in Chapter 8.1.1.
To check the number of remaining attempts to enter the correct password use the AT^SPIC command. See Chapter 7.38.
Page 133 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.36 AT+CPIN2 Enter PIN2
Test command
Response
AT+CPIN2=?
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CPIN2?
TA returns an alphanumeric string indicating whether some password is required
or not.
+CPIN2: <code> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<code>
READY
ME is not pending for any password
SIM PIN2
ME is waiting for SIM PIN2.
This <code> is returned only when PIN2 authentication has not yet been done or has failed (+CME
ERROR:17).
SIM PUK2
ME is waiting for SIM PUK2.
This <code> is returned only when PIN2 authentication has failed and ME is pending for SIM PUK2
(i.e. +CME ERROR:18).
Write command
Response
AT+CPIN2=
<pin>[,<new
pin>]
The write command lets the ME store the entered password. This may be for example the SIM PIN2 to benefit from the features listed below, or the SIM PUK2 to
replace a disabled PIN2 with a new one. Note that PIN2 can only be entered if
PIN1 authentication was done.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Reference
<pin>
Password (string type), usually SIM PIN2 or, if requested, SIM PUK2
<new pin>
If the ME is waiting for SIM PUK2, use <pin> to enter the SIM PUK2,
followed by <newpin> to specify the new PIN2.
See Chapter 4.35.1 for more information about when you may need
to enter the PUK2.
Note
Functions dependant on SIM PIN2 validation:
· AT+CACM: Accumulated call meter (reset ACM value)
· AT+CAMM: Accumulated call meter maximum (set ACMmax value)
· AT+CLCK: Facility lock to "FD" (activate Fixed dialing phone book)
· AT^SLCK: Facility lock to "FD" (activate Fixed dialing phone book)
· AT+CPWD: Change "P2"password (specify new PIN2, unblock disabled PIN2)
· AT^SPWD: Change "P2"password (specify new PIN2, unblock disabled PIN2)
· AT+CPUC: Price per unit and currency table (change currency or units)
· AT+CPIN2: Enter SIM PIN2 or SIM PUK2 if requested.
· Edit Fixed dialing phone book: PIN2 validation must be performed before write
access to the “FD” phone book is allowed.
Once the required <pin> has been entered correctly, PIN2 authentication code
changes to READY. After 300s, a repetition of the authentication process is required (PIN2 authentication code changes from READY to SIM PIN2).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 134 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example 1
Example 2
To change PIN2:
AT+CPWD=”P2”,”0000”,”8888”
To unblock a disabled PIN2.
AT+CPIN2?
+CPIN2: SIM PUK2
OK
AT+CPWD=”P2”,”11223344”,”8888”
Example 3
(where “0000” = old PIN2 and “8888”
= new PIN2)
(where “11223344” = PUK2 and
“8888” = new PIN2).
To write to "FD" phone book:.
AT+CPBS="FD"
OK
AT+CPBW=2,"+493012345678",145,"Charly"
+CME ERROR: SIM PIN2 required
or, in numeric format: +CME Error 17
Access is denied due to missing
PIN2 authentication. The error code
appears, for example, when PIN2
has not been entered at all, or after
PIN2 validation has expired.
AT+CPIN2=8888
OK
AT+CPBW=2,"+493012345678",145,"Charly"
OK
4.37 AT+CPUC Price per unit and currency table
Test command
Response
AT+CPUC=?
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CPUC?
Read command returns the current parameters of PUC.
+CPUC: <currency>, <ppu> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CPUC=<curr
ency>,<ppu>[,
<passwd>]
Write command sets the parameters of Advice of Charge related price per unit
and currency table. SIM PIN2 is usually required to set the parameters.
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 135 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<currency>
string type; three-character currency code (e.g. “GBP”, “EUR”);
character set as specified with AT+CSCS. If the currency name is
longer than three characters, all characters will be cut off after the
third position. Before they are written to the SIM Card, these characters are converted to the standard GSM alphabet.
<ppu>
string type; price per unit; dot is used as a decimal separator (e.g.
“2.66”). The length is limited to 20 characters. If the string length is
exceeded, the command is terminated with an error. This string
may only contain digits and a dot. Leading zeros are removed
from the string. The minimum and maximum value are determined
by the structure of the SIM-PUCT file. The maximum price per unit
value is 999 999 999.00. When successfully entered, this value is
rounded to maximum accuracy.
Due to storage in mantisse (range 0-4095) and exponent (-7
to 7) it is possible that rounding errors occur.
Note:
<passwd>
Reference
string type; SIM PIN2. String parameter which can contain any
combination of characters. The maximum string length is limited to
8 characters. If this value is exceeded, the command terminates
with an error message. If the PIN2 is incorrect, a CME error
(+CME ERROR: incorrect password) is output.
Note
GSM 07.07
Examples
To change currency and/or price per unit you have two ways:
You can enter PIN2 along with the AT+CPUC command.
AT+CPUC="EUR","0.10",”8888”
(where “8888” = PIN2)
ok
Alternatively, you can first use the AT+CPIN2 command to enter PIN2. When you
execute the AT+CPUC command, subsequently, take into account that PIN2 authentication expires after 300ms (see notes in Chapter 4.36 ).
AT+CPUC="EUR","0.10"
Ok
Successful.
AT+CPUC="EUR","0.10"
+CME ERROR: SIM PIN2 required or, in numeric format: +CME Error 17
Attempt not successful. PIN2 authentication has expired.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 136 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.38 AT+CPWD Change password
Use this command when you want to
· change PIN1 or PIN2,
· change the password supplied from your provider for call barring,
· set individual phone security passwords,
· enter the unblocking key (e.g. PUK. PUK2, Master Phone Code) to restore a disabled password.
See Chapters 4.21 and 7.15 for more information on the various lock features. The AT^SPWD
command is a Siemens defined command equivalent to AT+CPWD. See Chapter 7.42.
Test command
Response
AT+CPWD=?
TA returns a list of pairs which represent the available facilities and the maximum length of the associated password.
+CPWD: (list of supported (<fac>, <pwdlength>s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac>
see execute command
<pwdlength> integer max. length of password
Execute command
Response
AT+CPWD =
TA sets a new password for the facility lock function.
<fac>, [<oldpwd>], OK
<newpwd>
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> Phone security locks:
"SC" SIM (lock SIM card). SIM asks SIM PIN1 when ME is switched
on and when this lock command is issued.
"P2" SIM PIN2. Used to access the functions listed in Chapter 4.36.
"PS" Phone locked to SIM (device code). Password is user defined
and must be set before the “PS” lock can be activated with
AT+CLCK or AT^SLCK.
Note:
SIM PIN1 and SIM PIN2 are each assigned a PUK to unblock a
disabled PIN.
The "PS" password, however, is never associated with a PUK. If
it is incorrectly entered three times, the Master Phone Code is
required. See Chapter 4.35.1
Factory set SIM locks:
"PF" Lock Phone to the very first SIM card
"PN" Network Personalisation
"PU" Network-subset Personalisation
"PP" Service-Provider Personalisation
"PC" Corporate Personalisation
Note:
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Typical examples of factory set locks are prepaid phones or network locks (e.g. if the operation of a mobile is restricted to a specific provider or operator). The locks can only be set by the
manufacturer of the TC35i modules and need to be agreed upon
Page 137 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
between the parties concerned, e.g. provider, operator, distributor etc. on the one side and the manufacturer on the other side.
For details contact your local dealer or Siemens AG.
The client should be aware that each of these lock types can
only be unlocked if the associated password is available. See
Chapter 4.35 and 4.35.1 for further instructions.
Supplementary Service: Call barring
"AO" BAOC (Bar All Outgoing Calls)
"OI" BOIC ( Bar Outgoing International Calls)
"OX" BOIC-exHC ( Bar Outgoing International Calls except to Home
Country)
"AI" BAIC (Bar All Incoming Calls)
"IR" BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home
country)
"AB" All Barring services
"AG" All outGoing barring services
"AC" All inComing barring services
Note:
The availability of the Supplementary Services varies with the
network. To benefit from call barring services the client will need
to subscribe them, though a limited number of call barring types
may be included in the basic tariff package. Call barring is protected by a password supplied from the provider or operator.
Usually there is one password which applies to all call barring
options. For details contact your provider. With AT+CPWD or
AT^SPWD the default password can be changed individually.
<oldpwd>
Password specified for the facility.
Can be ignored if no old password was allocated to the facility.
Take into account that a password may have already been set
by factory, or that the service is subject to a password issued by
the provider. See notes above or contact provider.
<newpwd>
New password. Mandatory, if <oldpwd> was an unblocking key
(such as PUK1, PUK2, Master Phone Code).
Note:
The length of the old and new password depends on the associated
<fac>. The maximum length can be queried using the Test command
AT+CPWD=?.
If <fac> = “SC”: SIM PIN comprising 4 – 8 digits. After 3 failed attempts
the 8-digit SIM PUK is required.
If <fac> = “P2”: SIM PIN2 comprising 4 - 8 digits. After 3 failed attempts
the 8-digit SIM PUK2 is required.
If <fac> = “PS”: User defined 4-digit password. After 3 failed attempts
the 8-digit Master Phone Code is required.
If <fac> = “AO” …”AC” (call barring): 4-digit network password.
To delete a password use the following syntax:
at+cpwd=<fac>,<oldpwd>
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
Example 1
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
To change PIN2:
AT+CPWD=”P2”,”0000”,”8888”
Page 138 of 278
(where “0000” = old PIN2 and
“8888” = new PIN2)
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example 2
To set password used to enable or disable barring of all outgoing calls:
AT+CPWD=”ao”,”0000”,”3333”
Example 3
To change the "PS" lock password, using the correct old password:
AT+CPWD=”PS”,”1111”,”2222”
(where 1111 = old "PS" password
and 2222 = new password)
To specify a new "PS" lock password, after the old password was disabled, e.g.
after three failed attempts to enter the password (only if Master Phone Code is
available):
AT+CPWD=”PS”,”12345678”,”1111” (where 12345678 is the Master
Phone Code and 1111 is the new
password. You may also use
<newpwd> to restore the former
disabled password). This operation
deactivates the present phone lock
and sets a new one. See also
Chapter 4.35.1.
Alternatively, without giving a new password:
AT+CPWD=”PS”,”12345678”
Deactivates
lock.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 139 of 278
the
present
phone
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.39 AT+CR Service reporting control
Test command
Response
AT+CR=?
+CR: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CR?
+CR: <mode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CR=<mode>
Configures the TA whether or not to transmit an intermediate result code +CR:
<serv> to TE when a call is being set up.
OK
Parameter
<mode> 0 disable
1 enable
The selected mode can be stored to the user profile (AT&W) and reset to its
factory default (AT&F).
Intermediate result code
If enabled, an intermediate result code is transmitted at the point during connect
negotiation when the TA has determined the speed and quality of service to be
used, before any error control or data compression reports are transmitted, and
before any final result code (e.g. CONNECT) appears.
+CR:<serv>
Parameter
<serv>
REL ASYNC
asynchronous non-transparent
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· PIN is required for the Write command only.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 140 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.40 AT+CRC Set Cellular Result Codes for incoming call indication
Test command
Response
AT+CRC=?
+CRC: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CRC?
+CRC: <mode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CRC=
[<mode>]
Specifies whether or not to use the extended format of incoming call indication.
OK
Parameters
<mode> 0 disable extended format
1 enable extended format
The selected mode can be stored to the user profile (AT&W) and reset to its
factory default (AT&F).
Unsolicited result code
If enabled, the unsolicited result code +CRING: <type> replaces the normal
RING code to indicate the incoming call and the type of the call.
Parameter
<type>
Reference
REL ASYNC
asynchronous non-transparent
FAX
facsimile
VOICE
voice
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 141 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.41 AT+CREG Network registration
Test command
Response
AT+CREG=?
+CREG: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT+CREG?
The read command returns the URC presentation mode <n> and an integer
<stat> that shows the registration status of the ME. The location information
elements <lac> and <ci> are returned only when <n>=2 and ME is registered to
the network.
Response
+CREG: <n>,<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Write command
AT+CREG=
[<n>]
Use the write command to select the type of URC. There are two types of
URCs are available, both explained below:
if <n>=1: +CREG: <stat>
if <n>=2: +CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<n >
<stat>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
0
Disable URCs
1
Enable URC +CREG:<stat> to report status change of network registration
2
Enable URC +CREG:<stat>[,<lac>,<ci>] to report status
change of network registration including location information. Please note that optional parameters will not be displayed during a call.
0
Not registered, ME is currently not searching for new operator.
There is a technical problem. User intervention is required.
Yet, emergency calls can be made if any network is available. Probable causes:
· No SIM card inserted
· No PIN entered.
· No valid Home PLMN entry found on the SIM.
1
Registered to home network.
2
Not registered, but ME is currently searching for a new operator.
The ME searches for an available network. Failure to log in
until after more than a minute may be due to one of the following causes:
· No network available or insufficient Rx level.
· The ME has no access rights to the networks available.
· Networks from the SIM list of allowed networks are
around, but login fails due one of the following reasons:
- #11 ... PLMN not allowed
Page 142 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
#12 ... Location area not allowed
#13 ... Roaming not allowed in this location area
After this, the search will be resumed (if automatic
network search is enabled).
-
·
The Home PLMN or an allowed PLMN is available, but
login is rejected by the cell (reasons: Access Class or
LAC).
If at least one network is available emergency calls can be
made.
3
Registration denied.
· If automatic network search is enabled:
Authentication or registration fails after Location Update Reject due to one of the following causes:
- #2 ... IMSI unknown at HLR
- #3 ... Illegal MS
- #6 ... Illegal ME
Either the SIM or the MS or the ME are unable to log
into any network. User intervention is required. Emergency calls can be made, if any network is available.
·
Only if manual network search is enabled:
Manual registration fails after Location Update Reject
due to the following causes:
- #2 ... IMSI unknown at HLR
- #3 ... Illegal MS
- #6 ... Illegal ME
- #11 ... PLMN not allowed
- #12 ... Location area not allowed
- #13 ... Roaming not allowed in this location area.
No further attempt is made to search or log into a network. Emergency calls can be made if any network is
available.
4
Unknown
(not used)
5
Registered, roaming
The ME is registered to a foreign network (national or international network)
<lac>
String type; two byte location area code in hexadecimal format
(e.g. "00C3" equals 193 in decimal)
<ci>
String type; two byte cell ID in hexadecimal format
Unsolicited result code
If <n>=1 and there is a change in the ME network registration status:
+CREG: <stat>
If <n>=2 and there is a change in the ME network registration status or a
change of the network cell:
+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
Optional parameters will not be displayed during a call.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 143 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
AT+CREG=2
OK
Activates extended URC mode.
AT+COPS=0
OK
Forces ME to automatically search network
operator.
+CREG: 2
+CREG: 1,"0145","291A"
URC reports that ME is currently searching.
URC reports that operator has been found.
Page 144 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.42 AT+CRLP Select radio link protocol param. for orig. non-transparent
data call
Test command
Response
AT+CRLP=?
TA returns values supported by the TA as a compound value.
+CRLP: (list of supported <iws>s), (list of supported <mws>s), (list of supported
<T1>s), (list of supported <N2>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CRLP?
TA returns current settings for the supported RLP version 0.
+CRLP: <iws>,<mws>,<T1>,<N2>[,<verx>]
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CRLP= [<iws> TA sets radio link protocol (RLP) parameters used when non-transparent data
[,<mws> [,<T1>
calls are originated.
[,<N2 >]]]]
OK
Parameter
<iws>
0-61
Interworking window size (IWF to MS)
<mws>
0-61
Mobile window size (MS to IWF)
<T1>
48-78-255
Acknowledgement timer (T1 in 10 ms units)
<N2>
1-6-255
Re-transmission attempts N2
<verx>
0
RLP version number in integer format; when version
indication is not present it shall equal 0.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· RLP version 0: single-link basic version;
· RLP version 1: single-link extended version (e.g. extended by data compression);
· RLP version 2: multi-link version.
· Compression and multi-link are not supported.
· The AT+CRLP command is not available multiplexer channels 2 and 3.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 145 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.43 AT+CRSM Restricted SIM access
Test command
Response
AT+CRSM=?
OK
Write command
By using this command the TE has access to the SIM database. SIM access is
restricted to the commands which are listed below.
As response to the command the ME sends the current SIM information parameters and response data. ME error result code +CME ERROR may be returned if the command cannot be passed to the SIM, e.g. if the SIM is not inserted. However, errors related to SIM data are reported in <sw1> and <sw2>
parameters as defined in GSM 11.11.
This command requires PIN authentication. However, using <command> READ
BINARY and <command> READ RECORD is possible before PIN authentication and if the SIM is blocked (after three failed PIN authentication attempts) to
access
the
contents
of
the
following
Elementary
Files:
EFICCID (2FE2h, ICC Identification), EFELP (2F05h, Extended language preference), EFLP (6F05h, Language preference), EFSPN (6F46h, Service provider
name), EFAD (6FADh, Administrative data), EFPhase (6FAEh, Phase Identification) and EFECC (6FB7h, Emergency call codes).
AT+CRSM=<com
mand>[,<fileId>
[,<P1>,<P2>,<P3>
[,<data>]]]
Response
+CRSM: <sw1>, <sw2> [,<response>]
OK / ERROR / +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<command>
176
178
192
214
220
242
READ BINARY
READ RECORD
GET RESPONSE
UPDATE BINARY
UPDATE RECORD
STATUS
All other values are reserved; refer to GSM 11.11.
Reference
<fileId>
Integer type; this is the identifier for an elementary
data file on SIM. Mandatory for every command except STATUS
<P1>,<P2>,<P3>
Integer type, range 0 - 255
parameters to be passed on by the ME to the SIM; refer to GSM 11.11.
<data>
Information which shall be written to the SIM (hexadecimal character format)
<sw1>, <sw2>
Integer type, range 0 - 255
status information from the SIM about the execution
of the actual command. These parameters are delivered to the TE in both cases, on successful or failed
execution of the command; refer to GSM 11.11.
<response>
Response of a successful completion of the command
previously issued (hexadecimal character format)
Note
GSM 07.07
GSM 11.11
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 146 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.44 AT+CSCS Set TE character set
Test command
Response
AT+CSCS=?
+CSCS: (list of supported <chset>s)
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CSCS?
+CSCS: <chset>
OK
Write command
Response
AT+CSCS=[<chset>]
Write command informs TA which character set <chset> is used by the TE.
TA is then able to convert character strings correctly between TE and ME
character sets.
OK
Parameters
<chset>:
"GSM" GSM default alphabet (GSM 03.38 subclause 6.2.1);
Note: This setting may cause software flow control problems since
the codes used to stop and resume data flow (XOFF = decimal 19,
(XON = decimal 17) are interpreted as normal characters.
"UCS2" 16-bit universal multiple-octet coded character set (ISO/IEC10646
[32]); UCS2 character strings are converted to hexadecimal numbers from 0000 to FFFF; e.g. "004100620063" equals three 16-bit
characters with decimal values 65, 98 and 99, $(AT R97)$
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· Also see chapter 1.5 (“Supported character sets”).
· When TA-TE interface is set to 8-bit operation and used TE alphabet is
7-bit, the highest bit will be set to zero.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 147 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.45 AT+CSNS Single Numbering Scheme
The AT+CSNS command enables the ME to accept incoming calls when no bearer capability information is provided with the call, e.g. single numbering scheme calls or calls originitating from analog
devices.
The command must be set before the call comes. By default, when you do not modify the settings,
all calls received without bearer element are assumed to be voice.
Test command
Response
AT+CSNS=?
+CSNS: (list of supported <mode>s)
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CSNS?
+CSNS: <mode>
OK
Write command
Response
AT+CSNS=[<mode>]
Write command
OK
Parameters
<mode>:
0
Voice
Each call received without bearer element is assumed to be speech.
2
Fax
Each call received without bearer element is assumed to be an incoming fax.
4
Data
Each call received without bearer element is assumed to be a data call.
Please take into account that the bearer service
parameters set with AT+CBST apply to all data
calls including those received without bearer capability. To avoid conflicts see Chapter 4.5.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
The setting will be automatically saved when you power down the GSM engine with AT^SMSO, provided that PIN authentication has been done. This
value will be restored when PIN authentication is done again.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 148 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.46 AT+CSQ Signal quality
Test command
Response
AT+CSQ=?
+CSQ: (list of supported <rssi>s), (list of supported <ber>) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
Response
AT+CSQ
TA returns received signal strength indication <rssi> and channel bit error rate
<ber> from the ME.
+CSQ: <rssi>, <ber> OK
Parameter
<rssi>
<ber>
Receive level:
0
-113 dBm or less
1
-111 dBm
2...30
-109... -53 dBm
31
-51 dBm or greater
99
not known or not detectable
Bit error rate:
0...7
as RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08
section 8.2.4.
99
not known or not detectable.
To check the bit error rate there must be a call in progress to
obtain realistic values. If no call is set up, there is no BER to be
determined. In this case the indicated value may be 0 or 99,
depending on the SIM card.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
After using network related commands such as AT+CCWA, AT+CCFC,
AT+CLCK, users are advised to wait 3s before entering AT+CQS. This is recommended to be be sure that any network access required for the preceding
command has finished.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 149 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.47 AT+CSSN Supplementary service notifications
Test command
Response
AT+CSSN=?
+CSSN: (list of supported <n>s), (list of supported <m>s)OK
Parameter
<n>
<m>
0
Suppresses the +CSSI messages
1
Activates the +CSSI messages
0
Suppresses the +CSSU messages
1
Activates the +CSSU messages
Read command
Response
AT+CSSN?
+CSSN: <n>,<m>OK
Parameter
Write command
<n>
See Test command
<m>
See Test command
Response
AT+CSSN=<n>[,<m>] OK
Parameter
<n>
See read command
<m>
See read command
Unexpected message
+CSSI: <code1>
When <n>=1 and a supplementary service notification is
received after a mobile originated call setup, intermediate
result code +CSSI: <code1> is sent to TE before any
other MO call setup result codes
+CSSU: <code2>
When <m>=1 and a supplementary service notification is
received during a mobile terminated call setup or during
a call, unsolicited result code +CSSU: code2>is sent to
TE.
Parameter
<code1>
Intermediate result code
3
<code2>
Waiting call is pending
Unsolicited result code
0
The incoming call is a forwarded call.
5
Held call was terminated
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
The URCs will be displayed only if the call concerned is a voice call.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 150 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.48 AT+CUSD Unstructured supplementary service data
Test command
Response
AT+CUSD=?
+CUSD: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+ CUSD?
TA returns the current <n> value.
+CUSD: <n> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Write command
AT+ CUSD=
<n>[,<str>[,<dcs>]]
This command allows control of the +CUSD:<m>[,<str>,<dcs> according to
GSM 02.90. Both network and mobile initiated operations are supported. Parameter <n> is used to disable/enable the presentation of an unsolicited result
code (USSD response from the network, or network initiated operation)
+CUSD:<m>[,<str>,<dcs>] to the TE.
When <str> is given, a mobile initiated USSD string or a response USSD
string to a network initiated operation is sent to the network. The response
USSD string from the network is returned in a subsequent unsolicited +CUSD
result code.
The interaction of this command with other commands based on other GSM
supplementary services is described in the GSM standard.
Parameter
<n>
<str>
0
disable the result code presentation in the TA
1
enable the result code presentation in the TA
2
cancel session (not applicable to read command response)
string type USSD-string (when <str> parameter is not given, network is not interrogated).
If <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used
ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules of GSM 07.05 Annex A.
<dcs>
GSM 03.38 Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format (default 15)
<m>
0
no further user action required (network initiated USSDNotify, or no further information needed after mobile initiated operation)
1
further user action required (network initiated USSDRequest, or further information needed after mobile initiated operation)
2
USSD terminated by network
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
· For the write command <dcs>=15 is supported only.
· On an unsolicited result code with parameter <m>=1 a '> ' is given for further user action. The user action is finished with a <ctrl-Z> or aborted with
<ESC>.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 151 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.49 AT+VTD=<n> Tone duration
Test command
AT+VTD=?
This command refers to an integer <duration> that defines the
length of tones transmitted with the +VTS command.
Response
+VTD (list of supported <duration>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+VTD?
<duration> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+VTD=
<duration>
OK
Parameter
<duration> 1 – 255
Reference
duration of the tone in 1/10 second
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 152 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.50 AT+VTS DTMF and tone generation (<Tone> in {0-9, *, #, A, B, C, D})
Test command
Response
AT+VTS=?
+VTS: (list of supported <dtmf>s)[, (list of supported <duration>s)]
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
The Write command is intended for sending one or more ASCII
characters which cause the MSC (Mobile Switching Center) to
transmit DTMF tones to a remote subscriber.
1.
AT+VTS=<dtmf-string>
1. Allows the user to send a sequence of DTMF tones with a duration that was defined with the AT+VTD command.
2.
AT+VTS=<dtmf>[,<duration>]
2. Allows the user to send a single DTMF tone. In this case, the duration can be indvidually determined during the call.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<dtmfstring> String of ASCII characters in the set 0-9,#,*,A, B, C,
D. Maximal length of the string is 29. The string must
be enclosed in quotation marks (””).
<dtmf>
ASCII character in the set 0-9,#,*, A, B, C, D.
<duration>
1-255 duration of a tone in 1/10 second (if not specified the current setting of AT+VTD is used, which is 1
upon switch-on.)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
The Write command can only be used during an active voice call.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 153 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
4.51 AT+WS46 Select wireless network
Test command
Response
AT+WS46=?
(list of supported <n>s)
OK
Read command
Response
AT+WS46?
<n>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<n>
12
GSM digital cellular
Write command
Response
AT+WS46=[<n>]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 154 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5 AT commands originating from GSM 07.05 for SMS
The SMS related AT Commands are according to the GSM 07.05 specification issued by ETSI (European Telecommunications Standards Institute).
5.1
AT+CMGC Send an SMS command
Test command
Response
AT+CMGC=?
OK
Write command
Response
if text mode (AT+CMGF=1):
if text mode (+CMGF=1) and sending successful:
AT+CMGC=<fo>,<ct>[,<pid> +CMGC: <mr>[,<scts>]
[,<mn>[,<da>[,<toda>]]]]<CR> if sending fails:
text is entered <ctrl-Z/ESC>
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Write command
Response
if PDU mode (AT+CMGF=0):
AT+CMGC=<length><CR>
if PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sending successful:
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
+CMGC=?
+CMGC: <mr>[,<ackpdu>]
if sending fails:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<length> Length of PDU
<pdu>
See ”AT+CMGL”
<mr>
Message reference
<fo>
depending on the command or result code: first octet of
GSM 03.40 SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17),
SMS- STATUS-REPORT, or SMS -COMMAND (default 2)
in integer format
<ct>
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type in integer format (default 0)
<pid>
GSM 03.40 TP-Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default
0)
<toda> GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
<da>
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in
string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted into characters; type of address
given by <toda>
<scts>
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer to <dt> )
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
· After invoking the commands CMGW, CMGS, CMGC wait for the
prompt ">" before entering text or PDU. After the prompt a timer
will be started to observe the input.
· At baudrates below 19200 bps it is recommended to use the line
termination character only (refer to ATS3, default <CR>, Chapter
2.21) before entering the text/pdu. Use of the line termination
character followed by the response formating character (refer to
ATS4, default <LF>, Chapter 2.22) can cause problems.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 155 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.2
AT+CMGD Delete SMS message
Test command
Response
AT+CMGD=?
OK
Parameter
Execute command
Response
AT+CMGD=
<index>
TA deletes message from preferred message storage <mem1> location <index>.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR <err>
Parameter
<index> integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by
the associated memory
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
If there is no SMS stored at the selected index, the response is OK too.
5.3
AT+CMGF Select SMS message format
Test command
Response
AT+CMGF=?
+CMGF: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CMGF?
+CMGF: <mode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CMGF=
[<mode>]
The Write command specifies the input and output format of the short messages.
OK
Parameter
<mode>
Reference
0
PDU mode
1
text mode
Note
GSM 07.05
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 156 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.4
AT+CMGL List SMS messages from preferred store
Test command
Response
AT+CMGL=?
+CMGL: (list of supported <stat>s) OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
Parameter
AT+CMGL
1) If text mode:
<stat>
“REC UNREAD”
Received unread messages (default)
Write command
“REC READ”
Received read messages
AT+CMGL=
<stat>
“STO UNSENT”
Stored unsent messages
“STO SENT”
Stored sent messages
“ALL”
All messages
2) If PDU mode:
<stat>
0
Received unread messages (default)
1
Received read messages
2
Stored unsent messages
3
Stored sent messages
4
All messages
Response
The write command returns messages with status value <stat> from message
storage <mem1> to the TE. If status of the message is ‘received unread’,
status in the storage changes to ‘received read’.
The execute command is the same as the write command with the given default for <stat>.
Note: If the selected <mem1> can contain different types of SMs (e.g. SMSDELIVERs, SMS- SUBMITs, SMS- STATUS-REPORTs and SMSCOMMANDs), the response may be a mix of the responses of different SM
types. TE application can recognize the response format by examining the
third response parameter.
Response
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and command successful:
for SMS- SUBMITs and/or SMS-DELIVERs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<oa/da>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<da/oa>,[<alpha>],[<scts>][,<tooa/toda>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>[...]] OK
for SMS-STATUS-REPORTs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
[...]] OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 157 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
for SMS-COMMANDs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[<CR><LF>
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,<fo>,<ct>[...]] OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and command successful:
for SMS- SUBMITs and/or SMS-DELIVERs:
+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
[<CR><LF>+CMGL: <index>,<stat>,[alpha],<length><CR><LF><pdu>
[...]] OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<alpha> string type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa> corresponding to the entry found in phone book; implementation of this
feature is manufacturer- specific
<ct>
GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type in integer format (default 0)
<da>
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted into characters; type of address given by <toda>
<data>
In case of SMS: GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data in text mode responses; format:
- if <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules of Annex A
- if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, or <fo>
indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set:
ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA characters (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is
presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65))
Parameter
<dt>
GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in time-string format: “yy/MM/
dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters indicate year (two last digits),
month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone. For example,
6th of May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours equals
“94/05/06,22:10:00+08”
<fo>
depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40
SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17), SMS- STATUSREPORT, or SMS -COMMAND (default 2) in integer format
<length> integer type value indicating in the text mode (+CMGF=1) the length
of the message body <data> (or <cdata>) in characters; or in PDU
mode (+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets
(i.e. the RP layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the
length)
If the short message format is text mode (AT+CMGF =1) and the
character set is set to ”UCS2” (see AT+CSCS) and the short message is also coded in UCS2 then the length is given in octets inTC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 158 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
stead of characters. This needs to be taken into account when using
the commands AT+CMGL, AT+CMGR and AT^SMGL.
<index> integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by
the associated memory
<mr>
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<oa>
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address-Value field in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted into characters; type of address given by <tooa>
<pdu>
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40
TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data
unit into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA characters (e.g.
octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A
(IRA 50 and 65)). In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format.
<ra>
GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address Address-Value field in string
format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are
converted into characters; type of address given by <tora>
<scts>
GSM 03.40 TP- Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format
(refer <dt>)
<st>
GSM 03.40 TP-Status in integer format
<toda>
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default is 145,
otherwise default is 129)
<tooa>
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer<toda>)
<tora>
GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer
format (default refer<toda>)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
· The parameters <ra> and <tora> will only be displayed if the parameter
<ra> of the AT^SSCONF command is set to 1.
· In PDU status reports, the filler “FF” will not be displayed anymore if the
parameter <FF> of the AT^SSCONF command is set to 1.
· See Chapter 7.44 for details on AT^SSCONF.
· This command can be used only after the sms data from the SIM have
been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful
SIM authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30 seconds
depending on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt to use any of the sms read commands will result in "+CME Error: 14"
(SIM busy).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 159 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.5
AT+CMGR Read SMS message
Test command
Response
AT+CMGR=?
OK
Execute command
Parameter
AT+CMGR=
<index>
<index> integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
Response
TA returns a short message with location value <index> from message storage
<mem1> to the TE. If status of the message is ‘received unread’, status in the
storage changes to ‘received read’.
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and command successful:
for SMS-DELIVER:
+CMGR: <stat>,<oa>,[<alpha>],<scts> [,<tooa>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
for SMS-SUBMIT:
+CMGR: <stat>,<da>,[<alpha>] [,<toda>,<fo>,<pid>,<dcs>,[<vp>],
<sca>,<tosca>,<length>]<CR><LF><data>
for SMS-STATUS-REPORT:
+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>,<st>
for SMS- COMMAND:
+CMGR: <stat>,<fo>,<ct> [,<pid>,[<mn>],[<da>],[<toda>],<length>
<CR><LF><cdata>]
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and command successful:
+CMGR: <stat>,[<alpha>],<length><CR><LF><pdu> OK
3)If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<alpha> string type alphanumeric representation of <da> or <oa> corresponding
to the entry found in phone book; implementation of this feature is manufacturer specific
<stat>
integer type in PDU mode (default 0), or string type in text mode (default
“REC UNREAD”); indicates the status of message in memory: defined
values:
0
1
2
3
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
“REC UNREAD” received unread message (i.e. new message)
“REC READ” received read message
“STO UNSENT” stored unsent message (only applicable to SMs)
“STO SENT” stored sent message (only applicable to SMs)
Page 160 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<ct> GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Type in integer format (default 0)
<da> GSM 03.40 TP- Destination-Address Address-Value field in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted into characters; type of address given by <toda>
<data>
In case of SMS: GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data in text mode responses; format:
-if <dcs> indicates that GSM 03.38 default alphabet is used and <fo> indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is not set:
ME/TA converts GSM alphabet into current TE character set according to rules covered in Annex A
-if <dcs> indicates that 8-bit or UCS2 data coding scheme is used, or <fo>
indicates that GSM 03.40 TP-User-Data-Header-Indication is set:
ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA characters (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented
to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)
<dcs>
depending on the command or result code: GSM 03.38 SMS Data Coding Scheme (default 0), or Cell Broadcast Data Coding Scheme in integer format
<cdata> GSM 03.40 TP-Command-Data in text mode responses; ME/TA converts each 8-bit octet into two IRA character long hexadecimal numbers
(e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A
(IRA 50 and 65))
<dt>
<fo>
GSM 03.40
TP-Discharge-Time in time-string format: ”yy/MM/
dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters indicate year (two last digits),
month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and time zone. For example, 6th of
May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2 hours equals ”94/05/06,22:10:00+08”
depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40
SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17), SMS-STATUS-REPORT,
or SMS-COMMAND (default 2) in integer format
<length> integer type value indicating in text mode (+CMGF=1) the length of the
message body <data> (or <cdata>) in characters; or in PDU mode
(+CMGF=0), the length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP
layer SMSC address octets are not counted in the length).
If the short message format is text mode (AT+CMGF =1) and the character set is set to ”UCS2” (see AT+CSCS) and the short message is
also coded in UCS2 then the length is given in octets instead of characters. This needs to be taken into account when using the commands
AT+CMGL, AT+CMGR and AT^SMGL.
In text mode, the maximum length of an SMS depends on the used coding scheme: It is 160 characters if the 7 bit GSM coding scheme is used,
and 140 characters according to the 8 bit GSM coding scheme.
<index> integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the
associated memory
<mr>
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<oa>
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted
into characters; type of address given by <tooa>
<pdu> In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40
TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of TP data unit
into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA characters (e.g. octet with
integer value 42 is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 161 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
65)). In the case of CBS: <ra> GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address Address-Value field in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted into characters; type of address given by
<tora>
<pid>
GSM 03.40 TP-Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default 0)
<ra>
GSM 03.40 TP-Recipient-Address Address-Value field in string format;
BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to
characters of the currently selected TE character set (refer command
AT+CSCS Select TE character set.); type of address given by <tora>
<sca>
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address-Value field in string format; BCD
numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted to characters of the currently selected TE character set (refer command
AT+CSCS Select TE character set); type of address given by <tosca>
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer
<dt>)
GSM 03.40 TP-Status in integer format
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer
format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer
format (default refer<toda>)
GSM 04.11 TP-Recipient-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer<toda>)
<scts>
<st>
<toda>
<tooa>
<tora>
<tosca>
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<vp>
depending on SMS-SUBMIT <fo> setting: GSM 03.40 TP-Validity-Period
either in integer format (default 167) or in time-string format (refer <dt>)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
· Response if AT+CMGR is used to read an empty record index: +CMGR: 0,,0
· Response if AT+CMGR is used to read a non-existant record index:
+CMS ERROR: invalid memory index.
· The parameters <ra> and <tora> will only be displayed if the parameter <ra> of
the AT^SSCONF command is set to 1. See Chapter 7.44 for details on
AT^SSCONF.
· In PDU status reports, the filler “FF” will not be displayed anymore if the parameter <FF> of the AT^SSCONF command is set to 1.
· This command can be used only after the sms data from the SIM have been
read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful SIM authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30 seconds depending on the
SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt to use any of the
sms read commands will result in "+CME Error: 14" (SIM busy).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 162 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.6
AT+CMGS Send SMS message
Test command
Response
AT+CMGS=?
OK
Parameter
Write command
Response
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
+CMGS=<da>
[,<toda>]<CR>
text is entered
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
The write command serves to transmit short messages from TE to
network (SMS-SUBMIT). Message reference value <mr> is returned
to TE on successful message delivery. Value can be used to identify
message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code.
2) If PDU mode
(+CMGF=0):
+CMGS=<length><CR>
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
ESC aborts message
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and sending successful:
+CMGS: <mr>[,scts>] OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and sending successful:
+CMGS: <mr>[,ackpdu>] OK
If sending fails, the error code depends on the current setting of the
parameter <CmgwMode> specified with AT^SM20 (see Chapter
7.17):
· If AT^SM20=x,1 (factory default):
When sending fails due to timeout: +CMS ERROR: Unknown error.
Otherwise (for example, if a message is too long or contains an invalid character): OK
Users should be aware that, despite the OK response, the message will not be sent.
· If AT^SM20=x,0:
Failure to send a message is always followed by
+CMS ERROR: <err>
For example, if a message was too long <err> code 305 (“Invalid
text mode parameter”) is returned.
Parameter
<da>
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in
string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted into characters; type of address
given by <toda>
<toda>
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
<length> integer type value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the
length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer
SMSC address octets are not counted in the length).
<mr>
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
<scts>
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string
format (refer <dt>)
<dt>
GSM 03.40 TP-Discharge-Time in time-string format:
“yy/MM/ dd,hh:mm:ss±zz”, where characters indicate year
(two last digits), month, day, hour, minutes, seconds and
time zone. For example, 6th of May 1994, 22:10:00 GMT+2
hours equals “94/05/06,22:10:00+08”
<ackpdu> GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU; format
is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without GSM
04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be enclosed in
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 163 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
double quote characters like a normal string type parameter
<pdu>
For SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by GSM 03.40
TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts each octet of
TP data unit into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA
characters (e.g. octet with integer value 42 is presented to
TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)). In the case of
CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format.
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
· After invoking the commands CMGW, CMGS, CMGC wait for the
prompt ">" and then start to send text to the module. After the
prompt a timer will be started to observe the input.
· To send the message simply enter <CTRL-Z>. See Execute command for possible responses.
· Sending can be aborted by entering <ESC>. Of course, the message will not be sent, though the operation is acknowledged with
OK.
· When sending e-mails via SMS check that, depending on the provider, the @ symbol will be recognized and correctly interpreted. If
not, make sure what character to use instead. A widely used alternative is typing “*”.
· At baudrates lower than 19200 it is recommended to use the line
termination character only (refer to ATS3, default <CR>, Chapter
2.21) before entering the text/pdu. Use of the line termination
character followed by the response formating character (refer to
ATS4, default <LF>, Chapter 2.22) can cause problems.
· All characters entered behind the “>” prompt will be recognized as
GSM characters. For example, “Backspace” (ASCII character 8)
does not delete a character, but will be inserted into the SMS as
an additional physical character. As a result, the character you
wanted to delete still appears in the text, plus the GSM code
equivalent of the Backspace key. See also Chapter 8.5 which provides the supported alphabet tables.
· In text mode, the maximum length of an SMS depends on the
used coding scheme: It is 160 characters if the 7 bit GSM coding
scheme is used, and 140 characters according to the 8 bit GSM
coding scheme.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 164 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.7
AT+CMGW Write SMS message to memory
Test command
Response
AT+CMGW=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT+CMGW<CR>
text is entered
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
<ESC> aborts message.
The write / execute command serves to transmit SMS (either SMSDELIVER or SMS-SUBMIT) from TE to memory storage <mem2>.
Memory location <index> of the stored message is returned. Message
status will be set to ‘stored unsent’ unless otherwise given in parameter <stat>.
Write command
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
AT+CMGW=<oa/da>
[,tooa/toda>[,stat>]]<CR>
text is entered
<ctrl-Z/ESC>
<ESC> aborts message.
2) If PDU mode
(+CMGF=0):
AT+CMGW=<length>
[,stat]<CR>
PDU is given <ctrl-Z/ESC>
<ESC> aborts message.
SMS-COMMANDs and SMS-STATUS-REPORTs cannot be
stored in text mode.
Note:
If writing is successful:
+CMGW: <index> OK
If writing fails, the error code depends on the current setting of the parameter <m> specified with AT^SM20 (see Chapter 7.17):
· If AT^SM20=x,1 (factory default):
When writing fails due to timeout: +CMS ERROR: Unknown error.
Otherwise (for example, if a message is too long or contains an invalid character): OK
Users should be aware that, in these cases, the message will not
be written to the selected SMS storage.
· If AT^SM20=x,0:
Failure to write a message is always followed by
+CMS ERROR: <err>
For example, if a message was too long <err> code 305 (“Invalid
text mode parameter”) is returned.
Parameter
<oa>
GSM 03.40 TP-Originating-Address Address value field in
string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted into characters; type of address given
by <tooa>
<da>
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field in
string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted into characters; type of address given
by <toda>
<tooa>
GSM 04.11 TP-Originating-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (default refer <toda>)
<toda>
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet
in integer format (when first character of <da> is + (IRA 43)
default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
<length> integer type value indicating in PDU mode (+CMGF=0), the
length of the actual TP data unit in octets (i.e. the RP layer
SMSC address octets are not counted in the length).
<stat>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
integer type in PDU mode (default 2), or string type in text
mode (default “STO UNSENT“); indicates the status of
message in memory; defined values:
Page 165 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<pdu>
0 “REC UNREAD”
Received unread messages
1 “REC READ”
Received read messages
2 “STO UNSENT”
Stored unsent messages (default)
3 “STO SENT”
Stored sent messages
In the case of SMS: GSM 04.11 SC address followed by
GSM 03.40 TPDU in hexadecimal format: ME/TA converts
each octet of TP data unit into hexadecimal numbers containing two IRA characters (e.g. octet with integer value 42
is presented to TE as two characters 2A (IRA 50 and 65)).
In the case of CBS: GSM 03.41 TPDU in hexadecimal format.
<index> Index of message in selected storage <mem2>
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
· After invoking the commands CMGW, CMGS, CMGC wait for the
prompt ">" and then start to send text to the module. After the
prompt a timer will be started to observe the input.
· To store the message simply enter <CTRL-Z>. See Execute command for possible responses.
· Writing can be aborted by entering <ESC>. Of course, the message will not be stored, though the operation is acknowledged with
OK.
· When sending e-mails via SMS the @ character may be replaced
with “*” as defined in GSM 03.40 (3GPP TS 23.040).
· At baudrates lower than 19200 it is recommended to use the line
termination character only (refer to ATS3, default <CR>, Chapter
2.21) before entering the text/pdu. Use of the line termination
character followed by the response formating character (refer to
ATS4, default <LF>, Chapter 2.22) can cause problems.
· All characters entered behind the “>” prompt will be recognized as
GSM characters. For example, “Backspace” (ASCII character 8)
does not delete a character, but will be inserted into the SMS as
an additional physical character. As a result, the character you
wanted to delete still appears in the text, plus the GSM code
equivalent of the Backspace key. See Chapter 8.5 which provides
the supported alphabet tables. Also refer to Chapter 1.5 for general remarks on character sets.
· In text mode, the maximum length of an SMS depends on the
used coding scheme: It is 160 characters if the 7 bit GSM coding
scheme is used, and 140 characters according to the 8 bit GSM
coding scheme.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 166 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.8
AT+CMSS Send SMS message from storage
Test command
Response
AT+CMSS=?
OK
Parameter
Write command
Response
1) If text mode
(+CMGF=1)
AT+CMSS=
<index>[,<da>
[,<toda>]]
The write command sends message with location value <index> from message storage <mem2> to the network (SMS-SUBMIT or SMS-COMMAND).
If new recipient address <da> is given for SMS-SUBMIT, it shall be used instead of the one stored with the message. Reference value <mr> is returned
to the TE on successful message delivery. Values can be used to identify
message upon unsolicited delivery status report result code.
2) If PDU mode
(+CMGF=0):
AT+CMSS=
<index>[,<da>
[,<toda>]]
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1) and send successful:
+CMSS: <mr>[,scts>] OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0) and send successful:
+CMSS: <mr>[,ackpdu>] OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Reference
<ackpdu>
GSM 03.40 RP-User-Data element of RP-ACK PDU;
format is same as for <pdu> in case of SMS, but without
GSM 04.11 SC address field and parameter shall be
bounded by double quote characters like a normal string
type parameter.
<index>
integer type; value in the range of location numbers supported by the associated memory
<da>
GSM 03.40 TP-Destination-Address Address-Value field
in string format; BCD numbers (or GSM default alphabet
characters) are converted into characters; type of address given by <toda>
<scts>
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in timestring format.
<toda>
GSM 04.11 TP-Destination-Address Type-of-Address octet in integer format (when first character of <da> is +
(IRA 43) default is 145, otherwise default is 129)
<mr>
GSM 03.40 TP-Message-Reference in integer format
Note
GSM 07.05
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 167 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.9
AT+CNMA New SMS message acknowledge to ME/TE, only phase 2+
Test command
Response
AT+CNMA=?
1) If text mode (+CMGF=1):
OK
2) If PDU mode (+CMGF=0):
+CNMA: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameters
See execute command
Execute command
Response
AT+CNMA
The write / execute command confirms successful receipt of a new message
(SMS-DELIVER or SMS-STATUS-REPORT) which is routed directly to the
TE. TA shall not send another +CMT or +CDS result code to TE until previous one is acknowledged.
If ME does not receive acknowledgment within required time (network timeout), ME sends RP-ERROR to the network. TA shall automatically disable
routing to TE by setting both <mt> and <ds> values of +CNMI to zero.
Write command
Only for PDU mode:
AT+CNMA=<n>
Note:
The command shall o n l y be used when +CSMS parameter <service> equals 1 (= phase 2+).
1) If text mode:
OK
2) If PDU mode:
OK
3) If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<n>
0 command operates similarly as defined for the text mode
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
If multiplex mode is activated (+CMUX=0) the +CNMI parameter will be set to
zero on all channels, if one channel fails to acknowledge an incoming message within the required time.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 168 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.10 AT+CNMI New SMS message indications
Test command
Response
AT+CNMI=?
+CNMI: (list of supported <mode>s), (list of supported <mt>s), (list of supported
<bm>s), (list of supported <ds>s), (list of supported <bfr>s) OK
Parameter
See set command
Read command
Response
AT+CNMI?
+CNMI: <mode>,<mt>,<bm>,<ds>,<bfr> OK
Parameter
See set command
Write command
Response
AT+CNMI =
[<mode>]
[,<mt>][,<bm>]
[,<ds>][,<bfr>]
The write command selects the procedure how the receipt of new SMS messages
from the network is indicated to the TE when TE is active, e.g. DTR signal is ON.
If TE is inactive (e.g. DTR signal is OFF), the reception of messages shall be performed as specified in GSM 03.38.
Note:
If the DTR signal is not available or the state of the signal is ignored
(V.25ter command &D0), reliable message transfer can be ensured by using the +CNMA acknowledgment procedure.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<mode>
<mt>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
[0]
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA. If TA result code
buffer is full, indications can be buffered in some other place or
the oldest indications may be discarded and replaced with the
new received indications.
1
Discard indication and reject new received message
unsolicited result codes when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in
on-line data mode). Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
2
Buffer unsolicited result codes in the TA when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in on-line data mode) and flush them to the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
3
Forward unsolicited result codes directly to the TE. TA-TE link
specific inband technique used to embed result codes and data
when TA is in on-line data mode.
Rules for storing received SMS depend on the relevant data coding
method (refer to GSM 03.38 [2]), preferred memory storage (+CPMS)
setting and this value
Note: If AT command interface is acting as the only display device, the
ME must support storage of class 0 messages and messages in the
message waiting indication group (discard message)
[0]
No SMS-DELIVER indications are routed to the TE.
1
If SMS-DELIVER is stored in ME/TA, indication of the memory
location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
Page 169 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<bm>
<ds>
<bfr>
Unsolicited result
code
2
SMS-DELIVERs, except class 2 messages and messages in
the message waiting indication group (store message) are
routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code:
+CMT: ,<length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled)
+CMT: <oa>,, <scts> [,<tooa>, <fo>, <pid>, <dcs>, <sca>,
<tosca>, <length>] <CR> <LF> <data> (text mode enabled)
3
Class 3 SMS-DELIVERs are routed directly to the TE using
unsolicited result codes defined in <mt>=2. Messages of other
data coding schemes result in indication as defined in <mt>=1.
Rules for storing received CBMs depend on the relevant data coding
method (refer to GSM 03.38 [2]), the setting of Select CBM Types
(+CSCB) and this value:
[0]
No CBM indications are routed to the TE.
2
New CBMs are routed directly to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode enabled) or +CBM: <sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,<pages><CR>
<LF><data> (text mode enabled).
3
Class 3 CBMs are routed directly to TE using unsolicited result
codes defined in <bm>=2.
[0]
No SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE.
1
SMS-STATUS-REPORTs are routed to the TE using unsolicited result code: +CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu> (PDU mode
enabled) or +CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],<scts>,<dt>, <st>
(text mode enabled)
2
If SMS-STATUS-REPORT is routed into ME/TA, indication of
the memory location is routed to the TE using unsolicited result
code: +CDSI: <mem>,<index>
[1]
TA buffer of unsolicited result codes defined within this command is cleared when <mode> 1...3 is entered.
Syntax of responses output when SMS is received:
+CMTI: <mem>,<index>
Indicates that new message has been received
+CBMI: <mem>,<index>
Indicates that new CB message has been received
+CMT: ,<length><CR><LF><pdu> Short message is output directly
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
Cell broadcast message is output directly
Each time an SMS or Cell Broadcast Message is received, the Ring Line goes
Logic “1“ for one second.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 170 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Reference
GSM 07.05
General remarks:
· The parameters <ra> and <tora> will only be displayed if AT^SSCONF=1 has
been set before. See Chapter 7.44 for details on AT^SSCONF.
· To allow SMS overflow presentation during data transfers via Break, use
AT+CNMI=3,1 (see Chapter 7.20, AT^SMGO).
· If either a short message or a Status Report is not acknowledged, all +CNMI
parameters will be set to zero on all channels.
Handling of Class 0 short messages:
· If the host application is provided with a display and AT^SSDA=1 has been set
Class 0 short messages can be displayed immediately. Refer to Chapter 7.45
for details.
· If the host application does not include a display, ME handles Class 0 short
messages as though there was no message class, i.e. it will ignore bits 0 and 1
in the TP-DCS and normal rules for exceeded memory capacity shall apply.
This approach is compliant with GSM 03.38.
Requirements specific to Multiplex mode:
· In multiplex mode (AT+CMUX=0) only one channel can use a phase 2+ parameter. The parameter for <mt> and <ds> on the other channels have to be
set to zero.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 171 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.11 AT+CPMS Preferred SMS message storage
Test command
Response
AT+CPMS=?
+CPMS: (list of supported <mem1>s), (list of supported <mem2>s), (list of supported <mem3>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CPMS?
+CPMS: <mem1>,<used1>,<total1>,<mem2>,<used2>,<total2>,
<mem3>,<used3>,<total3> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CPMS=
<mem1>
[,<mem2>
[,<mem3>]]
The write command selects memory storages <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> to
be used for reading, writing, etc.
+CPMS: <used1>,<total1>,<used2>,<total2>,<used3>,<total3> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR:<err>
Parameter
<mem1> Memory to be used when listing, reading and deleting messages:
“SM”
SIM message storage
“ME”
Mobile Equipment message storage
“MT”
Sum of “ME” and “SM” storages
<mem2> Memory to be used when writing and sending messages:
“SM”
SIM message storage
“ME”
Mobile Equipment message storage
“MT”
Sum of “ME” and “SM” storages
<mem3> Received messages will be placed to this storage if routing to TE is not
set. See AT+CNMI command with parameter <mt>=2 (Chapter 5.10).
“SM”
SIM message storage
“MT”
Sum of “ME” and “SM” storages
<usedx> Number of messages currently in <memx>
<totalx> Number of messages storable in <memx>
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
General remarks
· The parameters <mem1>, <mem2> and <mem3> are saved in the non-volatile
memory.
· The Mobile Equipment storage "ME" offers space for 25 short messages.
· “MT” is the sum of "ME" (= 25 locations) and "SM" (capacity varies with SIM
card). The indices (<index>) of the “MT” storage are dependent on the order
selected with AT^SSMSS: For instructions of how to change the order of the
“MT” storage refer to Chapter 7.47.
· Incoming Class 1 short messages (ME specific) will be preferably stored to
“ME” and may be transferred to the “SM” storage if “ME” is used up.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 172 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Incoming Class 2 messages (SIM specific) will be stored to the SIM card only,
no matter whether or not there is free “ME” space.
As a result, the ^SMGO: 2 indication (see AT^SMGO in Chapter 7.20) may be
presented without prior indication of ^SMGO: 1. For more information regarding
SIM and ME specific message classes refer to <dcs> and the following specifications: GSM 03.38 and 3GPP TS 23.038.
Handling of <mem3> storage:
· When <mem3> is switched over from “MT” to “SM” all free “ME” locations will
be filled with dummy short messages. This procedure can take up to 35 seconds, until all the 25 records are written.
If switching from “MT” to “SM” was not finished due to error or user break, the
value of <mem3> remains “MT”, but some of the dummy records remain in the
“ME” storage. These records have to be deleted manually.
When <mem3> equals “SM”, do not delete the dummy messages in the “ME”
storage. They will be automatically deleted when you switch back from “SM” to
MT”. Again, this may take up to 35 seconds.
If switching from “SM” to “MT” was not finished due to an error or user break,
the value of <mem3> remains “SM”, but the “ME” storage will no longer be
filled with dummy records. New incoming short messages may now be written
to the “ME” storage, if “SM” is already full. To avoid this, repeat the AT+CPMS
command as soon as possible to switch <mem3> back to “MT”. As an alternative, you can manually delete the dummy records and issue
AT+CPMS=MT,MT,MT.
· In Multiplex mode, the parameter <mem3> will be the same on all instances,
but the settings of <mem1> and <mem2> may vary on each channel.
· While <mem3> equals “SM” and <mem1> equals “ME” it is possible that, after
deleting short messages from “ME”, the freed space on “ME” is reclaimed for
new incoming short messages, when there is no space left on the “SM” storage. As it is often the client’s concern to have received short messages stored
only to the SIM card, inconsistent settings should be generally avoided. This
can be achieved simply by using the same parameter for all <memx>.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 173 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.12 AT+CSCA SMS service centre address
Test command
Response
AT+CSCA=?
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CSCA?
+CSCA: <sca>,<tosca> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT+CSCA=<sca>
[,<tosca>]
Twrite command updates the SMSC address, through which mobile originated
SMs are transmitted. In text mode, setting is used by send and write commands. In PDU mode, setting is used by the same commands, but only when
the length of the SMSC address coded into <pdu> parameter equals zero.
Note:
This command writes the service centre address to non-volatile memory.
Response
OK
Parameter
<sca>
GSM 04.11 RP SC address Address value field in string format; BCD
numbers (or GSM default alphabet characters) are converted into
characters; type of address given by <tosca>
Maximum length of address: 20 characters
<tosca>
Service centre address format GSM 04.11 RP SC address Type-ofAddress octet in integer format (default refer <toda>)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
If no parameter is entered after AT+CSCA= the content of <sca> will be deleted.
The SMS service centre address should be entered as specified by the service
provider.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 174 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.13 AT+CSCB Select cell broadcast messages
Test command
Response
AT+CSCB=?
+CSCB: (list of supported <mode>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CSCB?
+CSCB: <mode>,<mids>,<dcss>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Parameter
AT+CSCB=[<mode>
[,<mids>[,<dcss>]]]
<mode>
[0]
Accepts messages that are defined in <mids> and <dcss>
1
Does not accept messages that are defined in <mids>
and <dcss>
<mids>
String type; combinations of CBM message IDs (e.g.
"0,1,5,320-478,922"). The number of ranges in <mids> parameter string is limited to 6
<dcss>
String type; combinations of CBM data coding schemes (e.g.
"0-3,5")
Note:
If <mode>=1 is selected the parameter <mids> has to be given as only one
area (e.g. “0-99“)
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 175 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.14 AT+CSDH Show SMS text mode parameters
Test command
Response
AT+CSDH=?
+CSDH: (list of supported <show>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CSDH?
+CSDH:<show> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CSDH=
<show>
TA sets whether or not detailed header information is shown in text mode result
codes.
OK
Parameter
<show>
Reference
[0]
do not show header values defined in commands +CSCA
and +CSMP (<sca>, <tosca>, <fo>, <vp>, <pid> and <dcs>)
nor <length>, <toda> or <tooa> in AT+CNMI, AT+CMGL,
AT+CMGR result codes for SMS-DELIVERs and SMSSUBMITs in text mode; for SMS-COMMANDs in AT+CMGR
result code, do not show <pid>, <mn>, <da>, <toda>,
<length> or <cdata>
1
show the values in result codes
Note
GSM 07.05
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 176 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.15 AT+CSMP Set SMS text mode parameters
Test command
Response
AT+CSMP=?
OK
Read command
Response
AT+CSMP?
+CSMP:<fo>,<vp/scts>,<pid>,<dcs> OK
Parameter
See set command
Set command
Response
AT+CSMP=
<fo>[,<vp/scts>[
,<pid>
[,<dcs>]]]
TA selects values for additional parameters needed when SM is sent to the network or placed in a storage when text format message mode is selected. It is possible to set the validity period starting from when the SM is received by the SMSC
(<vp> is in range 0... 255) or define the absolute time of the validity period termination (<vp> is a string). The format of <vp> is given by <fo>. If TA supports the
enhanced validity period format, see GSM 03.40), it shall be given as a hexadezimal coded string (refer e.g. <pdu>) with quotes.
Note:
When storing a SMS_DELIVER from the TE to the preferred memory storage in
text mode (refer write command to Message Memory +CMGW), <vp> field can be
used for <scts>
Parameter
<fo>
depending on the command or result code: first octet of GSM 03.40
SMS-DELIVER, SMS-SUBMIT (default 17), or SMS-COMMAND (default
2) in integer format
<scts>
GSM 03.40 TP-Service-Centre-Time-Stamp in time-string format (refer
<dt>)
<vp>
depending on SMS-SUBMIT <fo> setting: GSM 03.40 TP-Validity-Period
either in integer format (default 167) ), in time-string format (refer <dt>),
or if is supported, in enhanced format (hexadecimal coded string with
quotes)
<pid>
Protocol-Identifier in integer format (default 0), refer GSM 03.40
<dcs>
SMS Data Coding Scheme (default 0), or Cell Broadcast Data Coding
Scheme in integer format depending on the command or result code:
GSM 03.38
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
The command writes the parameters to the non-volatile memory.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 177 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
5.16 AT+CSMS Select Message Service
Test command
Response
AT+CSMS=?
+CSMS: (list of supported <service>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT+CSMS?
+CSMS: <service>,<mt>,<mo>,<bm> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT+CSMS=
<service>
+CSMS: <mt>,<mo>,<bm> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CMS ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<service>
<mt>
<mo>
<bm>
[0]
GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (the syntax of SMS AT commands is
compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2 version 4.7.0; Phase 2+
features which do not require new command syntax may be
supported, e.g. correct routing of messages with new Phase 2+
data coding schemes)
1
GSM 03.40 and 03.41 (the syntax of SMS AT commands is
compatible with GSM 07.05 Phase 2+ version; the requirement
of <service> setting 1 is mentioned under corresponding command descriptions).
Mobile Terminated Messages:
0
Type not supported
[1]
Type supported
Mobile Originated Messages:
0
Type not supported
[1]
Type supported
Broadcast Type Messages:
0
Type not supported
[1]
Type supported
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
· If CSMS is switched to <service>=1, all Phase 2+ messages (see AT+CNMI
with <mt>=2, <mt>= 3, <ds>=1) have to be acknowledged with AT+CNMA.
· Related chapters: 5.9 (AT+CNMA), 5.10 (AT+CNMI).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 178 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
6 AT Commands for SIM Application Toolkit (GSM 11.14)
SIM Application Toolkit (SAT) is a technology that lets the SIM card execute a great variety of additional applications. Conventionally, SIM cards are intended to store user specific data, such as phone
books, secure user identification codes and messages, but they can also hold a lot of value-added
mobile applications.
The SAT functionality integrated in TC35i allows to execute network specific applications implemented
on the SIM card. Typical examples are online banking and information services.
The commands exchanged between SAT and the SIM application fall into two categories:
· Proactive commands – sent from the SIM application to the module’s SAT, e.g. DISPLAY TEXT.
· Envelope commands – sent from the module's SAT to the SIM application, e.g. MENU SELECTION.
The SAT implementation supports SAT class 3, GSM 11.14 Release 98, support of letter class “c”.
GSM 11.14 describes Proactive and Envelope Commands in detail.
Note:
To give you an idea, this chapter contains a brief overview of the AT commands and responses related to the SIM Application Toolkit (SAT) implementation. The full set of SAT specific AT commands and a detailed descripton of the SAT functions is provided in [3].
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 179 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
6.1
AT^SSTA Remote-SAT Interface Activation
Test command
Response
AT^SSTA=?
^SSTA:(list of supported <state>s), (list of supported <alphabet>s)
Parameter description see below.
Read command
AT^SSTA?
The read command can be used to request the current operating status and the
used alphabet of the Remote-SAT interface.
Response
^SSTA:<state>,<alphabet>,<allowedInstance>,<SatProfile>
<state>
device state:
<allowedInstance>
0
SAT is already used on an other instance (logical channel in
case of the multiplex protocol). Only test and read commands can be used.
1
SAT may be started on this instance via the write version of
this command (see below).
<SatProfile>
SAT profile according to GSM 11.14.
The profile tells the SIM application which features are
supported by the SIM Application Toolkit implemented by the
ME.
Write command
AT^SSTA=
<mode>
[,<Alphabet>]
The write command is used to activate the AT command interface to the SIM
Application Toolkit in the ME, and must be issued after every power on. However, removing and inserting the SIM does not affect the activation status.
SAT commands which are not using the AT interface (non MMI related SAT
commands , e.g. PROVIDE LOCAL INFORMATION) may be executed without
activating Remote-SAT.
Response
OK
Parameter
<mode>
1
Activate Remote-SAT (to enter state IDLE)
0
ANSI character set
Input of a character requests one byte , e.g. “Y”.
1
UCS2
To display the 16 bit value of characters represented in
UCS2 alphabet a 4 byte string is required, e.g. “0059” is coding the character “Y”. For details please refer to ISO/IEC
10646.
<Alphabet>
Reference
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 180 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
6.2
^SSTN Remote-SAT Notification
Proactive
Commands
Every time the SIM application issues a proactive command, via the ME, the TA
will receive a notification. This indicates the type of proactive command issued.
AT^SSTGI must then be used by the TA to request the parameters of the proactive command from the ME.
Upon receiving the ^SSTGI response from the ME, the TA must send AT^SSTR
to confirm the execution of the proactive command and provide any required user
response, e.g. selected menu item.
Unsolicited result code
^SSTN: <cmdType>
Parameters
<cmdType>
Terminate
Proactive
Command
Proactive command ID
When the SIM application has issued a proactive command, via the ME, to the
TA, it is possible that this command must be terminated. The ^SSTN Unsolicited
Result Code is sent but with a different command type to indicate the termination
of the specified command.
Unsolicited result code
^SSTN: <cmdTerminateValue>
Parameters
<cmdTerminateValue>
SIM Application returns to
main menu
Terminate proactive command ID
Notification to the TA when the SIM Application has finished a command cycle
and again enters its main menue.
This URC should be used to open this menue on the sreen.
Unsolicited result code
^SSTN: <254>
Reference
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 181 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
6.3
AT^SSTGI Remote-SAT Get Information
Test command
Response
AT^SSTGI=?
^SSTGI:(list of supported <state>s), (list of supported <cmdType>s)
OK
Read command
Response
AT^SSTGI?
^SSTGI: <state>, <cmdType>
OK
Parameters
<state>
Remote-SAT interface states (refer to AT^SSTA)
<cmdType> Ongoing Proactive Command
Write command
AT^SSTGI=
<cmdType>
Reference
Regularly this Write command is used upon receipt of an unsolicited result code
^SSTN:<cmdType>.
The TA is expected to acknowledge the ^SSTGI response with AT^SSTR to
confirm that the proactive command has been executed.
AT^SSTR will also provide any user information, e.g. a selected menu item.
The command type value is returned to the ME to identify which ^SSTN is being
responded to.
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 182 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
6.4
AT^SSTR Remote-SAT Response
Test command
Response
AT^SSTR=?
^SSTR:(list of supported <state>s), (list of supported <cmdType>s)
OK
Read command
Response
AT^SSTR?
^SSTR: <state>, <cmdType>
OK
Parameters
Write command
AT^SSTR=
<cmdType>,
<status>
[,<itemId>]
[,<inputString>]
Reference
<state>
Remote-SAT interface state
<cmdType>
Ongoing Proactive Command
The TA is expected to acknowledge the ^SSTGI response with AT^SSTR to
confirm
that
the
proactive
command
has
been
executed.
AT^SSTR will also provide any user information, e.g. a selected menu item.
Response
OK
Parameters
<cmdType>
Number related to Proactive command or event type
<status>
Command status return regarding the type of action that has
taken place, e.g. action performed by the user.
<itemId>
id of menu item selected by user
<inputString>
string response entered by user
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 183 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7 Siemens defined AT commands for enhanced functions
Self-defined commands do not have to be implemented in accordance with the official syntax. The
“+C” string can therefore be replaced by “^S” (“^” = 0x5E). If a self-defined command with the same
syntax will be included in future in the GSM recommendations, the command can be addressed with
both strings.
7.1
AT+CXXCID Display card ID (identical to AT^SCID)
Test command
Response
AT+CXXCID=?
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Execute command
Response
AT+CXXCID
TA returns the card identification number in SIM (SIM file EF ICCID, see
GSM 11.11 Chap.10.1.1) as string type.
See ^SCID
Parameter
See ^SCID
Reference
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 184 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.2
AT^MONI Monitor idle mode and dedicated mode
Cell information can be issued in the form of periodic outputs (depending on <period> set with the
Write command), or it can be queried directly using the Execute command.
Test command
Response
AT^MONI=?
^MONI: (list of supported < period >s) OK
Write command
The Write command can be used to retrieve information of the serving/dedicated
cell automatically every n seconds. To stop the presentation type any character.
AT^MONI
=<period>
Note:
The two header lines (see below) are output after every ten data lines.
Response
See execute command
Parameter
<period>
Execute command
AT^MONI
1 – 254
Display period in seconds
The Execute command can be used to retrieve the cell parameters of the serving/dedicated cell on request.
Note:
The length of following output lines exceeds 80 characters. Therefore a terminal
program may draw a carriage return on a screen. However, this is not part of the
response.
Response (Examples)
MS is not connected:
a) MS is camping on a cell and registered to the network:
Serving Cell
chann rs dBm MCC MNC LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev
1013 21 -71 001 01 1001 2468
7
7 33 -105
I Dedicated channel
C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR
33 I
No connection
dBm Q ChMod
b) MS is camping on a cell but not registered to the network (only emergency call allowed):
Serving Cell
chann rs dBm MCC MNC LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev
477 21 -71 123 456 A123 2468
7
3 33 -105
I Dedicated channel
C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR
33 I
Limited Service
dBm Q ChMod
c) MS is camping on a cell but searching for a better cell (cell reselection)
Serving Cell
chann rs dBm MCC MNC LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev
1013
4 –106 001 01 1001 2468
7
7 33 -105
I Dedicated channel
C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR
–1 I
Cell Reselection
dBm Q ChMod
d) MS is searching, could not (yet) find a suitable cell
Serving Cell
chann rs dBm MCC MNC
Searching
LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev
I Dedicated channel
C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR
dBm Q ChMod
Serving Cell
chann rs dBm MCC MNC LAC cell NCC BCC PWR RXLev
1013 19 -76 001 01 1001 2468
7
7 33 -105
I Dedicated channel
C1 I chann TS timAdv PWR
33 I 1015
1
0
5
dBm Q ChMod
-76 0 S_HR
MS is connected:
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 185 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Parameters
Serving Cell:
chann
ARFCN (Absolute Frequency Channel Number) of the BCCH carrier in
decimal format
rs
RSSI value 0 – 63 (RSSI = Received signal strength indication)
dBm
receiving level of the BCCH carrier in dBm
MCC
Mobile Country Code (first part of the PLMN code)
MNC
Mobile Network Code (second part of the PLMN code)
LAC
location area code, in hexadecimal format. See note below.
cell
4-digit Cell ID in hexadecimal format. See note below.
NCC
PLMN colour code
BCC
base station colour code
PWR
maximal power level used on RACH channel in dBm
RXLev
minimal receiving level (in dBm) to allow registration
C1
cell selection criterion
Dedicated channel:
chann
ARFCN (Absolute Frequency Channel Number) of the TCH carrier
Note: <chann> = h indicates frequency hopping.
TS
timeslot number
timAdv
timing advance in bits
PWR
current power level
dBm
receiving level of the traffic channel carrier in dBm
Q
receiving quality (0–7)
ChMod
channel mode (S_HR: Half rate, S_FR: Full rate, S_EFR: Enhanced Full
Rate)
Depending on the service state, an additional textual output is generated (refer
also to the response examples):
‘Searching’ - The MS is searching, but could not (yet) find a suitable cell. This output appears after restart of the MS or after loss of coverage.
‘No connection’ - The MS is camping on a cell and registered to the network. The
service state is ‘idle’, i.e. there is no connection established or a dedicated channel
in use.
‘Cell Reselection’ - The MS has not yet lost coverage but is searching for a better
cell, since the cell reselection criterion is fulfilled.
‘Limited Service’ - The MS is camping on a cell but not registered to the network.
Only emergency calls are allowed. The MS enters this state, for example, when
- no SIM card is inserted, or PIN has not been given,
- neither Home PLMN nor any other allowed PLMN are found,
- registration request was not answered or denied by the network (use command AT+CREG to query the registration status),
- authentication failed.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 186 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Reference
Note
Siemens
· The parameters LAC and cell are presented as hexadecimal digits, the remaining parameters are composed of decimal digits.
· If the radio cell changes during a connection, the parameters PWR, RXLev and
C1 of the ‘Serving Cell’ part are not available under certain conditions and
therefore, are displayed as “-“ (for conditions see also +CREG, pg 141). This is
because the MS does not update the cell selection and reselection parameters
since, in this mode, they are not relevant for operation. When the connection
ends, and the mobile is back to IDLE mode, correct values will be given.
If the radio cell changes during a connection, it normally takes 1 or 2 seconds
to update the parameters cell, NCC and BCC. Until the information is received
from the new base station, the default values will be shown instead:
cell=”0000”, NCC=”-“, BCC=”-“.
· If the BS supports frequency hopping during a connection, the dedicated channel (parameter chann) is not stable. This mode is indicated by chann = ‘h’.
· To some extent, the cell monitoring command AT^SMONC covers the same
parameters. The receiving level, for example, can be queried with both commands. Yet the resulting values may be slightly different, even though obtained
over a time period of a few seconds. This is quite normal and nothing to worry
about, as the cell information is permanently updated.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 187 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.3
AT^MONP Monitor neighbour cells
Cell information can be issued in the form of periodic outputs (depending on <period> set with the
Write command), or it can be queried directly using the Execute command.
Test command
Response
AT^MONP=?
^MONP: (list of supported < period >s) OK
Write command
The Write command can be used to retrieve information of up to six neighbour
cells automatically every n seconds. To stop the presentation type any character.
AT^MONP
=<period>
Response
See execute command
Parameter
1 – 254
<period>
Execute command
AT^MONP
Display period in seconds
The Execute command can be used to obtain information of up to six neighbour
cells on request.
Parameters
Example
Chann
ARFCN (Absolute Frequency Channel Number) of the BCCH carrier
rs
RSSI value 0 – 63 (RSSI = Received signal strength indication)
dBm
Receiving level in dBm
MCC
Mobile Country Code (first part of the PLMN code)
MNC
Mobile Network Code (second part of the PLMN code)
BCC
Base Station colour code
C1
cell selection selection criterion
C2
cell reselection criterion
AT^MONP
chann rs
504 18
476 15
421 13
440 10
446
9
417
8
OK
dBm
-78
-83
-88
-93
-95
-97
MCC MNC BCC
262 03
1
262 03
3
262 03
1
262 03
7
262 03
7
262 03
4
C1
27
22
17
12
10
8
C2
27
22
17
12
10
8
Reference
Note
Siemens
· Due to the fact that not all necessary information of the neighbour cells can be
decoded during a connection, there are several constraints to be considered:
- Only neighbour cells that have already been visible in IDLE mode will be
further updated, as long as they are still included in the list.
- Though new neighbour cells can be added to the list (e.g. due to handover), their C1 and C2 parameters cannot be displayed until the connection is released. In this case “-“ is presented for C1 and C2.
- To some extent, the cell monitoring command AT^SMONC covers the
same parameters. The receiving level, for example, can be queried with
both commands. Yet the resulting values may be slightly different, even
though obtained over a time period of a few seconds. This is quite normal
and nothing to worry about, as the cell information is permanently updated.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 188 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.4
AT^SACM Advice of charge and query of ACM and ACMmax
Test command
Response
AT^SACM=?
^SACM: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Execute command
AT^SACM
The execute command can be used to query the current mode of the Advice of
Charge supplementary service, the SIM values of the accumulated call meter
(ACM) and accumulated call meter maximum (ACMmax).
Response
^SACM: <n>,<acm>,<acm_max> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n>
See write command
<acm>
ACM, string type; three bytes of the current ACM value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30) 000000–
FFFFFF
<acm_max> ACMmax, string type; three bytes of the max. ACM value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30) 000000 disable ACMmax feature 000001-FFFFFF
<ccm>
Write command
AT^SACM=<n>
string type; three bytes of the current CCM value in hexadecimal format (e.g. “00001E” indicates decimal value 30); bytes are coded in
the same way as ACMmax value in the SIM 000000-FFFFFF
The write command enables or disables the presentation of unsolicited result to
report the call charges.
Response
OK or if error is related to ME functionality: +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<n>
0
suppress unsolicited result code
1
display unsolicited result code
When you power down or reset the ME with AT+CFUN=1,1 the URC
presentation mode will be reset to its default. To benefit from the
URC it is recommended to have the setting included in the user profile saved with AT&W, or to select <n>=1 every time you reboot the
ME.
Unsolicited result code
When activated, an unsolicited result code is sent when the CCM value changes,
but not more often than every 10 seconds
+CCCM: <ccm>
Reference
Note
Siemens
See also GSM07.07: AT+CACM, AT+CAMM, AT+CAOC
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 189 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.5
AT^SAIC Audio Interface Configuration
Test command
Response
AT^SAIC =?
^SAIC: (list of supported <io>s), (list of supported <mic>s), (list of supported
<ep>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SAIC?
^SAIC: <io>,<mic>,<ep> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SAIC=<io>[,
<mic>[,<ep>]]
This command configures the interface connections of the active audio mode.
Response
OK
Parameter
<io>
Input and output
1
Not supported.
2
Type of audio interface: Analog
<mic> Selects the microphone input (if parameter is not specified, the current
value is used)
1
Selects the microphone 1 connected to analog interface 1.
2
Selects the microphone 2 connected to analog interface 2.
<ep>
Selects differential earpiece amplifier (if parameter is not specified, the
current value is used)
1
Selects the earpiece amplifier 1.
2
Selects the earpiece amplifier 2.
3
Selects both amplifiers. Note that both amplifiers are connected in
parallel and therefore, get the same output power if <ep>=3.
Reference
Note
Siemens
· The AT^SAIC Write command is usable only in audio modes 2 – 6. If
AT^SNFS=1, any attempt to use the AT^SAIC Write command returns “+CME
ERROR: operation not allowed”. This is because all default parameters in audio mode 1 are determined for type approval and are not adjustable.
· For use after restart of TC35i, you are advised to store the settings of
AT^SAIC and AT^SNFS to the audio profile set with AT^SNFW. Otherwise,
audio mode 1 (AT^SNFS=1) and audio interface 1 (AT^SAIC=2,1,1) will be
active each time TC35i is powered up.
· The factory defaults of AT^SAIC vary with the selected audio mode.
If AT^SNFS=1 or 4 or 5, then AT^SAIC=2,1,1.
If AT^SNFS=2 or 3 or 6, then AT^SAIC=2,2,2. (Although given by default, this
setting applies to TC35i module only, it cannot be used with the TC35i Termind
nal where the 2 audio interface is not connected. Nevertheless, you can
configure TC35i Terminal for operation with audio modes 2, 3 or 6 by setting
AT^SAIC=2,1,1 instead. See examples provided with AT^SNFS.)
AT^SNFD can be used to reset the factory defaults.
· To allocate a specific audio mode to each analog audio interface, first select
the audio mode with AT^SNFS and then choose the interface using AT^SAIC.
· See Chapter 7.26 for SNFD, Chapter 7.31 for AT^SNFS and Chapter 7.33 for
AT^SNFW.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 190 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.6
AT^SBC Battery charge and charger control
This chapter is only applicable to TC35i, it is not intended for TC35i Terminal.
Responses returned by the AT^SBC command vary with the operating mode of the ME:
Normal mode:
Normal mode + charging:
Charge-only mode:
Alarm mode:
ME is switched on by Ignition pin and running the SLEEP, IDLE,
TALK or DATA mode. Charger is not connected. AT^SBC can be
used to query the battery capacity and the power consumption of ME
and application (if value of application was specified before as <current>).
Allows charging while ME is switched on by Ignition pin and running
the SLEEP, IDLE, TALK or DATA mode. AT^SBC returns charger
status and power consumption of ME / application. Battery capacity
is not available.
Allows charging while ME is detached from GSM network. When
started, the mode is indicated by the URC "^SYSSTART CHARGEONLY MODE". AT^SBC returns charger status and power consumption of ME / application. Percentage of battery capacity is not available. In Charge-only mode a limited number of AT commands is accessible (see Table 16). There are several ways to activate the
Charge-only mode:
a) from Power Down mode: Connect charger while ME was powered
down with AT^SMSO
b) from Normal mode: Connect charger, then enter AT^SMSO.
No charging functionality, i.e. charging does not start even though
the charger is connected. Battery parameters are not available.
Charging begins once the charger is connected to the POWER pin of the external charging circuit.
See [1] for details on the charging control implemented in TC35i.
Test command
Response
AT^SBC=?
^SBC: (list of supported <bcs>s),(list of supported <bcl>s),<mpc> module power
consumption
Parameters
<bcs>
Connection status of battery pack. See read command.
<bcl>
Battery charge level. See read command.
<mpc>
Average power consumption:
Value (0...5000) of average power consumption (mean value over a
couple of seconds) in mA. See read and write command for details.
Read command
Response
AT^SBC?
^SBC: <bcs>,<bcl>,<mpc>
<bcs>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Connection status of charging adapter
0
No charging adapter is connected
1
Charging adapter is connected
2
Charging adapter is connected, charging in progress
3
Charging adapter is connected, charging has finished
4
Charging error, charging is interrupted
5
False charging temperature. Note that charging stops if the
temperature range specified for charging (0°C – 45°) is exceeded. In this case, the read command can be use to check
the temperature range.
Page 191 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<bcl>
Battery charge level
0, 20, 40, 60, 80, 100 percent of remaining capacity (6 steps)
0 indicates that either the battery is exhausted or the capacity value
is not available
While charging is in progress (charging adapter connected) no
battery capacity value is available. Consequently, parameter
<bcl>=0. To query the battery capacity disconnect the charger.
<mpc>
Average power consumption
<mpc> is obtained from the ME's power consumption, plus the value
you have specified for the application by using the write command
AT^SBC=<current>. Remember that the ME's power consumption
varies with its operating mode (IDLE, TALK, DATA) and the power
level.
If <current> was not yet specified and no battery pack NTC is
detected <mpc> returns only the module's present power
consumption.
If <current> was not yet specified, but the NTC of the connected
battery pack is detected, an offset value of 200mA will, by default, be
added to <mpc>. 200mA is an estimated value which represents the
power consumption of a typical external application. Drawn from
practical experience it serves as a precaution to ensure proper
charging in case you have not entered <current>. It is strongly
recommended that you enter the correct power consumption of your
application as described below.
Note: If the battery does not incorporate an NTC, or the battery and
the NTC are not compliant with the requirements specified in [1], the
battery cannot be detected by the ME.
Write command
AT^SBC=
<current>
Use the write command to specify the power consumption of your external application. This information enables the ME to calculate the average power consumption <mpc> and to properly control the charging process. If the value is not correct
the entire charging process may be affected. Resulting problems may be wrong
responses to the AT^SBC read command, overcharging, or the battery does not
reach full capacity.
When the ME is powered down or reset, the value of <current> is restored to its
default.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<current>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Enter the current consumption of your application in mA (0...5000). If
used, the current provided over the by 2.9V VDD pin of the application interface (maximum 10mA) must be added, too.
Page 192 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Unsolicited result
codes
Undervoltage and overvoltage conditions will be reported by unsolicited result
codes. The URCs need not be activated by the user, but will be output automatically when fault conditions occur. For further details regarding automatic shutdown and voltage ratings please refer to [1].
^SBC: Undervoltage
The URC will be indicated, for example, when you attempt to make a call while
the voltage is close to the critical limit and further power loss is caused during the
transmit burst. To remind you that the battery needs to be charged soon, the URC
appears several times in a minute before the module switches off. If the voltage
drops quickly down to a value which is 50mV below the minimum threshold only
one URC will be presented.
^SBC: Overvoltage warning
This URC is an alarm indicator displayed when the supply voltage approaches its
maximum level. The URC appears only once.
^SBC: Overvoltage shutdown
This URC will be reported when the voltage exceeds the maximum level specified
in [1]. It appears only once before the module starts to perform an orderly shutdown.
In applications powered from Li-Ion batteries the incorporated protection circuit
typically prevents overcharging, thus eliminating the risk of overvoltage conditions. Yet, in case of charging errors, for example caused by a bad battery or due
to the absence of a battery protection circuit, the module’s overvoltage shutdown
function will take effect to avoid overcharging.
The automatic shutdown procedure caused by undervoltage or overvoltage is
equivalent to the power-down initiated with the AT^SMSO command, i.e. TC35i
logs off from the network and the software enters a secure state avoiding loss of
data. When the module is in IDLE mode it takes typically one minute to deregister
from the network and to switch off.
Reference
Note
Siemens
· If Multiplex mode is active, any virtual channel can be used to enter the write
command and to specify <current>. An unsolicited result code appears simultaneously on all three channels.
· The URC "^SYSSTART CHARGE-ONLY MODE" is indicated automatically
when the engine enters this mode (except when autobauding is active).
Table 16: Summary of AT commands available in Charge-only and Alarm mode
AT command
AT+CALA
AT+CCLK
AT^SBC
AT^SCTM
AT^SMSO
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Use
Set alarm time
Set date and time of RTC
Monitor charging process, specify power consumption of application
Query temperature of GSM engine, enable or disable URCs
Power down GSM engine
Page 193 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.7
AT^SBV Battery / supply voltage
Test command
Response
AT^SBV=?
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Execute command
Response
AT^SBV
The execute command allows to monitor the supply (or battery) voltage of the
module. The reference point for measuring the voltage are the test points BATT+
and GND on the bottom of the module. Refer to [1] for information on the module’s
test points.
^SBV: <value> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<value> numeric value for supply (or battery) voltage in mV
The displayed value is constant over the measurement period. The
duration of the measuring period depends on the operating mode on the
radio interface: It ranges from 0.5s in TALK / DATA mode to 50s if the
module is deregistered.
Reference
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 194 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.8
AT^SCID Display SIM card identification number
Test command
Response
AT^SCID=?
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
Execute command
Response
AT^SCID
TA returns the identification number of the SIM card (see GSM 11.11 Chapter
10.1.1).
^SCID: <cid> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<cid>
Reference
string type: card identification number of SIM card
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 195 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.9
AT^SCKS Set SIM connection presentation mode and query SIM connection status
Test command
Response
AT^SCKS=?
^SCKS: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SCKS?
TA returns the URC presentation mode and the status of the SIM card connection.
^SCKS: <n>, <m> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT^SCKS=<n>
TA enables or disables the presentation of URCs to report whether or not the SIM
card is connected.
When the ME is powered down or reset with AT+CFUN=1,1 the presentation
mode <n> will not be restored to its default. To benefit from the URCs, it is recommended to have the setting <n>=1 included in the user profile saved with
AT&W, or activate the setting every time you reboot the ME.
OK
Parameter
<n>
0 Suppress unsolicited result codes
1 Output unsolicited result codes
<m>
0 No card
1 Card in card reader
Unsolicited result code
When the status "SIM connected" changes, an unsolicited result code is sent to
the TE.
^SCKS: <m>
Parameter
See write command
Reference
Note
Siemens
Note that the connection status of <m> reflects only the status of the card holder
tray. If an empty SIM card tray is inserted, two URCs will be output, indicating the
status 1 and 0, as shown in the example below .
Example
at^scks=1
Activates the presentation of unsolicited result codes:
OK
Now, after inserting an empty card tray the following URCs appear:
^SCKS: 1
Tray connected
^SCKS: 0
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
No SIM card found.
Page 196 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.10 AT^SCNI List Call Number Information
Test command
Response
AT^SCNI=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT^SCNI
TA returns a list of current calls of ME.
[^SCNI: <id1>[,<cs>[,<number>,<type>]]]
[^SCNI: <id2>[,<cs>[,<number>,<type>]]]
[...] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<idx>
1–7
<cs>
Call status of respective call number (first parameter)
0
integer type; call identification number as described in GSM
02.30[19] subclause 4.5.5.1; this number can be used in
+CHLD command operations
call hold
1
call in progress
2
Waiting call
<number>
string type phone number in format specified by <type>
<type>
type of address octet in integer format; 145 when dialing string
includes international access code character “+”, otherwise 129
Reference
Note
Siemens
See also GSM 07.07: AT+CLCC
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 197 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.11 AT^SCTM Set critical operating temperature presentation mode or
query temperature
This command can be used to monitor the temperature of the module.
CAUTION: During the first 15 seconds after start-up, the module operates in an automatic report
mode: URCs can be always displayed regardless of the selected mode <n>.
Test command
Response
AT^SCTM=?
If parameter <p> = 0:
^SCTM: (list of supported <n>s) OK
If parameter <p> = 1:
^SCTM: (list of supported <n>s),(range of <temp> in degrees Celsius) OK
Parameters
See write command
Read command
AT^SCTM?
TA returns the following parameters
· URC presentation mode
· Information about the current temperature range of the module.
Please note that the Read command does not indicate the temperature range
of the battery. This value can only be reported by an Unsolicited Result Code.
· The board temperature in degrees Celsius if <p>=1.
Response
If parameter <p> = 0:
^SCTM: <n>, <m> OK
If parameter <p> = 1:
^SCTM: <n>, <m>, <temp>OK
Parameters
<n>
See Write command.
<m>
-2 Low temperature limit is exceeded (causes switch-off)
-1 Board is close to low temperature limit
0 Normal operating temperature
1 Board is close to high temperature limit
2 High temperature limit is exceeded (causes switch-off)
<temp>
Write command
Response
AT^SCTM=<n>
[,p>]
OK
Current board temperature in degrees Celsius. The value is comprised
between lowest and upper temperature limits.
Parameters
<n>
0 Suppress URCs (except for <m> equal to –2 or +2).
<p>
0 Suppress output of <temp> in Test and Read command.
1 Enable presentation of URCs.
1 Enable presentation of <temp> in Test and Read command.
The settings will not be stored upon Power Down, i.e. after restart or reset, the defaults <n>=0 and <p>=0 will be restored. To benefit from the URCs <n>=1 needs to
be selected every time you reboot the module. The same applies to <p>=1.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 198 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Unsolicited result
code
URCs will be automatically sent to the TA when the temperature reaches or exceeds the critical level, or when it is back to normal.
^SCTM_A: <m>
Temperature range of the connected battery.
^SCTM_B: <m>
Temperature range of the TC35i board.
See Test command for defined values of <m>.
Reference
Note
Siemens
Important:
· Please refer to [1] for specifications on critical temperature ranges.
· The module will shut down once the critical temperature is exceeded. The procedure is equivalent to the power-down initiated with AT^SMSO.
· URCs indicating the alert level "1" or "-1" are intended to enable the user to
take appropriate precautions, such as protect the module or battery from exposure to extreme conditions, or save or back up data etc. The presentation of "1"
or "-1" URCs depends on the settings selected with the write command:
If <n>=0: Presentation is enabled for 15 s time after the module was switched
on. After 15 s operation, the presentation will be disabled, i.e. no URCs will be
generated.
If <n>= 1: Presentation of "1" or "-1" URCs is always enabled.
· Level "2" or "-2" URCs are followed by immediate shutdown. The presentation
of these URCs is always enabled, i.e. they will be output even though the factory setting AT^SCTM=0 was never changed.
· If the temperature limit is exceeded while an emergency call is in progress the
module continues to measure the temperature and to deliver alert messages,
but deactivates the shutdown functionality. Once the call is terminated full temperature control will be resumed. If the temperature is still out of range TC35i
switches off immediately.
Examples
URCs issued when the board temperature is out of range:
^SCTM_A: 1
Caution: Battery close to overtemperature limit.
Example
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
^SCTM_A: 2
Alert: Battery above overtemperature limit. Engine switches off.
^SCTM_B: 1
Caution: Board close to overtemperature limit.
^SCTM_B: 2
Alert: Board is above overtemperature limit and switches off.
^SCTM_A: -1
Caution: Battery close to undertemperature limit.
^SCTM_A: -2
Alert: Battery below undertemperature limit. Engine switches
off.
^SCTM_B: -1
Caution: Board close to undertemperature limit.
^SCTM_B: -2
Alert: Board is below undertemperature limit and switches off.
URC issued when board temperature is back to normal:
^SCTM_A: 0
Battery temperature is back to normal.
^SCTM_B: 0
Board temperature is back to normal.
Page 199 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.12 AT^SDLD Delete the “last number redial“ memory
Test command
Response
AT^SDLD=?
OK
Execute command
The execute command deletes all numbers stored in the LD memory.
AT^SDLD
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
Note
Siemens
7.13 AT^SHOM Display Homezone
Test command
Response
AT^SHOM=?
OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
Response
AT^SHOM
TA returns homezone state
^SHOM: <homezonestate> OK
Parameters
<homezonestate>
Reference
0
ME is out of Homezone
1
ME is within the Homezone
Note
Siemens
7.14 AT^SLCD Display Last Call Duration
Test command
Response
AT^SLCD=?
OK
Parameter
See execute command
Execute command
Response
AT^SLCD
TA returns last call duration or current call duration
^SLCD: <time> OK
Parameter
<time>
Reference
string type value; format is "hh:mm:ss", where characters indicate hours,
minutes, seconds; e.g. 22:10:00 “22:10:00",
max values are 9999:59:59
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 200 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.15 AT^SLCK Facility lock
Test command
Response
AT+CLCK=?
+CLCK: (list of supported <fac>s) OK
Parameter
Execute command
AT+CLCK=<fac>,
<mode>
[,<passwd>
[,<class>]]
See execute command
Use this command to lock, unlock or interrogate a ME or a network facility
<fac>. The command can be aborted when network facilities are being set or
interrogated.
Response
If <mode> ¹ 2 and command is successful
OK
If <mode> = 2 and command is successful
+CLCK: <status>[,<class1>[<CR><LF>
+CLCK: <status>, class2....]] OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> Phone security locks:
“SC” SIM (lock SIM cards). SIM requests password upon ME powerup and when this lock command is issued.
<password>: SIM PIN1. The password can be modified with
AT+CPWD or AT^SPWD (see Chapters 4.38 and 7.42).
“PS” Phone locked to SIM card. ME requests password when other
than current SIM card is inserted.
<password>: User defined password. It is needed before the first
use of <fac>”PS and, therefore, must first be specified with
AT+CPWD or AT^SPWD.
“FD” SIM fixed dialing memory: If the mobile is locked to "FD", only
the phone numbers stored to the "FD" memory can be dialed
(depending on the SIM card, usually up to 7 numbers).
<password>: SIM PIN2 (or equivalent authorisation via
AT+CPIN2, see Chapter 4.36.)
If a lock on the SIM fixed dialing memory is active, call related
Supplementary Services such as call barring, call waiting or call
forwarding cannot be accessed via AT command. The response
will be “ +CME ERROR: call barred”. In this case, access to call
related Supplementary Services is possible only if the corresponding public MMI *# code is stored in the fixed dialing number phone book, or by deactivation of the SIM fixed dialing facility
lock)
Note:
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
"PS" lock is frequently referred to as "phone lock", or "device
lock". Accordingly, the password may be called "phone code" or
"device code". The "PS" password is not associated with the
PUK of the SIM card. If incorrectly entered three times, the Master Phone Code is required to lift the lock. This is an 8-digit device code associated to the IMEI number of the mobile which can
only by obtained from the manufacturer of the TC35i module.
Once the Master Phone Code has been acctepted, the mobile is
operational, and the "PS" lock is no longer active. See Chapter
4.35.1 and examples below for further details.
Page 201 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Factory set SIM locks
<password>: Factory set password. See note below.
“PF” lock Phone to the very First SIM card
“PN” Network Personalisation
“PU” Network subset Personalisation
“PP” Service Provider Personalisation
“PC” Corporate Personalisation
Note:
Typical examples of factory set SIM locks are prepaid phones or
network locks, used to restrict the operation of a mobile to a specific provider or operator. The end user should be aware that
each of these lock types can only be unlocked if the associated
password is available. For example, a mobile can be locked to
accept only SIM cards from the respective provider, or even one
single SIM card. Once a different SIM card is inserted the ME will
prompt the client to enter a specific code. This is not the PUK of
the SIM card, but usually an 8-digit code which needs to be requested from the provider.
The locks can only be set by the manufacturer of the TC35i
modules and need to be agreed upon between the parties concerned, e.g. provider, operator, distributor etc. on the one side
and the manufacturer on the other side. For details contact your
local dealer or Siemens AG.
See Chapter 4.35 and 4.35.1 for further instructions.
Supplementary Service: Call barring:
<password>: Network dependent password. See note below.
“AO” BAOC (Bar All Outgoing Calls)
“OI” BOIC (Bar Outgoing International Calls)
“OX” BOIC-exHC (Bar Outgoing International Calls except to Home
Country)
“AI” BAIC (Bar All Incoming Calls)
“IR” BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home
country)
“AB” All Barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
“AG” All outGoing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
“AC” All inComing barring services (applicable only for <mode>=0)
Note:
The availability of the Supplementary Services varies with the
network. To benefit from call barring services the client will need
to subscribe them, though a limited number of call barring types
may be included in the basic tariff package. Call barring is protected by a password supplied from the provider or operator.
Usually there is one password which applies to all call barring
options. For details contact your provider. With AT+CPWD or
AT^SPWD the default password can be changed individually. After 3 failed attempts to enter the correct password, the client is
required to contact the provider.
When you attempt to set a <fac> or <class> which is not provisioned, not yet subscribed to, or not supported by the module,
the setting will not take effect regardless of the response returned. The responses in these cases vary with the network (for
example “OK”, “Operation not allowed”, “Operation not supported” etc.). To make sure check the call barring status with
<mode>=2.
<mode> 0 unlock
1 lock
2 query status
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 202 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<passwd> password. For each <fac> a different type of password is required.
See Chapters 4.38 and 7.42 for instructions of how to specify passwords.
<class>
integer or sum of integers each representing a <class> of information:
1
voice
2
data
4
fax
8
short message service
16
data circuit sync
32
data circuit async
64
dedicated packet access
128
dedicated PAD access
x
combination of some of the above classes.
For example, the default setting 7 represents the sum of the
integers 1, 2 and 4 (call barring for voice, data and fax). The
value 255 covers all classes. If the <class> parameter is
omitted, the default value 7 is used.
See examples in 4.21.3 for correct handling of class numbers.
<class> 2 (data) comprises all those <class> values between 16 and
128, that are supported both by the network and the MS. This means,
a setting made for <class> 2 applies to all remaining data classes (if
supported). In addition, you can assign a different setting to a specific
class. For example, you can activate call barring for all data classes,
but deactivate it for a specific data class.
<status> 0 off
1 on
Reference
Note
GSM 07.07
GSM 02.04,
GSM 02.88
See also specification of AT+CLCK in GSM 07.07 and further details in Chapter
4.21.
The command has been implemented with the full set of <class> parameters
according to GSM 07.07. For actual applicability of a specific <fac> to a specific
service or service group (a specific <class> value) please consult table A.1 of
GSM 02.04.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 203 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.16 AT^SLMS List Memory Storage
Test command
Response
AT^SLMS=?
OK
Execute command
This command lists the used and total storages for short messages.
AT^SLMS
Response
^SLMS: “SM”,<total1>,<used1>
^SLMS: “ME”,<total2>,<used2>
^SLMS: “MT”,<total3>,<used3>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR
+CMS ERROR
Parameter
Reference
<total1>
(numeric)
Available storage entries of SIM message storage (physical storage)
<total2>
(numeric)
Available storage entries of Mobile Equipment message storage
(physical storage)
<total3>
(numeric)
Available storage entries of SIM (“SM”) and Mobile Equipment (“ME”)
<used1>
(numeric)
Number of messages currently used in SIM message storage (physical storage)
<used2>
(numeric)
Number of messages currently used in Mobile Equipment message
storage (physical storage)
<used3>
(numeric)
Concatenated logical storage of SIM (“SM”) and Mobile Equipment
message storage (“ME”)
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 204 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.17 AT^SM20 Set M20 Compatibility
Test command
Response
AT^SM20=?
OK
Read command
Response
AT^SM20?
^SM20: <CallMode>,<CmgwMode>
OK
Parameters
See write command
Write command
AT^SM20=
<CallMode>
[,<CmgwMode>]
M20 is an earlier, widely used SIEMENS GSM engine. The AT^SM20 command selects different modes of responses returned upon execution of the two
commands ATD and AT+CMGW. Please note that the AT^SM20 command has
no effect on any other features and is not intended to adjust other differences
between M20 and TC35i.
OK
Parameters
<CallMode>
Call setup response mode (numeric). Applies only to voice
calls.
0
Set compatibility to Siemens mobile phones.
ME will return “OK” immediately after attempting a call
with the ATD command. In case of failure, additional call
release indications, such as “NO DIAL TONE, “NO
CARRIER”, “BUSY” will follow.
1
Default call setup mode, compatible to M20.
ME will return “OK" in case of a successful connection,
otherwise one of the call release indications “NO DIAL
TONE, “NO CARRIER”, “BUSY” are indicated.
Note: If ATD is used while there is already an active call, then
“OK” will always be presented immediately after dialing was
completed, regardless of the settings selected with
AT^SM20. See notes and example given in Chapter 2.5
<CmgwMode>
Reference
Response mode for sending and writing short messages
(numeric).
Applies to the commands AT+CMGS and AT+CMGW command. See also Chapters 5.6 and 5.7 for more details.
0
Set compatibility to Siemens mobile phones.
ME will return +CMS ERROR: <err> when writing or
sending of short messages fails. See Chapter 8.1.2 for a
list of result codes.
1
Default mode for sending and writing short messages,
compatible to M20.
ME will return “OK”, no matter whether or not AT+CMGS
or AT+CMGW was successfully executed.
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 205 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.18 AT^SMGL List SMS messages from preferred storage
Test command
Response
AT^SMGL=?
See command AT+CMGL
Parameters
See command AT+CMGL
Execute/Write command
AT^SMGL
[=<stat>]
Response
TA returns messages with status value <stat> from message storage <mem1>
to the TE. The status of the messages is u n c h a n g e d (unread remains unread).
Otherwise: See command AT+CMGL
Parameters
See command AT+CMGL
Reference
Note
Siemens
· This command can be used only after the SMS data from the SIM have
been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful SIM
authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30 seconds depending on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt to
use any of the sms read commands will result in "+CME Error: 14" (SIM
busy).
· See Chapter 5.4 for AT+CMGL.
· See also GSM 07.05: AT+CMGL
7.19 AT^SMGR Read SMS message without set to REC READ
Test command
Response
AT^SMGR=?
OK
Execute command
Parameter
AT^SMGR=
<index>
See command AT+CMGR
Reference
Note
GSM 07.05
· The AT^SMGR command is a specific Siemens command with the same
syntax as “AT+CMGR Read SMS message”. The only difference is that the
status “REC_UNREAD” of a short message is not overwritten to
“REC_READ”.
· This command can be used only after the SMS data from the SIM have
been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful SIM
authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30 seconds depending on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt to
use any of the sms read commands will result in "+CME Error: 14" (SIM
busy).
· See Chapter 5.5 for AT+CMGR.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 206 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.20 AT^SMGO Set or query SMS overflow presentation mode or query SMS
overflow
Test command
Response
AT^SMGO=?
^SMGO: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SMGO?
TA returns overflow presentation mode and SMS overflow status
^SMGO: <n>,<mode> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT^SMGO=<n> TA sets overflow presentation mode
OK
Parameter
<n>
<mode>
SMS overflow presentation mode
[0]
disable
1
enable
SMS overflow status
0
space available
1
SMS buffer full (buffer for received short messages is <mem3>.
See AT+CPMS in Chapter 5.11.
2
Buffer full and new message waiting in SC for delivery to ME
Unsolicited result code
When the SIM overflow status changes, a URC is sent to TE.
^SMGO: <mode>
Parameter
See write command
Reference
Note
Siemens
· Indication during data transfer via break (100 ms). This requires a correct setting for SMS indications (AT+CNMI=3,1; see Chapter 5.10).
· Incoming Class 1 short messages (ME specific) will be preferably stored to
“ME” and may be transferred to the “SM” storage if “ME” is used up. Incoming
Class 2 messages (SIM specific) will be placed to the “SM” storage only.
If messages with different classes are received, the ^SMGO: 2 indication may
be presented, without prior indication of ^SMGO: 1. The indication ^SMGO: 1
means that both buffers ("ME" and "SM") are full. See also Chapter 5.11.
· For more information regarding SIM and ME specific message classes refer to
<dcs> and the following specifications: GSM 03.38 and 3GPP TS 23.038.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 207 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.21 AT^SMONC Cell Monitoring
Test command
Response
AT^SMONC=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT^SMONC
^SMONC: <MCC>1 , <MNC>1 , <LAC>1 , <cell>1 , <BSIC>1 , <chann>1 ,
<RSSI>1 , <C1>1 , <C2>1 , <MCC>2 , <MNC>2 , <LAC>2 , <cell>2 , <BSIC>2 ,
<chann>2 , <RSSI>2 , <C1>2 , <C2>2 , ...
OK / If error is related to ME functionality: +CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
Example (response)
The output contains 9 values from a maximum of 7 base stations. The first base
station is the serving cell.
Values for one base station in output order:
MCC
Mobile country code, 3 decimal digits, e.g. 232
Value 000: not decoded
MNC
Mobile network code, 2 or 3 decimal digits, e.g. 03
Value 000: not decoded
LAC
Location area code, 4 hexadecimal digits, e.g. 3010
Value 0000: not decoded
cell
Cell ID, 4 hexadecimal digits, e.g. 4EAF
Value 0000: not decoded
BSIC
Base station identity code, 2 decimal digits, e.g. 32
Value 00: not decoded
chann
ARFCN (Absolute Frequency Channel Number) of the BCCH carrier,
decimal, e.g. 82.
Value 0: not decoded. In this case, all remaining parameters related
to the same channel are neither decoded. For example, a nonexisting cell appears as follows: 000,000,0000,0000,00,0,0,-,RSSI
Received signal level of the BCCH carrier, decimal value from
0 to 63.
The indicated value is composed of the measured value in dBm plus
an offset. This is in accordance with a formula specified in 3GPP TS
05.08.
C1
Coefficient for base station reselection, decimal, e.g. 30
C2
Coefficient for base station reselection, decimal, e.g. 30
AT^SMONC
^SMONC: 232,03,3010,4EAF,32,82,38,30,30,232,03,3010,0000,36,
88,26,18,18,232,03,3010,4EC3,32,112,23,15,15,232,03,3010,4BD
A,34,90,17,9,9,232,03,3010,0000,32,99,15,7,7,232,03,2010,00C
0,35,113,9,1,1,232,03,3520,0000,32,85,8,0,0
Reference
Note
Siemens
· In dedicated mode, under certain conditions the parameters C1 and C2 cannot be updated. In such cases, a ‘-‘ is presented for C1 and C2.
· To some extent, the cell monitoring commands AT^MONI, AT^MONP and
AT^SMONC cover the same parameters. The receiving level, for example,
can be queried with all three commands. Yet the resulting values may be
slightly different, even though obtained over a time period of a few seconds.
This is quite normal and nothing to worry about, as the cell information is
permanently updated.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 208 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.22 AT^SMOND Selective cell monitoring
Cell information can be issued in the form of periodic outputs (depending on <period> set with the
Write command), or it can be queried directly using the Execute command.
Test command
Response
AT^SMOND=?
OK
This command can be used to obtain complete cell information once on request. The response format is identical to the response received for a write
command with <format>=15. See examples below for a sample output string.
Execute command
AT^SMOND
Response
^SMOND: [ <sci>][, <nci>][, <TA>][, <rssiber><CR><LF>]
OK
CME ERROR
Write command
AT^SMOND=
<period>,[format]
The write command can be used to obtain selected cell information automatically every <period> seconds. Output will pause for the specified number of
seconds after each output line. The cell or set of cells to be examined and the
information to be retrieved can be specified by means of parameter <format>.
During the performance of the write command, the serial interface or multiplexer channel, on which the write command is running, is blocked. The write
command terminates when any character is sent to the serial port (or multiplex
channel) running the command.
Response
^SMOND: <celldata>[CR><LF>
^SMOND: <celldata>[CR><LF>
[…]]]
OK
Parameters
<format>
(numeric)
Integer or sum of integers each representing a class of requested
information, i.e. a group of output values. Parameter format can be
determined by summing up the values for each of the requested
classes of information. The possible values and their associated
information are listed below. Value 0 is not allowed. The default
value and the maximum value are 15, representing the sum of all
possible class values, leading to the output of all available information.
1
Include <sci> in response string <celldata>
2
Include <nci> in response string <celldata>
4
Include <TA> in response string <celldata>
8
Include <rssiber> in response string <celldata>
<period>
(numeric)
1 – 254
<celldata>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Display period n in seconds, i.e. the period to wait before the next output of <celldata>.
(string)
A list of values describing the current radio environment of the
module. The information to be included in the response string can
be selected using parameter <format>. All values are commaseparated with no <CR> or <LF> included in the response string.
Possible groups of information are (in order of output): <sci>,
<nci>, <TA> and <rssiber>.
Page 209 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
<sci>
(string)
Serving cell information (comma-separated, no cr/lf included):
<MCC>, <MNC>, <LAC>, <cell>, <BSIC>, <chann>, <RxLev>,
<RxLev>Full, <RxLev>Sub, <RxQual>, <RxQual>Full,
<RxQual>Sub, <Timeslot>
If no serving cell is found, unavailable values are omitted:
” ,,,,,, <RxLev>,,,0,,,0”
<nci>
(string)
Neighbour cell information for neighbour cell 1 through 6 (commaseparated, no cr/lf included):
<MCC>1, <MNC>1, <LAC>1, <cell>1, <BSIC>1, <chann>1,
<RxLev>1, (these parameters repeated for neighbour cells 2
through 6 with no CR/LF): ... <MCC>6, <MNC>6, <LAC>6, <cell>6,
<BSIC>6, <chann>6, <RxLev>6
An unavailable cell appears as follows: ” ,,,,,,0”
<rssiber>
(string)
Values for RSSI and BER (comma-separated, no cr/lf included)
<RSSI>, <BER> where
RSSI Receive level:
0
-113 dBm or less
1
-111 dBm
2...30
-109... -53 dBm
31
-51 dBm or greater
99
not known or not detectable
BER Bit error rate:
0...7
as RXQUAL values in the table in GSM 05.08
section 8.2.4
99
not known or not detectable
<MCC>
(numeric)
Mobile Country Code
3 digits, e.g. 232
000 not decoded
<MNC>
(numeric)
Mobile Network Code
3 digits, e.g. 003
000 not decoded
<LAC>
(numeric)
Location Area Code
4 digits, e.g. 3010
0000 not decoded
<cell>
(numeric)
Cell identifier
4 hexadecimal digits, e.g. 4EAF
0000 not decoded
<BSIC>
(numeric)
Base station identity code
2 digits, e.g. 32
00
not decoded
<chann>
(numeric)
“ARFCN” Absolute Radion Frequency Channel
<RxLev>
(numeric)
Receiving signal level in dBm
<RxQual>
(numeric)
Received signal quality as defined in GSM 05.08
Page 210 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<Timeslot> (numeric) Assigned timeslot. If mobile is in idle mode, timeslot 0
(BCCH timeslot) will be indicated.
0 ... 8 assigned timeslot 0 (BCCH timeslot) in IDLE mode
<TA>
(numeric)
Timing Advance for the serving cell, in bits.
<RSSI> (numeric)
Receive Level, with value 99 indicating ”not known or not detectable”
0 ... 31 signifying the RSSI range from -113dBm or less (”0”)
to -51dBm or greater (”31”) in steps of -2dBm
(e.g. ”1” = -111 dBm, ”2” = -109 dBm ..., ”30” = -53dBm)
<BER>
(numeric)
Bit Error rate, with value 99 indicating ”not known or not detectable”
0 ... 7
as RXQUAL values RXQUAL0 to RXQUAL7 in GSM 05.08
section 8.2.4
Reference
Notes
Siemens
· To some extent, the cell monitoring commands AT^SMOND , AT^MONI ,
AT^MONP and AT^SMONC cover the same parameters. The receiving
level, for example, can be queried with all three commands. Yet the resulting
values may be slightly di_erent, even though obtained over a time period of
a few seconds. This is quite normal and nothing to worry about, as the cell
information is permanently updated.
· During a connection, not all of the neighbour cell information can be decoded. The following restrictions apply:
- Information is updated only for neighbour cells that have already been
visible at connection setup, and continue to be included in the list of cells.
- New neighbour cells added to the list, for example after handover, cannot
be displayed until the connection is released.
· Parameters not available or invalid are left out. In this case, two consecutive
commas are presented. For example, if <format> equals 1, the resulting response with parameter <cell> unavailable would read:
^SMOND: <MCC>, <MNC>, <LAC>, <BSIC>, <chann>, <RxLev>,
<RxLev>Full, <RxLev>Sub, <RxQual>, <RxQual>Full, <RxQual>Sub,
<Timeslot><CR><LF>
· Parameter sets not requested with input parameter <format> will be left out
altogether. For example, the response for <format> = 12 will read:
^SMOND: <TA>, <RSSI>, <BER><CR><LF>
Examples
atˆsmond
ˆSMOND:262,01,3008,6060,32,100,66,,,0,,,0,
Execute command
Response as for write
command with <format>=15
(Line breaks inserted for
readability in print)
262,01,3008,DDD1,35,92,80,
262,01,3008,,31,96,83,
262,01,3008,BFBE,35,27,86,
262,01,3008,,32,98,88,
262,01,3008,BB44,32,90,89,
262,01,3008,8307,31,22,93,
2,23,99
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 211 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.23 AT^SMSO Switch off mobile station
Test command
Response
AT^SMSO=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT^SMSO
^SMSO: MS OFF
OK
After this response, the power-off procedure will start. The low level of the
module’s VDD pin verifies that the procedure has completed and the module
has entered the POWER DOWN mode. Therefore, be sure not to disconnect
the operating voltage until VDD is low. Otherwise, you run the risk of losing
data. For further details on how to turn off the module see [1].
If you are using the TC35i Terminal, where the module’s VDD pin is not accessible, you are required to wait 10s after sending AT^SMSO before switching off
the power supply at the PLUS pin of the TC35i Terminal. This time is needed to
safely log off from the network and finish saving to the internal memory. For further details see [2].
Reference
Note
Siemens
Do not send any further AT command after AT^SMSO.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 212 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.24 AT^SNFA Set or query microphone attenuation
Test command
Response
AT^SNFA=?
^SNFA: (list of supported <atten>s)
Parameter
See read command
Read command
Response
AT^SNFA?
TA returns the current attenuation value on the microphone path for the current
audio device (selected with AT^SNFS, see section 7.31).
^SNFA: <atten> OK
<atten>
Integer type value. Range: 0 – 65535.
Multiplication factor for input samples. Parameter <atten> is identical
with <inCalibrate> of AT^SNFI.
Formula used to calculate microphone attenuation (negative gain):
Gain in dB = 20 * log(<atten>/32768)
0
=
32767 =
Write command
AT^SNFA=
<atten>
Microphone is muted.
No attenuation on the microphone path. Values
greater than 32767 are not used.
TA controls the large-scale attenuation on the microphone path for the current audio device (selected with AT^SNFS, see 7.31) with the following restrictions:
· It is not allowed for audio device 1.
· As long as the microphone is muted, the write command is temporarily disabled.
· Setting of value 0 is not allowed (use AT^SNFM=0 for this; see section 7.28).
· For values greater than 32767, 32767 will be used.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See read command
Reference
Note
· The command is provided for compatibility with M20 and is a subset to
AT^SNFI (see Chapter 7.27) The parameter <inCalibrate> of AT+SNFI is identical with <atten> of AT^SNFA.
· To make the changes persistent use AT^SNFW (see Chapter 7.33). To restore
factory defaults use AT^SNFD (see Chapter 7.26).
· The write command works only in audio modes 2 to 6.
· Command does not require a PIN.
Examples
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
^SYSSTART
at^snfa=?
^SNFA: (0-65535)
OK
at^snfa?
Page 213 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
^SNFA: 32767
OK
at^snfs=4
OK
at^snfa=1
OK
at^snfa?
^SNFA: 1
OK
at^snfi?
^SNFI: 5,1
OK
at^snfi=5,45
OK
at^snfa?
^SNFA: 45
OK
7.25 Audio programming model
The following figure illustrates how the signal path can be adjusted with the AT command parameters
described in the Chapters 7.24 to 7.33.
The programming model is the same for all three interfaces, except for the parameters <outBbcGain>
and <inBbcGain> which cannot be modified if the digital audio interface is being used, since in this
case the DAC is switched off.
The parameters inBbcGain and inCalibrate can be set with AT^SNFI. All the other parameters are adjusted with AT^SNFO.
2,65V
1k
MIC2
inCalibrate
1k
-¥...0dB
A
10uF
1k
1k
D
inBbcGain
Speech coder
+0...42dB in 6dB steps
sideTone
D
A
outBbcGain
0dB; -6db, -12dB; -18dB
+
Speech decoder
outCalibrate[n]
n = 0...4
AT parameters
Figure 1: AT audio programming model
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 214 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.26 AT^SNFD Set audio parameters to manufacturer default values
Execute command
AT^SNFD
TA resets the parameters currently selected in audio modes 2 – 6 to their
factory values.
The restored values are:
AT^SNFI:
<inBbcGain>, <inCalibrate> (or the equivalent AT^SNFA
parameters)
AT^SNFO:
<outBbcGain>, <outCalibrate[0]> ... <outCalibrate[4]>,
<side Tone>
AT^SAIC:
<io>,<mic>,<ep>
<outStep> is not reset to its default. Instead, the current value will be retained when the ME is powered down with AT^SMSO or restarted with
AT+CFUN=1,1.
Response
OK
Reference
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 215 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.27 AT^SNFI Set microphone path parameters
Test command
Response
AT^SNFI=?
^SNFI: (list of supported <inBbcGain>s), (list of supported <inCalibrate>s) OK
Parameters
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SNFI?
^SNFI: < inBbcGain >, <inCalibrate> OK
Parameters
See write command
Write command
Response
AT^SNFI=<inBbcGain>,
<inCalibrate>
TA sets microphone path amplifying.
OK
Parameters
<inBbcGain>
ADC gain adjustable in eight 6 dB steps from 0 dB to
42 dB:
0 - 7 (where 0 = 0 dB and 7 = 42 dB)
<inCalibrate>
Multiplication factor for input samples:
0 – 32767
Formula to calculate the negative gain (attenuation) of
the input signal:
Gain in dB = 20 * log (inCalibrate / 32768)
Reference
Note
Siemens
· The read and write commands refer to the active audio mode.
· The write command works only in audio modes 2 to 6.
· The range of <inCalibrate> is up to 65535 but will be suppressed to
32767. Values above <inCalibrate> = 65535 will cause a failure.
· Changed values need to be stored with AT^SNFW for use after restart. To restore factory defaults use AT^SNFD.
· Caution: When you adjust the audio parameters avoid exceeding the
maximum allowed level. Bear in mind that exposure to excessive levels of noise can cause physical damage to users.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 216 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.28 AT^SNFM Mute microphone
Test command
Response
AT^SNFM=?
^SNFM: (list of supported <mute>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
AT^SNFM?
The read command returns whether the microphone is on or off. It can be
used no matter whether or not a voice call is in progress.
Response
^SNFM: <mute> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFM=<mute>
The write command serves to switch on or off the microphone input. The
command can be used in all audio modes (1 to 6), but is allowed only
during a voice call.
Response
OK
Parameter
<mute>
0 Mute microphone
1 Microphone on
Reference
Note
Siemens
During a voice call, users should be aware that when they switch back
and forth between different audio modes (for example handsfree on/off)
the value of <mute> does not change. This means that the status of mute
operaton is retained until explicitly changed.
As an alternative, you can use the AT+CMUT command described in
Chapter 4.27.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 217 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.29 AT^SNFO Set audio output (= loudspeaker path) parameter
Test command
Response
AT^SNFO=?
^SNFO: (list of supported <outBbcGain>s) (list of supported <outCalibrate>s) (list of supported <outStep>s) (list of supported <sideTone>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SNFO?
^SNFO: <outBbcGain>, <outCalibrate[0]>,...<outCalibrate[4]>, <outStep>,
<sideTone>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFO=
<outBbcGain>,
<outCalibrate[0]>,
...<outCalibrate[4]>,
<outStep>,<sideTone>
Set TA's loudspeaker path parameters.
Response
OK
Parameters
<outBbcGain>
Negative DAC gain (attenuation) adjustable in four 6 dB
steps from 0 dB to -18 dB:
0 – 3 (where 0 = 0 dB and 3 = -18 dB)
<outCalibrate[0]> ... <outCalibrate[4]>
Multiplication factor for output samples:
0 - 32767
Formula to calculate the value of the 5 volume steps
selectable with parameter <outstep>:
Gain in dB = 20 * log (2 * outCalibrate[n] / 32768).
<outStep>
Volume steps 0 – 4, each defined with
<outCalibrate[n]>
<sideTone>
Multiplication factor for the sidetone gain:
0 to 32767
Formula to calculate how much of the original
microphone signal is added to the earpiece signal:
Sidetone gain in dB = 20 * log (sideTone / 32768).
Reference
Note
Siemens
· The read and write commands refer to the active audio mode.
· The write command works only in audio modes 2 to 6.
· <outCalibrate> specifies the amount of volume of each <outStep>. The
range of <outCalibrate> is up to 65535, but will be suppressed to
32767. A value above <outCalibrate> = 65535 will cause an error.
· The range of <sideTone> is up to 65535, but will be suppressed to
32767. A value above <sideTone> = 65535 will cause an error.
· Any change to <outStep> takes effect in audio modes 2 to 6. That is,
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 218 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
when you change <outStep> and then select another mode with
AT^SNFS, the same step will be applied. Nevertheless, the sound quality and the amount of volume are not necessarily the same, since all
remaining audio parameters can use different values in either mode.
Audio mode 1 is fixed to <outStep>=4.
· The value of <outStep> is stored non-volatile when the ME is powered
down with AT^SMSO or reset with AT+CFUN=1,1. Any other parameters changed with AT^SNFO need to be saved with AT^SNFW for use
after restart. See also AT^SNFD for details on restoring factory defaults.
· Caution: When you adjust audio parameters avoid exceeding the maximum allowed level. Bear in mind that exposure to excessive levels of
noise can cause physical damage to users!
· <outStep> can also be selected with AT^SNFV (see Chapter 7.32) and
AT+CLVL (see Chapter 4.24).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 219 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.30 AT^SNFPT Call progress tones
Test command
Response
AT^SNFPT =?
^SNFPT: (list of supported <pt>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SNFPT?
^SNFPT: <pt> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFPT=
<pt>
The write command controls the Call Progress Tones generated at the beginning
of a mobile originated call setup.
Response
OK
Parameter
<pt>:
0
1
Call Progress Tones off
Call Progress Tones on (audible tones shortly heard on the
phone when ME starts to set up a call).
Please note that the setting is stored volatile, i.e. after restart or reset, the default
value 1 will be restored. Also, there is no way to store AT^SNFPT to the user defined profile.
Reference
Note
Siemens
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 220 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.31 AT^SNFS Select audio hardware set
Test command
Response
AT^SNFS=?
^SNFS: (list of supported <audMode>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SNFS?
^SNFS: <audMode> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SNFS=
<audMode>
The write command serves to set the audio mode required for the connected
equipment. For use after restart of TC35i, you are advised to store the selected
mode to the audio profile set with AT^SNFW. Otherwise, audio mode 1 will be active each time TC35i is powered up.
AT^SNFS can also be used in conjunction with AT^SAIC. This is useful, for example, if both interfaces are operated alternatively to benefit from different devices.
Each audio mode can be assigned a specific interface. To do so, first select the
audio mode with AT^SNFS, then activate the audio interface with AT^SAIC and finally enter AT^SNFW to store the settings to your audio profile. To switch back
and forth it is sufficient to use AT^SNFS. See Chapters 7.5 for AT^SAIC and 7.33
for AT^SNFW.
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+ CME ERROR: <error>
Parameters
<audMode> 1
Audio mode 1: Standard mode optimized for the default handset, that can be connected to the analog interface 1 (see [1]
and for information on this handset.) To adjust the volume use
the knob of the default handset. In audio mode 4 and 5, this
handset can be used with user defined parameters.
Note: The default parameters are determined for type approval
and are not adjustable with AT commands.
2
Audio mode 2: Customer specific mode for a basic handsfree
device (Siemens Car Kit Portable).
Analog interface 2 is assumed as default.
3
Audio mode 3: Customer specific mode for a mono-headset.
Analog interface 2 is assumed as default.
4
Audio mode 4: Customer specific mode for a user handset.
Analog interface 1 is assumed as default.
5
Audio mode 5: Customer specific mode.
Analog interface 1 is assumed as default.
6
Audio mode 6: Customer specific mode.
Analog interface 2 is assumed as default.
In modes 2 – 6, audio parameters can be adjusted with AT commands.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 221 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Reference
Note
Siemens
The write command can be used during a voice call to switch back and forth between different modes. This allows the user, for example, to switch handsfree
operation on and off.
Users should be aware that <outStep> is a global setting, i.e. when selecting another audio mode the value of <outStep> does not change. This is also true for
mute operation which can be set with AT^SNFM or AT+CMUT: If the microphone
is muted and the user changes to another audio mode then the microphone remains muted until explicitly changed. Exception: In audio mode 1 <outStep>=4 is
fix.
Example 1
Suppose a user wishes to use alternatively a handsfree device and a handset. The
handset can be connected to the first analog interface and adjusted to audio mode
4. The handsfree device can be attached to the second analog interface and adjusted to audio mode 2.
Settings for the handset:
at^snfs=4
OK
at^saic?
Factory default of AT^SAIC assigned to audio mode 4.
^SAIC: 2,1,1
Settings for the handsfree device:
at^snfs=2
OK
at^saic?
^SAIC: 2,2,2
Factory default of AT^SAIC assigned to audio mode 2.
To store the configuration to the user defined audio profile:
at^snfw
Stores the audio mode and the interface.
OK
To switch back and forth:
at^snfs=4
Switches to the handset connected to analog interface 1.
OK
at^snfs=2
Switches to the handsfree device at analog interface 2.
Example 2
The following example illustrates a combination of a handset and a handsfree device connected to other interfaces than those assumed as factory default.
Settings for a handset connected to the second analog interface and adjusted to
audio mode 4:
at^snfs=4
OK
at^saic=2,2,2
Settings for a handsfree device connected to the first analog interface and adjusted to audio mode 2:
at^snfs=2
ok
at^saic=2,1,1
OK
To store the configuration to the user defined audio profile:
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 222 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
at^snfw
OK
Stores the audio mode and the interface.
To switch back and forth:
at^snfs=4
Switches to the handset at analog interface 2.
OK
at^snfs=2
Switches to the handsfree device at analog interface 1.
OK
Example 3
To configure TC35i Terminal for handsfree operation:
(TC35i Terminal only)
First, select audio mode 2 (especially designed for handsfree devices):
at^snfs=2
OK
at^saic?
Queries the current audio interface settings.
^SAIC: 2,2,2
The factory default of AT^SAIC automatically assigned to
audio mode 2 cannot be used with TC35i Terminal since
nd
the 2 audio interface is not connected. Therefore, the
default setting needs to be changed as follows:
st
AT^SAIC=2,1,1
Allocates the 1 audio interface to the selected audio
ok
mode 2.
Now, store the current configuration to the user defined audio profile:
at^snfw
Stores the selected audio mode and the selected interface.
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 223 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.32 AT^SNFV Set loudspeaker volume
Test command
Response
AT^SNFV=?
The test command returns the supported value of the parameter <outStep>.
^SNFV: (list of supported <outStep>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SNFV?
The read command returns the current value of the parameter <outStep>.
^SNFV: <outStep>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT^SNFV=<out
Step>
TA sets the volume of the loudspeaker to the value <outCalibrate> addressed by
<outStep>.
OK
Parameter
<outStep>
Volume steps 0 to 4. In each audio mode, factory default is 4.
The actual volume of each step is defined by the parameter <outCalibrate[n]> which can be set with AT^SNFO.
Reference
Note
Siemens
· The read and write commands refer to the active audio mode.
· The write command works only in audio modes 2 to 6.
· Any change to <outStep> takes effect in audio modes 2 to 6. That is, when you
change <outStep> and then select another mode with AT^SNFS, the same step
will be applied. Nevertheless, the actual volume can be quite different, depending on the values of <outCalibrate[n]> set in each mode.
The only exception is audio mode 1 which is fixed to <outStep>=4.
· <outStep> is stored non-volatile when the ME is powered down with AT^SMSO
or reset with AT+CFUN=1,1. It is not stored with AT^SNFW.
· <outStep> can also be changed with AT^SNFO (Chapter 7.29) and AT+CLVL
(Chapter 4.24).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 224 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.33 AT^SNFW Write audio setting in non-volatile store
Test command
Response
AT^SNFW=?
OK
Execute command
TA writes the parameters currently selected in audio modes 2 – 6 to the nonvolatile store.
AT^SNFW
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+ CME ERROR: <error>
<error> Memory failure: Can´t write to storage device.
Reference
Note
Siemens
· Execute command works only in audio mode 2 to 6.
· The audio profile saved with AT^SNFW includes the following parameters:
AT^SNFI: <inBbcGain>, <inCalibrate> (or the equivalent AT^SNFA parameters)
AT^SNFO: <outBbcGain>, <outCalibrate[0]> ... <outCalibrate[4]>, <side Tone>
AT^SAIC: <io>,<mic>,<ep>
AT^SNFS: <audMode>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 225 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.34 AT^SPBC Search the first entry in the sorted telephone book
This command searches the active phone book for the index of the first entry that matches the character specified with <schar>. The sort order follows the algorithm described in Chapter 8.6.
CAUTION: Please note that the sorted entries are assigned an index of their own which is not identical with the location numbers used in the various phonebooks. Therefore, the index retrieved with
the ATˆSPBC command can be used only as an index for AT^SPBG. Do not use the listed index
numbers to dial out or modify entries.
Test command
AT^SPBC=?
The test command returns a list of phone books that can be searched through
with AT^SBPC.
Response
^SPBC: (list of supported <storage>s)
^SPBC: ”FD”,”SM”,”ME”
OK
ERROR / +CME ERROR
Write command
Parameter
AT^SPBC=
<schar>
<schar>
First character of searched entry. Character coding and formatting
according to the settings made with AT+CSCS.
<index>
In the active phone book, the first (lowest) index of an entry beginning with <schar> within its parameter <text>.
If no matching entry has been found <index>=0 will be returned.
Response
^SPBC: <index>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Reference
Note
Siemens
· There is no difference between small and capital letters.
· The index numbers are identical with those displayed by AT^SPBG and are
intended for reading only (see further explanations in Chapter 7.36).
· The minimum valid phone book index for AT^SPBG is 1.
· The AT^SPBC command can be used only after the phonebook data from
the SIM have been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after
successful SIM authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30
seconds depending on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress,
an attempt to use any of the phonebook commands will result in ”+CME Error: 14” (SIM busy).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 226 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.35 AT^SPBD Delete the given phone book
This command is used to purge the selected phonebook <storage>manually, i.e. all entries previously stored in the selected phonebook storage will be deleted.
CAUTION! The operation cannot be stopped nor reversed!
An automatic purge of the phonebooks is performed when the SIM card is removed and replaced
with a dfferent SIM card. This affects the ME based part of the ”LD” storage, and storages ”MC” and
”RC”. Storage ”ME” is not affected.
In order to delete all entries stored in ”FD” phonebook, PIN2 authentication must be performed first.
Test command
Response
AT^SPBD=?
^SPBD: (list of supported <str>s)
OK
Write command
The write command deletes all numbers stored in the <str> phone book.
AT^SPBD=<str>
Response
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
<str>
Phone book to be deleted
"SM"
SIM phone book
“FD”
SIM fixed-dialing phone book
"LD"
Last dialed numbers list. This storage is located
partly on SIM (depending on SIM card used),
partly in ME.
“MC”
Missed (unanswered received) calls in ME.
“RC”
Received calls list in ME
"ON"
Own numbers (MSISDN) phone book
"ME"
ME Phone book
Reference
Note
Siemens
· See Chapter 4.33 for further information on the “SM”, “FD”, “LD”, “MC”, “RC”,
“ON”, “ME” phonebooks. Details on the Blacklist can be found in Chapter 2.5.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 227 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.36 AT^SPBG Read entry from active telephone book via sorted index
This command sorts the active phone book records by name, in alphabetical order. Please note that
the alphabetical order is assigned an index of its own which is not identical with the location numbers used in the various phone books.
CAUTION: The AT^SPBG command is intended for reading only. For example, it helps you find entries starting with matching characters. However, do not use the listed index numbers to dial out or
modify entries.
Test command
AT^SPBG=?
The test command returns the index range supported by the current storage, the
maximum length of <number> field, and the maximum length of <text> field.
Note: The length may not be available while SIM storage is selected. If storage
does not offer format information, the format list should be empty parenthesises.
Response
^SPBG: (1-<maxindex), <nlength>, <tlength>
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Write command
AT^SPBG=
<index1>
[,<index2>]
The Write command selects the index or range of indices of the phonebook entries to be displayed.
If no <index2> is given, only the entry at <index1> will be displayed. The sorted
index always starts with 1, referring to the entry whose <text> comes first in the
sorted list. Consequentially, the highest index corresponds to the number of currently used entries in the selected phonebook.
Response
^SPBG: <index1>, <number>, <type>, <text>[<CR><LF>
^SPBG: .....
^SPBG: <index2>, <number>, <type>, <text> ]
OK/ERROR/+CME ERROR
Parameter
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
<index1>
(numeric)
The first (lowest) index number within phonebook memory for
which the corresponding entry is to be displayed. The supported
range is given in the test command response.
If <index 1> exceeds the upper bound <maxindex> (as indicated
by the test command), the AT command will return a CME ERROR
21.
<index2>
(numeric)
The last (highest) index number within phonebook memory for
which the corresponding entry is to be displayed. The supported
range is given in the test command response.
If both <index1> and <index 2> are used the following behaviour
applies:
If both <index1> and <index 2> are in the range indicated by the
test command in parameter <maxindex>, the list of entries will be
output and terminated with OK.
If <index 2> exceeds the range indicated by the test command in
parameter <maxindex>, the list of entries will be output but terminated with a +CME error 21 ”invalid index”.
Page 228 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<number>
(string)
String type phone number in format specified by <type>. The number parameter may be an empty string.
<type>
(numeric)
Type of address octet
145 Dialing string <number>includes international access code
character ’+’
209 Dialing string <number>contains printable non-alphabetic nondigit characters saved with the number string. For further detail, check the parameter descriptions for at command
AT+CPBW .
129 Otherwise
<text>
(string)
Text assigned to the phone number. The maximum length of this
parameter is given in test command response <tlength>. The text
string is returned in the character set and format as specified with
AT+CSCS.
<maxindex>
(numeric)
Max. index for the currently selected storage. Since it indicates the
maximum index in a sorted list, <maxindex> will always be equal
to the actual number of entries currently used in the phonebook.
<nlength>
(numeric)
Max. length of phone number for ”normal” locations. Depending on
the storage, a limited number of locations with extended memory
is available per phonebook. Please refer to AT command
AT+CPBW for detail.
<tlength>
(numeric)
Max. length of <text>assigned to the telephone number.
Reference
Note
Siemens
· The command can be used for the ME, SM and FD phone books.
· The AT^SPBG feature is able to sort by the first 6 matching characters only.
All the following characters will be ignored.
· This command can be used only after the phone book data from the SIM have
been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful SIM
authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30 seconds depending on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt to use
any of the phone book commands will result in “+CME Error: 14” (SIM busy).
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 229 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Example
1. First, run the Test command to find out the range of phone book entries stored
in the active phone book:
AT^SPBG=?
TA returns the number of entries in the format: ^SPBG: (1-33),20,17 where 33
is the total number of entries.
2. Now, run the Write command to display the phone book entries by alphabetical order. It is recommended to enter the full range to obtain best results.
AT^SPBG=1,33
TA returns phone book entries by alphabetical order:
^SPBG: 1,"+999999",145,"Arthur"
^SPBG: 2,"+777777",145,"Bill"
^SPBG: 3,"+888888",145,"Charlie" .........
The numbers at the beginning of each line are not the memory locations in the
phone book, but only serial numbers assigned to the alphabetical list.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 230 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.37 AT^SPBS Step through the selected phone book alphabetically
This command can be used to flick through the active phone book records in alphabetical order by
name. Please note that the alphabetical order is assigned an index of its own which is not identical
with the location numbers used in the various phone books.
CAUTION: The AT^SPBS command is intended for reading only. For example, it helps you find entries starting with matching characters. However, do not use the listed index numbers to dial out or
modify entries.
Test command
Response
AT^SPBS=?
^SPBS: (list of supported <value>s)
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SPBS=
<value>
Every time the write command is executed, 3 rows of phone book records are returned. Each triplet overlaps with the next one, i.e. the last two records of the preceding triplet will be presented on top of the next one. The parameter <value> determines whether the index increases or decreases. After the last record of the
phone book (<maxindex> of the AT^SPBG command) has been reached, the internal counter switches over to the first. See examples below.
The command allows the user to scroll sequentially through the phone book. To
quickly reset the internal counter it is recommended to use the commands ATZ or
AT&F. If you do so, take into account that other settings will be reset, too. See
Chapters 2.32 and 2.35 for details.
Response
^SPBS: <index a>,<number>,<type>,<text>
^SPBS: <index b>,<number>,<type>,<text>
^SPBS: <index c>,<number>,<type>,<text>
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameters
<value>
1
2
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
To make a step forward in the alphabetically sorted phone
book (increment the index for the first output line: <index1> =
internal counter + 1)
To make a step backward in the alphabetically sorted phone
book (index1 = internal counter – 1)
<index a>
Index in the sorted list of phonebook records that identifies the first
entry displayed.
1… maxindex
The value of <index a> is determined by the
value of the internal counter and by parameter
<value>.
<index b>
Index in the sorted list of phonebook records that identifies the
second entry displayed.
1… maxindex
<index b>=(<index a>+1)
<index c>
Index in the sorted list of phonebook records that identifies the third
entry displayed.
1… maxindex
<index c>=(<index b>+1)
Page 231 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<number>
(string)
String type phone number in format specified by <type>. The number parameter may be an empty string.
<type>
(numeric)
Type of address octet
145 Dialing string <number>includes international access code
character ’+’
209 Dialing string <number>contains printable non-alphabetic nondigit characters saved with the number string. For further detail, check the parameter descriptions for at command
AT+CPBW .
129 Otherwise
<text>
(string)
Text assigned to the phone number. The maximum length of this
parameter is given in test command response <tlength>. The text
string is returned in the character set and format as specified with
AT+CSCS.
Reference
Note
Siemens
· The command can be used for the ME, SM and FD phone book.
· The command can be used only after the phone book data from the SIM have
been read successfully for the first time. Reading starts after successful SIM
authentication has been performed, and may take up to 30 seconds depending on the SIM used. While the read process is in progress, an attempt to use
any of the phone book commands will result in “+CME Error: 14” (SIM busy).
Example 1
First, AT&F is issued to make sure that AT^SPBS=1 starts from the first character
in alphabetical order. The example illustrates how to search down and up again.
at&f
Reset internal counter to 0.
OK
at^spbs=1
^SPBS: 1,"01799999999",129,"Charly"
^SPBS: 2,"+49175555555",145,"Dave"
^SPBS: 3,"+49177222222",145,"Esther"
OK
at^spbs=1
^SPBS: 2,"+49175555555",145,"Dave"
^SPBS: 3,"+49177222222",145,"Esther"
^SPBS: 4,"0304444444",129,"Gilbert"
OK
at^spbs=1
^SPBS: 3,"+49177222222",145,"Esther"
^SPBS: 4,"0304444444",129,"Gilbert"
^SPBS: 5,"03033333333",129,"Harry"
OK
at^spbs=2
^SPBS: 2,"+49175555555",145,"Dave"
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 232 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
^SPBS: 3,"+49177222222",145,"Esther"
^SPBS: 4,"0304444444",129,"Gilbert"
OK
Example 2
If the last record in the sorted list has been reached, then the internal counter
overflows to the first index:
at^spbs=1
^SPBS: 33,"+49301234567",145,"Tom Tailor"
^SPBS: 1,"01799999999",129,"Charly"
^SPBS: 2,"+49175555555",145,"Dave"
OK
Example 3
After resetting the internal counter to zero (using AT&F), AT^SPBS=2 takes you
to the <maxindex> of AT^SPBG and overflows to the first index.
at&f
OK
Reset internal counter to 0.
at^spbs=2
^SPBS: 33,"+49301234567",145,"Tom Tailor"
^SPBS: 1,"01799999999",129,"Charly"
^SPBS: 2,"+49175555555",145,"Dave"
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 233 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.38 AT^SPIC Display PIN counter
Test command
Response
AT^SPIC=?
OK
Execute command
TA returns the number of attempts still available for entering a required password,
e.g. the PIN, SIM PUK, PH-SIM PUK etc.
To check whether or not you need to enter a password use the “AT+CPIN?” or
“AT+CPIN2 command.
AT^SPIC
Response
^SPIC: <counter> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<counter> Number of attempts counted down after each failure.
Reference
Note
Siemens
· Whenever the required password changes, <counter> changes the reflect that
change.
· For passwords associated to the phone lock ("PS" lock) or factory set locks,
such as "PF", "PN", "PU", "PP", "PC" the number of attempts is subject to a
timing algorithm explained in Chapter 4.35.1. If these passwords are incorrectly
entered the counter first returns 3, 2 and 1 remaining attempt(s), but then gives
the total number of attempts which amounts to 63 (see example below).
· See also Chapters 4.21, 4.35 4.36, 4.38, 7.15 for further information on locks
and passwords.
Example 1
at+cpin?
+CPIN: SIM PIN
OK -Currently required password is PIN1.
at^spic
^SPIC: 3
OK
3 attempts left.
at+cpin=”9999”
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at^spic
^SPIC: 2
(2 attempts left)
OK
at+cpin=”9999”
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
OK
at^spic
^SPIC: 1
OK
at+cpin=”9999”
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at+cpin?
+CPIN: SIM PUK
OK – (now required password is PUK 1)
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 234 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
at^spic
^SPIC: 10
OK – (10 attempts left for PUK 1)
at+cpin=”01234567”,”1234”
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at^spic
^SPIC: 9
OK – (9 attempts left for PUK 1)
Example 2
Though a mobile is locked to a specific SIM card (phone lock), the client attempts
to operate it with another SIM card. The client correctly enters the SIM PIN of the
SIM card currently inserted, but then fails to give the "PS" lock password (PH-SIM
PUK):
at+cpin=9999
OK
at+cpin?
+CPIN: PH-SIM PIN
OK
ME is waiting for the phone lock password
at^spic
^SPIC: 3
OK
at+cpin=”4711”
+CME ERROR: PH-SIM PIN required
at+cpin=”4712”
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at^spic
^SPIC: 1
OK
1 attempt left.
at+cpin=”4714”
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at^spic
^SPIC: 63
OK
at+cpin=”4715”
+CME ERROR: incorrect password
at^spic
^SPIC: 63
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 235 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.39 AT^SPLM Read the PLMN list
Test command
Response
AT^SPLM=?
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
ERROR / +CME ERROR: <err>
Execute command
Response
AT^SPLM
TA returns the list of operator names from the ME. Each operator code <numericn> that has an alphanumeric equivalent <alphan> in the ME memory is returned.
^SPLM: numeric <numeric1>,long alphanumeric <alpha1><CR><LF>
^SPLM:.....OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<numericn>
<alphan>
string type; operator in numeric form; GSM location area identification number
string type; operator in long alphanumeric format; can contain up to
16 characters
Reference
Note
Siemens
See also GSM 07.07: +COPN, +COPS
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 236 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.40 AT^SPLR Read entry from the preferred operators list
Test command
Response
AT^SPLR=?
TA returns the whole index range supported by the SIM.
^SPLR: (list of supported <index>s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT^SPLR=
<index1>[,
<index2>]
TA returns used entries from the SIM list of preferred operators with <index> between <index1> and <index2>. If <index2> is not given, only entry with <index1> is
returned.
^SPLR: <index1>, <oper>
^SPLR: .....
^SPLR: <index2>, <oper> OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<index1>
<index2>
<oper>
location number to read from
location number to read to
string type; operator in numeric form; GSM location area identification
number
Reference
Note
Siemens
GSM 07.07: AT+CPOL
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 237 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.41 AT^SPLW Write an entry to the preferred operators list
Test command
Response
AT^SPLW=?
TA returns the whole index range supported by the SIM.
^SPLW: (list of supported <index>s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Parameter
AT^SPLW=
<index>
[,<oper>]
TA writes an entry to the SIM list of preferred operators at location number <index>. If <index> is given but <oper> is left out, the entry is deleted.
<index> location number
<oper>
string type; operator in numeric form (= GSM location area identification
number) Consists of a three digit country code followed by a two or three
digit network code (see GSM 04.08 section 10.5.1.3).
Response
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Reference
Note
Siemens
See also GSM 07.07: AT+CPOL
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 238 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.42 AT^SPWD Change password for a lock
Test command
Response
AT^SPWD=?
TA returns a list of pairs which represent the available facilities and the maximum
length of the associated password.
^SPWD: (list of supported (<fac>, <pwdlength>s) OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac>
see execute command
<pwdlength> integer max. length of password
Write command
Response
AT^SPWD=
<fac>, <oldpwd>,<newpwd>
TA sets a new password for the facility lock function.
OK
If error is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Parameter
<fac> Phone security locks:
"SC" SIM (lock SIM card). SIM asks SIM PIN1 when ME is switched on
and when this lock command is issued.
"P2" SIM PIN2. Used to access the functions listed in Chapter 4.36.
"PS" Phone locked to SIM (device code). Password is user defined and
must be set before the “PS” lock can be activated with AT+CLCK or
AT^SLCK.
Note:
SIM PIN1 and SIM PIN2 are each assigned a PUK to unblock a
disabled PIN.
The "PS" password, however, is never associated with a PUK. If it
is incorrectly entered three times, the Master Phone Code is required. See Chapter 4.35.1
Factory set SIM locks:
"PF" Lock Phone to the very first SIM card
"PN" Network Personalisation
"PU" Network-subset Personalisation
"PP" Service-Provider Personalisation
"PC" Corporate Personalisation
Note:
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Typical examples of factory set locks are prepaid phones or network locks (e.g. if the operation of a mobile is restricted to a specific
provider or operator). The locks can only be set by the manufacturer of the TC35i modules and need to be agreed upon between
the parties concerned, e.g. provider, operator, distributor etc. on the
one side and the manufacturer on the other side. For details contact
your local dealer or Siemens AG.
The client should be aware that each of these lock types can only
be unlocked if the associated password is available. See Chapter
4.35 and 4.35.1 for further instructions.
Page 239 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Supplementary Service: Call barring
"AO" BAOC (Bar All Outgoing Calls)
"OI" BOIC ( Bar Outgoing International Calls)
"OX" BOIC-exHC ( Bar Outgoing International Calls except to Home
Country)
"AI" BAIC (Bar All Incoming Calls)
"IR" BIC-Roam (Bar Incoming Calls when Roaming outside the home
country)
"AB" All Barring services
"AG" All outGoing barring services
"AC" All inComing barring services
Note:
The availability of the Supplementary Services varies with the network. To benefit from call barring services the client will need to
subscribe them, though a limited number of call barring types may
be included in the basic tariff package. Call barring is protected by a
password supplied from the provider or operator. Usually there is
one password which applies to all call barring options. For details
contact your provider. With AT+CPWD or AT^SPWD the default
password can be changed individually.
<oldpwd>
Password specified for the facility.
Can be ignored if no old password was allocated to the facility.
Take into account that a password may have already been set by
factory, or that the service is subject to a password issued by the
provider. See notes above or contact provider.
<newpwd>
New password. Mandatory, if <oldpwd> was an unblocking key
(such as PUK1, PUK2, Master Phone Code).
Note:
The length of the old and new password depends on the associated <fac>.
The maximum length can be queried using the Test command
AT^SPWD=?.
If <fac> = “SC”: SIM PIN comprising 4 – 8 digits. After 3 failed attempts the
8-digit SIM PUK is required.
If <fac> = “P2”: SIM PIN2 comprising 4 - 8 digits. After 3 failed attempts
the 8-digit SIM PUK2 is required.
If <fac> = “PS”: User defined 4-digit password. After 3 failed attempts the
8-digit Master Phone Code is required.
If <fac> = “AO” …”AC” (call barring): 4-digit network password.
To delete a password use the following syntax:
AT^SPWD=<fac>,<oldpwd>
Reference
Note
Siemens
See also specification of AT+ CPWD in GSM 07.07 and further details in Chapter
4.38.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 240 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.43 AT^SRTC Select, query, test ring tone parameters
Test command
Response
AT^SRTC=?
^SRTC: (list of supported <type>s), (list of supported <vol>s), (list of supported <event>s) OK
Read command
Response
AT^SRTC?
^SRTC: <type> of event=0, <vol> of event=0, <type> of event=1, <vol> of
event=1,<stat>OK
Parameters
<type>
0 – 7. Type of sound. You have a choice of 7 different ringing
tones and melodies. All will be played from the audio output selected with AT^SAIC and AT^SNFS.
Factory setting is <type>=3.
<type>=0 is only intended for muting. See Write command for
details.
<vol>
Volume of ringing tone. Varies from low to high.
<stat>
<event>
0
Mute (factory setting)
1
Very low (initial setting after firmware update)
2
Identical with 1
3
Low
4
Identical with 3
5
Middle
6
Identical with 5
7
High
Status of test ringing. Indicates whether or not a melody is currently being played back for testing.
0
Playback is off.
1
Playback is on.
Event to be indicated. All settings of <type> and <vol> apply to
the selected event only.
[0]
All MTCs (voice, data etc.)
1
Incoming short message. The ring tone or melody will only
be played if the URC for incoming SMS is activated with
AT+CNMI as described in Chapter 5.10.
The Read command can be used while test playback is off or on. In the latter
case, see Execute command for details.
Write command
Response
AT^SRTC=[<type>]
[,<vol>][,<event>]
^SRTC: <type>, <vol>,<event> OK
Parameters
See Read command
The Write command chooses the type and volume of ringing tones for the selected event. It can be used while test playback is off or on. In the latter case,
see Execute command for details.
The selected type and volume apply to all audio modes. They are saved in the
non-volatile Flash memory. If no optional parameter is entered, the old value
will be kept.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 241 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Before first using ringing tones:
We have chosen to let you decide your own preferences when you start using
ringing tones. Therefore, factory setting is AT^SRTC: 3,0,3,0,0 (ringing tones
are muted). To activate ringing tones for the very first time, first enter the
Write command and simply change the volume.
<type>=0:
AT^SRTC=0 can be entered to quickly mute the ringing tone or melody currently played to indicate an <event>. No settings will be changed or saved.
<type>=0 immediately stops the audible ringing tone, but does not terminate
the URC (for example RING).
Execute Command
AT^SRTC
The Execute command is intended for testing. It starts to play a melody from
the audio output currently selected with the AT^SNFS command.
Response
OK
To stop the test use AT^SRTC again. During test playback, you can enter the
Write command to select another melody and adjust the volume. Also, you
can enter the Read command to check the type and volume of the current
ringing tone, and to view the status of playback (on / off).
The test ringing signal cannot be activated when an MTC is ringing (ERROR).
If an MTC arrives during test playback, test ringing stops and “normal“ ringing
is activated (RING).
Selecting <vol>=0 during the test, immediately stops playback. After this, ringing tones will be muted until you change <vol> using the Write command.
Reference
SIEMENS
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 242 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.44 AT^SSCONF SMS Configuration
Test command
Response
AT^SSCONF=?
^SSCONF: (list of supported <ra>s), (list of supported <FF>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SSCONF?
^SSCONF: <ra>, <FF> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SSCONF=
<ra>[,<FF>]
The write command serves to control the presentation of the recipient address
parameters <ra> and <tora>.
Response
OK
Parameter
<ra>
Display recipient address
[0]
the mobile station shall not display the parameter <ra> and
<tora>.
1
<FF>
the mobile station shall display the parameter <ra> and
<tora>.
Display filler bits (numeric)
[0]
the mobile station shall display the filler bits
1
the mobile station shall not display filler FF in PDU mode
status reports.
Please note that the setting is stored volatile, i.e. after restart or reset, the default value 0 will be restored. Also, there is no way to store AT^SSCONF to
the user defined profile.
Reference
Note
Siemens
The parameters <ra> and <tora> appear in the result codes of the AT commands AT+CMGL, AT^SMGL, AT+CMGR, AT^SMGR and the unsolicited result code +CDS.
The parameter <FF> appears in the result codes of the AT commands
AT+CMGL, AT^SMGL, AT+CMGR, AT^SMGR.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 243 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.45 AT^SSDA Set Display Availability
Use the AT^SSDA command to specify whether your TC35i product is designed to provide a display.
If there is one available, AT^SSDA enables or disables the mobile station to present incoming
Class 0 short messages directly on the display. The command is not required for other short message Classes.
Test command
Response
AT^SSDA=?
^SSDA: (list of supported <da>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^ SSDA?
^SSDA: <da> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
Response
AT^SSDA=
<da>
OK
Parameter
<da>: display availability
0 the mobile station is not capable of displaying short messages
1 the mobile station is capable of displaying short messages
Please note that the setting is stored volatile, i.e. after restart or reset, the default
value 0 will be restored. Also, there is no way to store AT^SSDA to the user defined profile.
Reference
Note
Siemens
· If a mobile station is able to display short messages, class 0 messages can be
displayed immediately. If the mobile station has no display, class 0 messages
shall be treated as though there was no message class. Refer to GSM 03.38.
· The only effect of AT^SSDA is to influence the behavior of the <mt> parameter
specified with AT+CNMI: If <da>=1 and <mt>=1, then Class 0 short messages
need to be acknowledged with AT+CNMA. See also Chapters 5.9 for CNMA,
5.10 for AT+CNMI and 5.16 for AT+CSMS.
· Multiplex protocol: If one instance is set to <da>=1 and <mt>=1, then all other
instances must be configured for <mt>=0.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 244 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.46 AT^SSET Settings for Unsolicited Result Code "SIM READY"
Test command
Response
AT^SSET =?
^SSET: (list of supported <n>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SSET?
^SSET: <n> OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SSET=
[<n>]
The Write command serves to set the presentation mode of the unsolicited result
code.
Response
OK
Parameter
<n>
SIM ready presentation mode
0
disable
1
enable
Using AT&W, the current settings for AT^SSET can be stored to the user defined
profile. It is possible to assign different settings to different multiplexer channels.
Reference
Unsolicited result code
SIEMENS
^SSIM READY
The URC acknowledges to the user that SMS and phone book data are accessible. It will be reported each time the ME has completed reading data from the SIM.
Reading starts after successful SIM PIN authentication (AT+CPIN), and may take
up to 30 seconds depending on the SIM used. Before that, any attempt to access
one of the phone books or to view SMS will result in “+CME ERROR: 14” (SIM
busy).
The URC ^SSIM READY” is related to all phone book commands and to the SMS
commands AT+CMGL, AT+CMGR, AT^SMGL, AT^SMGR.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 245 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.47 AT^SSMSS Set Short Message Storage Sequence
Test command
Response
AT^SSMSS=?
^SSMSS: (list of supported <seq>s)
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SSMSS?
^SSMSS: <seq>
OK
Parameter
See write command
Write command
AT^SSMSS=
<seq>
The short message storage "MT" is a logical storage. It consists of two physical
storages "ME" and "SM". This command allows to select the sequence of addressing this storage.
The storage types “MT”, “ME” and “SM” are detailed in Chapter 5.11, AT+CPMS.
Response
OK
Parameter
<seq>: MT sequence
0
“MT” storage is “ME” then “SM”
1
“MT” storage is “SM” then “ME”
Reference
Note
Siemens
Access to the SIM storage is faster. For compatibility with previous software releases, the ”MT” sequence <seq>=0 is the factory default.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 246 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.48 AT^SSYNC Configure SYNC Pin
The ^SSYNC command serves to configure the SYNC pin of the TC35i application interface. Please
note that the pin may be assigned different functions, depending on the design of the host application.
For detailed information on the SYNC pin of the TC35i module refer to [1]. Before changing the
mode of the SYNC pin, carefully read the technical specifications.
Test command
Response
AT^SSYNC=?
^SSYNC: (list of supported <mode>s) OK
Parameter:
See write command
Read command
Response
AT^SSYNC?
+SSYNC: <mode> OK
Parameter:
See write command
Write command
Response
AT^SSYNC=
<mode>
OK
Parameter
<mode>
Note
0 Enables the SYNC pin to indicate growing power consumption during a transmit burst. You can make use of the signal
generated by the SYNC pin, if power consumption is your
concern. To do so, ensure that your application is capable
of processing the signal. Your platform design must be such
that the incoming signal causes other components to draw
less current. In short, this allows your application to accommodate current drain and thus, supply sufficient current to
the GSM engine if required.
Note: Mode 0 is default mode of the TC35i module.
1 Enables the SYNC pin to control a status LED. On the
TC35i Terminal, this is the LED placed on the front panel. If
you use the TC35i module, the SYNC pin can control an
LED installed in your application.
The LED functions described in Table 17 are applicable
both to the module and the terminal.
Note: Mode 1 is the default mode of the TC35i Terminal.
The SYNC pin mode is stored to the non-volatile Flash memory, and thus
retained after Power Down.
Table 17: Functions of the ME indicated by status LED (if <mode> = 1):
LED status
Function
TC35i module: ME is off or running in SLEEP, Alarm or Charge-only mode.
TC35i Terminal: ME is off or in SLEEP mode.
600 ms On / 600ms Off No SIM card inserted or no PIN entered, or network search in progress, or
ongoing user authentication, or network login in progress.
75 ms On / 3 s Off
Logged to network (monitoring control channels and user interactions). No
call in progress.
On
Depending on type of call:
Voice call: Connected to remote party.
Data call: Connected to remote party or exchange of parameters while setting up or disconnecting a call.
Off
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 247 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.49 AT^STCD Display Total Call Duration
Test command
Response
AT^STCD=?
OK
Execute command
Response
AT^STCD
TA returns total call duration (accumulated duration of all calls)
^STCD: <time> OK
Parameter
<time>
string type value; format is "hh:mm:ss", where characters indicate
hours, minutes, seconds; E.g. 22:10:00 “22:10:00"
max value is 9999:59:59
Reference
Note
Siemens
The Total Call Duration will not be reset by power off or other means.
7.50 AT\V Set CONNECT result code format
This command formats the CONNECT response indicated in case of successfully connected circuit
switched data calls.
Execute command
Response
AT\V[<value>]
OK
ERROR
Parameter
<value> [0] CONNECT<text> result code returned without RLP trailer
1 CONNECT<text> result code returned with RLP trailer
Reference
SIEMENS
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Note:
· For circuit switched data calls only.
· Output only if ATX parameter is set with value > 0 (see ATX).
Page 248 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
7.51 AT%D Automatic dial on DTR line activation
Test command
Response
AT%D=?
%D: ( list of supported <state>s), list of supported (<type>s) OK
Parameter
See write command
Read command
Response
AT%D?
%D: <state> <type> OK
Parameter
Write command
AT%D[<state>
[<type>] ]
See write command
Enable/Disable automatic dialing from phone book on DTR activation
(ON/OFF transition).
If automatic dialing is enabled and the DTR signal line switches from OFF to
ON, the ME attempts to set up an outgoing call to the number stored at the
first index of the "ME" phone book, or using telephone number “112” in case
of an emergency call.
When a call setup starts all other active or held calls are dismissed.
Repeated DTR activation events while call setup is in progress or during a
call established this way are ignored. Also, all DTR activation events during
multiplex mode are discarded.
To enable auto dialing for data and voice calls after ME´s power-on it is
necessary to disable PIN authorization with the command
AT+CLCK=”SC”,0,<pin>. To prevent misuse of this unprotected SIM card it
is recommended to limit its network facilities. For details refer to the “FD” parameter of “AT+CLCK Facility lock”, pg. 101.
Response
OK
Or if an error occured which is related to ME functionality:
+CME ERROR: <err>
Possible responses when command is entered:
+CME ERROR: invalid characters in text string
Wrong parameter.
+CME ERROR: operation not supported
No physical DTR signal line is supported for the serial channel or
no access to the CSD transmission unit is supported for the serial
channel but a data call is requested (no ‘;’ appended, see below).
Remember that data calls are applicable on serial channel 1 only.
+CME ERROR: operation temporary not allowed
Write command is not supported in multiplex mode.
Parameter
<state> Auto dial state on DTR activation (OFF-ON transition)
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
[0]
disable
1
enable,
Next time when DTR is activated, TA dials the telephone number
located at index “1” in the „ME“ phone book if <type> is not “!”. Refer to AT+CPBS in Chapter 4.33 and AT+CPBW in Chapter 4.34.
Page 249 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
<type>
Determine type of performed dial
<>
If omitted performed dial command leads to a data call.
<;>
Performed dial command leads to a voice call.
<!>
Dial command leads to an emergency call, i.e. ATD “112”; is performed. No SIM card needs to be inserted.
CAUTION!
AT%D1! setting especially in conjunction with AT&W can easily lead to erroneous emergency call setups.
Reference
Note
SIEMENS
· To suppress arbitrary call releases on DTR deactivation setting of AT&D0
is recommended. Refer to “AT&D Set circuit Data Terminal Ready (DTR)
function mode”, Chapter 2.34.
· If several AT commands are entered on the same line this command
needs to be the last one.
· Command setting is storable via AT&W, see Chapter 2.38.
· If enabled, DTR activation triggers a dial command (ATD) as though it
were entered by a TE. If in this situation characters are entered on the
same serial channel the ongoing dial command will be terminated (user
break).
7.51.1 Autodialing responses
If dialing starts caused by DTR activation the following responses may occur:
+CME ERROR: SIM not inserted
SIM card is needed to set up data and voice calls.
+CME ERROR: SIM PIN required
PIN is required to set up data and voice calls.
+CME ERROR: not found
Phone book entry is required for data and voice calls, but no telephone number is provided
at this time.
If there is no dialtone (parameter setting ATX2 or ATX4. Refer to ATX described in Chapter 2.31.
NO DIALTONE
If busy and (parameter setting ATX3 or ATX4)
BUSY
If a connection cannot be set up or call is finished by other party
NO CARRIER
If successfully connected and voice call
OK
If successfully connected and non-voice call
CONNECT<text>
<text> is sent out if parameter setting is ATX>0, also refer to the Result codes listed in Chapter 8.1.4.
TA switches to data state.
When TA returns to command mode after call release
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 250 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8 APPENDIX
8.1
Summary of ERRORS and Messages
The final result codes +CME ERROR: <err> and +CMS ERROR: <err> indicate errors related to mobile equipment or network. The effect is similar to an ERROR result code.
A final result error code terminates the execution of the command and prevents the execution of all
remaining commands that may follow on the same command line. If so, neither ERROR nor OK result
code are returned for these commands. A 30 seconds timeout causes ERROR to be returned when
the input of a command is not complete.
The format of <err> can be either numeric or verbose. This is set with the AT+CMEE command (see
Chapter 4.25).
8.1.1 Summary of CME ERRORS related to GSM 07.07
Code of <err>
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
20
21
22
23
24
25
26
27
30
31
32
40
41
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Meaning
phone failure
no connection to phone
phone-adapter link reserved
Operation not allowed
Operation not supported
PH-SIM PIN required
PH-FSIM PIN required
PH-FSIM PUK required
SIM not inserted
SIM PIN required
SIM PUK required
SIM failure
SIM busy
SIM wrong
Incorrect password
SIM PIN2 required
SIM PUK2 required
Memory full
invalid index
not found
Memory failure
text string too long
invalid characters in text string
dial string too long
invalid characters in dial string
no network service
Network timeout
Network not allowed emergency calls only
Network personalization PIN required
Network personalization PUK required
Page 251 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Code of <err>
42
43
44
45
46
47
48
100
132
133
134
256
257
258
259
260
261
262
Meaning
Network subset personalization PIN required
Network subset personalization PUK required
service provider personalization PIN required
service provider personalization PUK required
Corporate personalization PIN required
Corporate personalization PUK required
PH-SIM PUK required
(PH-SIM PUK may also be referred to as Master Phone Code. For further details
see 4.21, 4.35 and 4.35.1)
Unknown
service option not supported
requested service option not subscribed
service option temporarily out of order
Operation temporary not allowed
call barred
phone is busy
user abort
invalid dial string
ss not executed
SIM blocked
Note: Values below 256 are reserved.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 252 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.2 Summary of CMS ERRORS related to GSM 07.05
Code of <err>
1
8
10
21
27
28
29
30
38
41
42
47
50
69
81
95
96
97
98
99
111
127
128
129
130
143
144
145
159
160
161
175
176
192
193
194
195
196
197
198
199
208
209
210
211
212
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Meaning
Unassigned (unallocated) number
Operator determined barring
Call barred
Short message transfer rejected
Destination out of service
Unidentified subscriber
Facility rejected
Unknown subscriber
Network out of order
Temporary failure
Congestion
Resources unavailable, unspecified
Requested facility not subscribed
Requested facility not implemented
Invalid short message transfer reference value
Invalid message, unspecified
Invalid mandatory information
Message type non-existent or not implemented
Message not compatible with short message protocol state
Information element non-existent or not implemented
Protocol error, unspecified
Interworking, unspecified
Telematic interworking not supported
Short message Type 0 not supported
Cannot replace short message
Unspecified TP-PID error
Data coding scheme (alphabet) not supported
Message class not supported
Unspecified TP-DCS error
Command cannot be actioned
Command unsupported
Unspecified TP-Command error
TPDU not supported
SC busy
No SC subscription
SC system failure
Invalid SME address
Destination SME barred
SM Rejected-Duplicate SM
TP-VPF not supported
TP-VP not supported
D0 SIM SMS storage full
No SMS storage capability in SIM
Error in MS
Memory Capacity Exceeded
SIM Application Toolkit Busy
Page 253 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Code of <err>
213
255
300
301
302
303
304
305
310
311
312
313
314
315
316
317
318
320
321
322
330
331
332
340
500
512
513
514
515
516
517
518
519
520
521
522
Meaning
SIM data download error
Unspecified error cause
ME failure
SMS service of ME reserved
Operation not allowed
Operation not supported
Invalid PDU mode parameter
Invalid text mode parameter
SIM not inserted
SIM PIN required
PH-SIM PIN required
SIM failure
SIM busy
SIM wrong
SIM PUK required
SIM PIN2 required
SIM PUK2 required
Memory failure
Invalid memory index
Memory full
SMSC address unknown
no network service
Network timeout
NO +CNMA ACK EXPECTED
Unknown error
User abort
unable to store
invalid status
invalid character in address string
invalid length
invalid character in pdu
invalid parameter
invalid length or character
invalid character in text
timer expired
Operation temporary not allowed
Note:
If you attempt to use SMS related AT commands before inserting a SIM card or entering the SIM PIN,
the resulting errors will be delivered in the form of CME errors instead of CMS errors.
This is a normal behavior since the GSM 07.05 based CMS errors are mapped to GSM 07.07 based
CME errors if SIM PIN authentication has not been done.
Example 1
The application tries to send a short message though the SIM card is not present:
AT+CMGF=1
OK
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 254 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
AT+CMGS=123456
// Equivalent to +CMS ERROR: 310
+CME ERROR: 10
Example 2
The application tries to send a short message while the SIM card is present, but
PIN authentication has not yet been done.
AT+CMGF=1
OK
AT+CMGS=123456
// Equivalent to +CMS ERROR: 311
+CME ERROR: 11
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 255 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.3 Summary of Unsolicited Result Codes (URC)
A URC is a report message sent from the ME to the TE. An unsolicited result code can either be delivered automatically when an event occurs or as a result of a query the ME received before. However, a
URC is not issued as a direct response to an executed AT command.
Typical URCs may be information about incoming calls, received SMS, changing temperature, status
of the battery etc. A summary of URCs is listed in Table 18 and Table 19.
When sending a URC the ME activates its Ring Line (Logic "1"), i.e. the line goes active low for 1 second.
If an event that delivers a URC coincides with the execution of an AT command, the URC will be output after command execution has completed.
For each of these messages, you can configure the ME whether or not to send an unsolicited result
code. Remember that the presentation mode of URCs will be reset to the default values
· when you power down the GSM engine, e.g. with AT^SMSO or when disconnecting power supply,
· when you reset the engine with AT+CFUN=1,1
· when you restore the factory settings with AT&F.
To take advantage of the messages, you need to activate the desired URC every time you reboot the
GSM engine or have the parameters included in the user profile saved with AT&W. If you do so, take
into account that the presentation mode of some URCs cannot be saved to the user profile, for example ^SBC, ^SCTM, +CSSI and +CSSU. A list of parameters saved with AT&W is provided in Chapter
2.38.
The URCs SYSSTART and SYSSTART ALARM MODE are not user definable. This is also true for the
Fax Class 2 URCS listed in Table 19.
Table 18: Summary of URCs
Message
Meaning
RING
+CCCM: <ccm>
+CREG: <stat>[,<lac>,<ci>]
Incoming calls
Current call meter value
Registration to ME network changed
+CRING: <type>
+CLIP: <number>,<type>,<CLI validity>
+CMTI:<mem>,<index>
Indication of an incoming call
Telephone number of caller
+CMT:,<length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CMT:<oa>,,<scts>[,<tooa>,<fo>,
<pid>,<dcs>,<sca>,<tosca>,
<length>]<CR><LF><data>
+CBM:<sn>,<mid>,<dcs>,<page>,
<pages><CR> <LF><data>
+CBM: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDS: <length><CR><LF><pdu>
+CDS: <fo>,<mr>,[<ra>],[<tora>],
<scts>,<dt>, <st>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
How to activate
URC
Not defined by user
AT^SACM=1
AT+CREG=1 or
AT+CREG=2
AT+CRC=1
AT+CLIP=1
Indication of a new short message (text
and PDU mode)
Short message is output directly to the
TE (in PDU mode)
Short message is output directly to the
TE (in text mode)
AT+CNMI=1,1
Cell broadcast message is output directly
to the TE (in text mode)
Cell broadcast message is output directly
to the TE (in PDU mode)
SMS status report routed directly to TE
(in PDU mode)
SMS status report routed directly to TE
(in text mode)
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,0,2
Examples:
AT+CNMI=1,0,2
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,0,0,1
Page 256 of 278
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,2
Example:
AT+CNMI=1,2
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Message
+CDSI: <mem>,<index>
+CSSI: <code1>
+CSSU: <code2>
^SMGO: <mode>
^SCKS: <m>
Meaning
How to activate
URC
SMS status report routed ME/TA. Can be Example:
queried from the memory with location
AT+CNMI=1,0,0,2
index number (text and PDU mode)
Supplementary service intermediAT+CSSN=1,x
ate/unsolicited result code
AT+CSSN=1,x
SMS overflow indicator
Indicates whether card has been removed or inserted
Board is close to or beyond critical temperature limit. If <m>=2 or <m>-2, ME
switches off.
AT^SMGO=1
AT^SCKS=1
^SBC: Undervoltage
Undervoltage detected. ME will be
switched off within a minute.
Not defined by user
^SBC: Overvoltage warning
Overvoltage alarm indicator.
Not defined by user
^SBC: Overvoltage shutdown
Overvoltage detected. ME will be
switched off within a minute.
Not defined by user
^SYSSTART
Indicates that ME has successfully been
started.
Note that this URC will not appear if
autobauding is enabled.
Not defined by user
^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
Indicates that ME has entered Alarm
mode.
RTC alert set with the AT+CALA command. Executed when ME has been
powered down. Causes ME to wake up
from Power Down mode. Preventing ME
from unintentionally registering to the
network, Alarm mode allows limited operation. Limited number of AT commands is accessible. Do not confuse with
reminder message.
Note that this URC will not appear if
autobauding is enabled.
AT+CALA=
<time>,0,0,<text>
or
AT+CALA=
<time>
Power down ME.
+CALA: <text>
Reminder message set with AT+CALA
command. Executed while ME is in normal operation. Do not confuse with Alarm
mode.
+CIEV: <text>
Reports changes from indicators listed in
the AT+CIND command specification.
Discard CIEV unsolicited result codes
when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g. in online data mode); otherwise forward them
directly to the TE
AT+CALA=
<time>,0,0,<text>
or
AT+CALA=
<time>
Do not power down
ME.
AT+CMER=1,0,0,2
^SCTM_B: <m>
or, if individual text available:
^SYSSTART ALARM MODE
+CALA: <text>
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 257 of 278
AT^SCTM=1
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Message
Meaning
+CIEV: <text>
Reports changes from indicators listed in
the AT+CIND command specification.
Buffer CIEV unsolicited result codes in
the TA when TA-TE link is reserved (e.g.
in on-line data mode) and flush them to
the TE after reservation. Otherwise forward them directly to the TE.
Reports changes from indicators listed in
the AT+CIND command specification.
forward CIEV unsolicited result codes directly to the TE; TA-TE link specific inband technique used to embed result
codes and data when TA is in on-line
data mode
Call waiting indication (for data calls, parameter <class> states the actual bearer
service group, with a <class> value between 16 and 128)
Indicate that a waiting call has been received while ME was engaged in a CSD
call, but that this waiting call was hang
up by the other part before ME went
back to command mode.
USSD response from the network after a
mobile originated or network initiated action.
+CIEV: <text>
+CCWA: <number>,<type>,
<class>,,<CLI validity>
^SCWA:
+CUSD:<m>[,<str>,<dcs>
(Unstructured supplementary service data)
^SSIM READY
Reading of SMS and phone books from
SIM is completed
How to activate
URC
AT+CMER=2,0,0,2
AT+CMER=3,0,0,2
AT+CCWA=1,1,<cla
ss>
AT+CCWA=1,1,<cla
ss>
AT+ CUSD=1
AT^SSET=1
Table 19: Summary of Fax Class 2 URCs defined by EIA PN-2388
Message
Meaning
+FCON
Indicates connection with a fax machine
+FNSF:<param>
Reports non-standard setup frame
+FTSI:"<id>"
Reports the remote ID, transmit station ID
+FCSI:"<id>"
Reports the remote ID, called station ID
+FDCS:<VR>,<BR>,<WD>,<LN>,
<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,<ST>
Reports the current session parameter
(refer to EIA PN-2388, table 3.10)
+FDIS:<VR>,<BR>,<WD>,<LN>,
<DF>,<EC>,<BF>,<ST>
Reports the remote station capabilities
(refer to EIA PN-2388, table 3.10)
+FHNG:<stat>
Reports call terminated with status
+FPTS:<stat>
Reports received page status
+FET:<stat>
Reports post page message
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 258 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.4 Result codes
Indication
OK
CONNECT
RING
NO CARRIER
ERROR
NO DIALTONE
BUSY
CONNECT 2400
CONNECT 4800
CONNECT 9600
CONNECT 14400
CONNECT 2400/RLP
CONNECT 4800/RLP
CONNECT 9600/RLP
CONNECT 14400/RLP
ALERTING
DIALING
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Numeric
0
1
2
3
4
6
7
10
30
32
33
47
48
49
50
Meaning
Command executed, no errors, Wake up after reset
Link established
Ring detected
Link not established or disconnected
Invalid command or command line too long
No dial tone, dialing impossible, wrong mode
Remote station busy
Link with 2400 bps
Link with 4800 bps
Link with 9600 bps
Link with 14400 bps
Link with 2400 bps and Radio Link Protocol
Link with 4800 bps and Radio Link Protocol
Link with 9600 bps and Radio Link Protocol
Link with 14400 bps and Radio Link Protocol
Alerting at called phone
Mobile phone is dialing
Page 259 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.5 Cause Location ID for the extended error report (AT+CEER)
ID
Description
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
No error (default)
SIEMENS L2 cause
GSM cause for L3 Radio Resource Sublayer (GSM 04.08 annex F)
SIEMENS cause for L3 Radio Resource Sublayer
GSM cause for L3 Mobility Management (GSM 04.08 annex G)
SIEMENS cause for L3 Mobility Management
GSM cause for L3 Mobility Management via MMR-SAP (GSM 04.08
annex G)
SIEMENS cause for L3 Mobility Management via MMR-SAP
GSM cause for L3 Call Control (GSM 04.08 10.5.4.11 and annex H)
SIEMENS cause for L3 Call Control
SIEMENS cause for L3 Advice of Charge Entity
GSM cause for L3 SMS CP Entity
SIEMENS cause for L3 SMS CP Entity
GSM cause for L3 SMS RL Entity
SIEMENS cause for L3 SMS RL Entity
GSM cause for L3 SMS TL Entity
SIEMENS cause for L3 SMS TL Entity
SIEMENS cause for DSM Entity
GSM cause for L3 Call-related Supplementary Services
SIEMENS cause for L3 Call related Supplementary Services
SIEMENS cause for Supplementary Services Entity
SIEMENS cause for Supplementary Services Manager
Network cause for Supplementary Services (GSM 04.08 10.5.4.11
and annex H)
Supplementary Services network error (GSM 04.80 3.6.6)
GSM cause for Session Management (GSM 04.08 annex I)
GSM cause for L3 Protocol module or other local cause
Supplementary Services general problem (GSM 04.80 3.6.7)
Supplementary Services invoke problem (GSM 04.80 3.6.7)
Supplementary Services result problem (GSM 04.80 3.6.7)
Supplementary Services error problem (GSM 04.80 3.6.7)
SIEMENS cause for Link Management
7
8
9
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
21
22
32
33
34
35
50
127
128
129
130
131
242
Reference
(related chapter)
(none)
8.1.6
8.1.7
8.1.8
8.1.9
8.1.8
8.1.9
8.1.10
8.1.11
8.1.12
8.1.13
8.1.14
8.1.15
8.1.16
8.1.13
8.1.13
8.1.17
8.1.18
8.1.13
8.1.13
8.1.13
8.1.13
8.1.6 GSM release cause for L3 Radio Resource (RR) (AT+CEER)
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
8
9
Description
Normal event
Abnormal release, unspecified
Abnormal release, channel unacceptable
Abnormal release, timer expired
Abnormal release, no activity on the radio path
Pre-emptive release
Handover impossible, timing advance out of range
Channel mode unacceptable
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 260 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Number
10
65
95
96
97
98
100
101
111
Description
Frequency not implemented
Call already cleared
Semantically incorrect message
Invalid mandantory information
Message type non-existent or not implemented
Message type not compatible with protocol state
Conditional information element error
No cell allocation available
Protocol error unspecified
8.1.7 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Radio Resource (RR) (AT+CEER)
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
Description
Racchs not answered
Racchs rejected
Access class of the SIM is barred by the network provider
SABM failure
Radio link counter expiry or PerformAbnormalRelease
Confirm ABORT of the MM
Respond to DEACT_REQ
Loss of coverage
Reestablishment not possible
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 261 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.8 GSM release cause for Mobility Management (MM) (AT+CEER)
Number
Description
Causes related to MS identification
2
IMSI unknown in HLR
3
Illegal MS
4
IMSI unknown in VLR
5
IMEI not accepted
6
Illegal ME
Cause related to subscription options
11
PLMN not allowed
12
Location Area not allowed
13
Roaming not allowed in this location area
Causes related to PLMN specific network failures and congestion
17
Network failure
22
Congestion
Causes related to nature of request
32
Service option not supported
33
Requested service option not subscribed
34
Service option temporarily out of order
38
Call cannot be identified
Causes related to invalid messages
95
Semantically incorrect message
96
Invalid mandantory information
97
Message type non-existent or not implemented
98
Message not compatible with protocol state
99
Information element non-existent or not implemented
100
Conditional information element error
101
Messages not compatible with protocol state
111
Protocol error, unspecified
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 262 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.9 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Mobility Management (MM) (AT+CEER)
Number
1
8
9
11
17
18
19
20
21
22
23
24
Description
No SIM available
No MM connection
Authentification failure
MM performs detach
The registration failed and will be re-attempted in a short term
The CM connection establishment failed
The registration failed and will be re-attempt in a long term
The RR connection is released
The MS tries to register
The SPLMN is not available
An MTC is in progress
A PLMN scan is in progress
8.1.10 GSM release cause for L3 Call Control (CC) (AT+CEER)
Number
Description
0
No error
Normal class
1
Unassigned (unallocated) number
3
No route to destination
6
Channel unacceptable
8
Operator determined barring
16
Normal call clearing
17
User busy
18
No user responding
19
User alerting, no answer
21
Call rejected
22
Number changed
25
Pre-emption
26
Non-selected user clearing
27
Destination out of order
28
Invalid number format (incomplete number)
29
Facility rejected
30
Response to STATUS ENQUIRY
31
Normal, unspecified
Resource unavailable class
34
No circuit/channel available
38
Network out of order
41
Temporary failure
42
Switching equipment congestion
43
Access information discarded
44
Requested circuit/channel not available
47
Resource unavailable, unspecified
Service or option not available class
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 263 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Number
Description
49
Quality of service unavailable
50
Requested facility not subscribed
55
Incoming calls barred within the CUG
57
Bearer capability not authorized
58
Bearer capability presently not available
63
Service or option not available, unspecified
Service or option not implemented
65
Bearer service not implemented
68
ACM equal or greater than ACMmax
69
Requested facility not implemented
70
Only restricted digital information bearer capability is available
79
service or option not implemented, unspecified
Invalid message (e.g. parameter out of range) class
81
Invalid transaction identifier value
87
User not member of CUG
88
Incompatible destination
91
Invalid transit network selection
95
Semantically incorrect message
Protocol error (e.g. unknown message) class
96
Invalid mandantory information
97
Message type non-existant or not implemented
98
Message type not comaptible with protocol state
99
Information element non-existent or not implemented
100
Conditional information element error
101
Message not compatible with protocol
102
Recovery on timer expiry
111
Protocol error, unspecified
Interworking class
127
Interworking, unspecified
8.1.11 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Call Control (CC) (AT+CEER)
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
10
Notifications
300
Description
Call dropped
Service not available
Hold procedure not available
Temporary no service, previous procedure not yet finished
No speech service available
Call reestablishment procedure active
Mobile received a release (complete) message during a modify procedure (modify reject)
Call clearing, because loss of radio connection, if no reestablishment is allowed (call
not active)
Number not included in FDN list
Called party barred incoming call
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 264 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.12 SIEMENS release cause for L3 Advice of Charge (AOC) (AT+CEER)
Number
1
2
3
4
5
Description
SIM data not available
SIM does not support AOC
SIM data access error
ACM limit almost reached ACM range overflow
ACM range overflow
8.1.13 GSM release cause for Supplementary Service call (AT+CEER)
Number
Description
0
No error (default)
1
UnknownSubscriber
9
IllegalSubscriber
10
BearerServiceNotProvisioned
11
TeleserviceNotProvisioned
12
IllegalEquipment
13
CallBarred
15
CUGReject
16
IllegalSSOperation
17
SSErrorStatus
18
SSNotAvailable
19
SSSubscriptionViolation
20
SSIncompatibility
21
FacilityNotSupported
27
AbsentSubscriber
29
ShortTermDenial
30
LongTermDenial
34
SystemFailure
35
DataMissing
36
UnexpectedDataValue
37
PWRegistrationFailure
38
NegativePWCheck
43
NumberOfPWAttemptsViolation
71
UnknownAlphabet
72
USSDBusy
126
MaxNumsOfMPTYCallsExceeded
127
ResourcesNotAvailable
General Problem Codes
300
Unrecognized Component
301
Mistyped Component
302
Badly Structured Component
Invoke Problem Codes
303
Duplicate Invoke ID
304
Unrecognized Operation
305
Mistyped Parameter
306
Resource Limitation
307
Initiating Release
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 265 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Number
Description
308
Unrecognized Linked ID
309
Linked Response Unexpected
310
Unexpected Linked Operation
Return Result Problem Codes
311
Unrecognize Invoke ID
312
Return Result Unexpected
313
Mistyped Parameter
Return Error Problem Codes
314
Unrecognized Invoke ID
315
Return Error Unexpected
316
Unrecognized Error
317
Unexpected Error
318
Mistyped Parameter
8.1.14 Siemens release cause for Call related Supplementary Services (CRSS)
(AT+CEER)
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
Description
ECT procedure failed (timer expired)
Call has been cleared without receiving an answer to ECT request
Initial conditions not fulfilled (one active, one held call)
Received “return error”
Call has been cleared without receiving an answer to CCBS request
Initial conditions for CCBS not fulfilled (Idle CRSS)
8.1.15 SIEMENS cause for Supplementary Services Entity
Number
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
Description
No Error
MM Error
MM Release
SIM contact lost or power off
Error in ASN.1 Codec
Unexpected release
Mtc collision
Out of memory
Erroneous message received
Protocol error, unspecified
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 266 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.16 SIEMENS cause for Supplementary Services Manager
Number
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
8
9
10
11
12
13
14
15
16
17
18
19
20
22
Description
Out of Memory
Missing parameter
Unexpected parameter
Activate not allowed
Deactivate not allowed
Registrate not allowed
Erase not allowed
Interrogate not allowed
Illegal request
Null request
SS manager busy
Received unexpected facility IE
Received ‘Release Complete return error’
Received ‘Release Complete return reject’
Received ‘Release Complete’ without facility IE
Received ‘Release Complete’ with erroneous facility IE
Received facility with erroneous facility IE
Received ‘Return Result” with unexpected OC
Received ‘Return Result” with illegal OC
Received ‘Return Result” with unexpected empty result
Request Barred
Supplementary Service Modified (by SAT, SIM call control or other entity)
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 267 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.1.17 GSM release cause for Session Management (SM) (AT+CEER)
Number
Description
Causes related to nature of request
25
LLC or SNDCP failure
26
Insufficient ressources
27
Unknown or missing access point name
28
Unknown PDP address or PDP type
29
User authentification failed
30
Activation rejected by GGSN
31
Activation rejected, unspecified
32
Service option not supported
33
Requested service option not subscribed
34
Service option temporarily out of order
35
NSAPI already used
36
Regular PDP context deactivation
37
QoS not accepted
38
Network failure
39
Reactivation requested
40
Feature not supported
Causes related to invalid messages
81
Invalid transaction identifier value
95
Semantically incorrect message
96
Invalid mandantory information
97
Message type non-existant or not implemented
98
Message type not comaptible with protocol state
99
Information element non-existent or not implemented
100
Conditional information element error
101
Message not compatible with protocol
111
Protocol error, unspecified
8.1.18 GSM cause for L3 Protocol module or other local cause (AT+CEER)
Number
2
Description
No detailed cause
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 268 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.2
Summary of PIN requiring AT Commands
The following table lists all the AT commands that are available after the PIN was entered.
AT command
Required PIN
Standard V25.ter AT commands
ATA
PIN 1
ATD
PIN 1
ATH
PIN 1
AT+ILRR
PIN 1
AT commands originating from GSM 07.07
AT+CACM
PIN 1, PIN 2
AT+CAMM
PIN 1, PIN 2
AT+CAOC
PIN 1
AT+CCFC
PIN 1
AT+CCWA
PIN 1
AT+CEER
PIN 1
AT+CGACT
PIN 1
AT+CGATT
PIN 1
AT+CGDATA
PIN 1
AT+CGDCONT
PIN 1
AT+CGQMIN
PIN 1
AT+CGQREQ
PIN 1
AT+CHLD
PIN 1
AT+CHUP
PIN 1
AT+CIMI
PIN 1
AT+CLCC
PIN 1
AT+CLCK
PIN 1
AT+CLIP read
PIN 1
AT+CLIR
PIN 1
AT+CMER
PIN 1
AT+CMGC
PIN 1
AT+CMGD
PIN 1
AT+CMGL
PIN 1
AT+CMGR
PIN 1
AT+CMGS
PIN 1
AT+CMGW
PIN 1
AT+CNMA
PIN 1
AT+CNMI
PIN 1
AT+COPN
PIN 1
AT+CPBR
PIN 1
AT+CPBS
PIN 1
AT+CPBW
PIN 1
AT+CPIN2
PIN 1
AT+CPMS
PIN 1
AT+CPUC
PIN 1, PIN 2
AT+CPWD
PIN 1, PIN 2
AT+CR write command
PIN 1
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 269 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
AT command
AT+CRSM
Depending on parameters <command> and <fileId>
AT+CSCA
AT+CSCB
AT+CSDH
AT+CSMP
AT+CSMS
AT+CUSD
Siemens defined AT commands
AT^MONP
AT^MONI
AT^SACM
AT^SCNI
AT^SDLD
AT^SLCD
AT^SLCK
AT^SMGL
AT^SMGO
AT^SMGR
AT^SMONC
AT^SMOND
AT^SPBC
AT^SPBG
AT^SPBS
AT^SPLM
AT^SPLR
AT^SPLW
AT^SPWD
AT^STCD
AT%D
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Required PIN
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1, PIN 2
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN1
PIN1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1
PIN 1, PIN 2
PIN 1
PIN1
Page 270 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.3
AT commands available before entering the SIM PIN
The following table summarizes the AT commands you can use before the SIM PIN has been entered.
Explanation:
l AT command usable without PIN
--- not usable without PIN
n.a. AT command not available at all
AT command
Test
Read
Standard V.25ter AT commands
AT\Q
n.a.
n.a.
ATD
n.a.
n.a
ATE
n.a.
n.a
ATI
n.a.
n.a
ATO
n.a.
n.a
ATQ
n.a.
n.a
l
ATS0
n.a.
l
ATS3
n.a.
l
ATS4
n.a.
l
ATS5
n.a.
l
ATS6
n.a.
l
ATS7
n.a.
l
ATS8
n.a.
l
ATS10
n.a.
l
ATS18
n.a
ATV
n.a.
n.a
ATX
n.a.
n.a
ATZ
n.a.
n.a
AT&C
n.a.
n.a
AT&D
n.a.
n.a
AT&F
n.a.
n.a
AT&V
n.a.
n.a
l
l
AT+ICF
l
l
AT+IFC
l
l
AT+IPR
AT commands originating from GSM 07.07
l
l
AT+CALA
l
l
AT+CBST
l
l
AT+CCLK
l
l
AT+CFUN
l
AT+CGMI
n.a.
l
AT+CGMM
n.a.
l
AT+CGMR
n.a.
l
AT+CGSN
n.a.
l
l
AT+CIND
l
AT+CLIP
--l
l
AT+CLVL
l
l
AT+CMEE
l
l
AT+CMGF
l
l
AT+CMUT
l
l
AT+CMUX
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Write /
Execute
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Note
For emergency calls only
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
Page 271 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
AT command
Test
Read
AT+COPS
AT+CPAS
AT+CPIN
AT+CRC
AT+CREG
AT+CRLP
AT+CR
AT+CRSM
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
n.a.
l
l
l
l
l
l
Write /
Execute
--l
l
l
l
l
PIN1
l
AT+CSCS
AT+CSNS
AT+CSQ
AT+CSSN
AT+GCAP
AT+GMI
AT+GMM
AT+GMR
AT+GSN
AT+VTD
AT+VTS
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
--l
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
n.a.
l
n.a.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
n.a.
l
l
l
n.a.
l
l
n.a.
l
l
l
n.a.
l
l
l
n.a.
l
l
l
l
l
n.a.
n.a.
l
l
l
n.a.
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
l
AT+VTS
l
AT+WS46
Siemens defined AT commands
l
AT+CXXCID
l
AT^SAIC
l
AT^SBC
l
AT^SCID
l
AT^SCKS
l
AT^SCTM
l
AT^SGSN
l
AT^SHOM
l
AT^SMSO
l
AT^SM20
l
AT^SNFA
l
AT^SNFD
l
AT^SNFI
l
AT^SNFM
l
AT^SNFO
l
AT^SNFS
l
AT^SNFV
l
AT^SNFW
l
AT^SPIC
l
AT^SSET
l
AT^SSMSS
l
AT^SSYNC
AT\V
n.a.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 272 of 278
Note
Depending on parameters
mand> and <fileId>
<com-
Usage of Write comd. before PIN1 authentication only for emergency calls.
12 (GSM digital cellular)
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.4
Standard GSM service codes
The following GSM command strings can be sent with the ATD command and must be terminated with
semicolon “;”. See also ATD in Chapter 2.5. Reference: GSM 2.30.
Table 20: GSM service codes
*# code
Functionality
Possible response(s)
*#06#
Query IMEI
<IMEI> OK
**04*oldPIN*newPIN*newPIN#
Change PIN1
+CME ERROR: <err> /
**042*oldPIN2*newPIN2*newPIN2#
Change PIN2
OK
**05*unblKey*newPIN*newPIN#
Unlock PIN 1. (Unblock SIM card after
3 failed attempts to enter PIN1)
See also Chapters 4.21, 4.35, 4.35.1,
Unlock PIN2 (after 3 failed attempts to 4.36.
enter PIN2)
Phone security
**052*unblKey*newPIN*newPIN#
*#0003*MasterPhoneCode#
Unlock “PS” lock with Master Phone
Code
*[*]03*[ZZ]*oldPw*newPw*newPw#
Registration of net password (change
call barring password)
Phone number presentation
*#30#
Check status of CLIP (Calling Line +CLIP: <n>,<m> OK (Cf. Chapter 4.22)
Identification Presentation)
*#31#
Check status of CLIR (Calling Line +CLIR: <n>,<m> OK (Cf. Chapter 4.23)
Identification Restriction)
*31#<Phonenumber>
Suppress CLIR
(Cf. Chapter 4.23)
#31#<Phonenumber>
Activate CLIR
(Cf. Chapter 4.23)
*#76#
Check status of COLP (Connected Line
Identification Presentation)
+COLP: 0,<m> OK (where <m> = active or
not active)
*#77#
Check status of COLR (Connected Line
Identification Restriction)
+COLR: 0,<m> OK (where <m> = active or
not active)
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)21*DN*BS#
Act/deact/int/reg/eras CFU
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)67*DN*BS#
Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF busy
^SCCFC: <reason>, <status>, <class1>[,
<number>, <type> [, <time>]]
<CR><LF>[^SCCFC: ...]OK
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)61*DN*BS*T#
Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF no reply
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)62*DN*BS#
Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF no reach
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)002*DN*BS*T#
Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF all
(choice of *,#,*#,**,##)004*DN*BS*T#
Act/deact/int/reg/eras CF all cond.
Call forwarding (see also Chapter 8.4.1)
Refer to Chapter 4.6 for a description of
parameters and Chapter 8.4.1 for differences regarding the responses ^SCCFC
and +CCFC.
Call waiting (see also Chapter 8.4.1)
(choice of *,#,*#)43*BS#
Activation/deactivation/int WAIT
+CCWA : <status>, <class><CR><LF>
[+CCWA...]OK. See Chapter 4.9.
(choice of *,#,*#)33*Pw*BS#
Act/deact/int BAOC
^SCLCK: <fac>, <status>, <class> [, ...]
(choice of *,#,*#)331*Pw*BS#
Act/deact/int BAOIC
(choice of *,#,*#)332*Pw*BS#
Act/deact/int BAOIC exc.home
Refer to Chapter 4.21 for a description of
parameters and Chapter 8.4.1 for differences regarding the responses ^SCLCK
and +CLCK.
Call barring (see also Chapter 8.4.1)
(choice of *,#,*#)35*Pw*BS#
Act/deact/int. BAIC
(choice of *,#,*#)351*Pw*BS#
Act/deact/int BAIC roaming
#330*Pw*BS#
Deact. All Barring Services
#333*Pw*BS#
Deact. All Outg.Barring Services
#353*Pw*BS#
Deactivation. All Inc.Barring Services
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 273 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
*# code
Functionality
Possible response(s)
Call hold and multiparty
+CME ERROR: <err> /
Call Hold / Multiparty
C[C] in call
OK
(see Chapter 4.16, p. 93)
USSD messages
[C]...[C]#
(varies with the serving network)
Send USSD message
C[C] (excluded 1[C])
(varies with the serving network)
Send USSD message
+CME ERROR: <err> /
OK
(see Chapter 4.48, p. 151)
+CME ERROR: <err> /
OK
(see Chapter 4.48, p. 151)
Abbreviations of codes and responses used in Table 20
Codes / parameters to be sent with ATD
ZZ = type of supplementary services:
Barring services
330
All services
Not specified
DN = dialing number:
String of digits 0-9
BS = basic service
Voice
11
equivalent to parameter <class>
FAX
13
SMS
16
SMS +FAX
12
Voice + FAX
19
Voice + SMS + FAX
10
Data circuit asynchron
25
Data circuit synchron
24
PAD
27
Packet
26
Data circuit asynchron + PAD
21
Data circuit synchron + packet
22
Data circuit asynchron + syncron. + PAD
20
All Services
--T = time in seconds
In contrast to AT command AT+CCFC, parameter T has no default value. If T is
not specified, an operator defined default or the last known value may be used,
depending on the network operator.
PW = Password
C = character of TE character set (e.g. asterix, hash or digit in case of USSD, or digits in case of held calls or multiparty calls)
Possible responses
<m>
Mode: 0 = not active, 1 = active
<n>
Unsolicited result code: 0 = presentation disabled, 1 = presentation enabled
<status>
Status: 0 = not active, 1 = active
<class>
Represents BS = basic service
See Chapters 4.6 (AT+CCFC), 4.21 (AT+CLCK) and 8.4.1.
<fac>
Facility lock. See Chapter 4.21 (AT+CLCK)
<reason>
Call forwarding reason
For specifications of the format and parameters for *# strings, please refer to GSM 02.30, Annex C,
and GSM 02.04, Table 3.2.
Function of *# codes for Supplementary Services
*# code
*
**
*#
#
##
Abbreviation used in
Chapter 8.4
act
Activate (except for CLIR, see list above)
reg
Register and activate
int
Check status (interrogate)
deact
Deactivate (except for CLIR, see list above)
eras
Unregister and deactivate
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Function
Page 274 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.4.1 Additional notes on ^SCCFC, +CCWA, ^SCLCK
The following is a brief summary of differences between the *# codes for Call Forwarding, Call Waiting
and Call Barring and their equivalent AT commands:
Differences regarding the syntax:
The number of parameters displayed in the ^SCCFC and ^SCLCK output strings differs from the
equivalent +CCFC and +CLCK output strings: In contrast to the +CCFC string, ^SCCFC also includes
the <reason>. Likewise, the ^SCLCK string includes additionally <fac>.
Response to atd*#21#; (query status of Call Forwarding Unconditional):
^SCCFC: <reason>, <status>, <class1>[, <number>, <type> [, <time>]]
Response to to at+ccfc=0,2 (query status of Call Forwarding Unconditional):
+CCFC: <status>, <class1>[, <number>, <type> [, <time>]]
Differences regarding default basic services / classes:
In the query mode, if no basic service is given, the *# codes use default <class> 15 (= voice, data, fax,
SMS). In contrast to this, the AT commands AT+CCFC, AT+CCWA, AT+CLCK, AT+SCLCK use default <class> 7 (=voice, data, fax).
Selected examples:
Querying the status of Call Forward- atd*#21#;
^SCCFC: 0,0,1
ing Unconditional
^SCCFC: 0,0,8
^SCCFC: 0,0,4
^SCCFC: 0,0,2
OK
at+ccfc=0,2
+CCFC: 0,1
+CCFC: 0,2
+CCFC: 0,4
OK
Querying the status of Call Waiting.
atd*#43#;
+CCWA: 1,1
+CCWA: 0,8
+CCWA: 1,4
+CCWA: 1,2
OK
at+ccwa=,2
+CCWA: 1,1
+CCWA: 1,2
+CCWA: 1,4
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 275 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
8.5
GSM alphabet tables and UCS2 character values
This section provides tables for the special GSM 03.38 alphabet supported by the ME (see chapter
1.5). Below each GSM character you can find the corresponding two byte UCS2 character value.
Main character table of
GSM 03.38 alphabet
1)
2)
b7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
b6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
b5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
b4
b3
b2
b1
0
0
0
0
0
@
0040
D
0394
SP
0020
0
0030
¡
00A1
P
0050
¿
00BF
p
0070
0
0
0
1
1
£
00A3
_
005F
!
0021
1
0031
A
0041
Q
0051
a
0061
q
0071
0
0
1
0
2
$
0024
F
03A6
"
0022
2
0032
B
0042
R
0052
b
0062
r
0072
0
0
1
1
3
¥
00A5
G
0393
#
0023
3
0033
C
0043
S
0053
c
0063
s
0073
0
1
0
0
4
è
00E8
L
039B
¤
00A4
4
0034
D
0044
T
0054
d
0064
t
0074
0
1
0
1
5
é
00E9
W
03A9
%
0025
5
0035
E
0045
U
0055
e
0065
u
0075
0
1
1
0
6
ù
00F9
P
03A0
&
0026
6
0036
F
0046
V
0056
f
0066
v
0076
0
1
1
1
7
ì
00EC
Y
03A8
'
0027
7
0037
G
0047
W
0057
g
0067
w
0077
1
0
0
0
8
ò
00F2
S
03A3
(
0028
8
0038
H
0048
X
0058
h
0068
x
0078
1
0
0
1
9
ç
00E7
Q
0398
)
0029
9
0039
I
0049
Y
0059
i
0069
y
0079
1
0
1
0
10 /A
LF
2)
[LF]
X
039E
*
002A
:
003A
J
004A
Z
005A
j
006A
z
007A
0
1
1
11 /B
Ø
00D8
1)
1
+
002B
;
003B
K
004B
Ä
00C4
k
006B
ä
00E4
1
1
0
0
12 /C
ø
00F8
Æ
00C6
,
002C
<
003C
L
004C
Ö
00D6
l
006C
ö
00F6
1
1
0
1
13 /D
CR
æ
2)
[CR]
00E6
002D
=
003D
M
004D
Ñ
00D1
m
006D
ñ
00F1
1
1
1
0
14 /E
Å
00C5
ß
00DF
.
002E
>
003E
N
Ü
n
004E 00DC 006E
ü
00FC
1
1
1
1
15 /F
å
00E5
É
00C9
/
002F
?
003F
O
004F
à
00E0
§
00A7
o
006F
This code is an escape to the following extension of the 7 bit default alphabet table.
This code is not a printable character and therefore not defined for the UCS2 alphabet. It shall be treated as
the accompanying control character.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 276 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
Extension character table of
GSM 03.38 alphabet
b7
0
0
0
0
1
1
1
1
b6
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
1
b5
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
0
1
2
3
4
5
6
7
b4
b3
b2
b1
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
0
1
1
0
0
1
0
2
0
0
1
1
3
0
1
0
0
4
0
1
0
1
5
0
1
1
0
6
0
1
1
1
7
1
0
0
0
8
{
007B
1
0
0
1
9
}
007D
1
0
1
0
10 /A
1
0
1
1
11 /B
1
1
0
0
12 /C
[
005B
1
1
0
1
13 /D
~
007E
1
1
1
0
14 /E
]
005D
1
1
1
1
15 /F
|
007C
^
005E
2)
€
20AC
3)
[LF]
1)
\
005C
In the event that an MS receives a code where a symbol is not represented in the above table
then the MS shall display the character shown in the main default 7 bit alphabet table.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 277 of 278
04.08.2003
TC35i AT Command Set
Confidential / Released
1) This code value is reserved for the extension to another extension table. On receipt of this
code, a receiving entity shall display a space until another extension table is defined.
2) This code represents the EURO currency symbol. The code value is the one used for the
character ‘e’. Therefore a receiving entity which is incapable of displaying the EURO currency symbol will display the character ‘e’ instead.
3) This code is defined as a Page Break character and may be used for example in compressed CBS messages. Any mobile which does not understand the 7 bit default alphabet
table extension mechanism will treat this character as Line Feed.
8.6
Sort order for phone books
Due to the support of UCS 2 for the "text" part of phonebook entries, the sort order for phonebook records follows the algorithm published as Unicode Technical Standard #10, "Unicode Collation Algorithm". A memory-optimized version of the proposed collation tables "[AllKeys]" from Unicode Technical Standard #10 is used in order to determine collation weights for Code points between 0000 and
06FF, and composed keys for Code points from ranges 0700 to 33FF, A000 to D7FF and E000 to
FFFD. Code Points not referenced in these tables will be assigned a default collation weight with their
unicode value as level 1 weight. Decomposition is not supported.
Phone book entries whose names contain only characters from the GSM07.07 default alphabet are
converted internally into their UCS 2 equivalents in order to achieve consistent sorting results.
For the user, this means that:
· Punctuation marks and other non-alphabetical characters from the common latin-based character
sets, and from the standard GSM character set, will be sorted before any alphabetical characters.
The order in which these marks appear as compared to other non-alphabetical characters from
the same group is determined by their collation weights and does not reflect their code values in
the UCS2 or GSM alphabet tables above. Please refer to www.unicode.org for detail.
· Alphabetical characters from the common latin-based character sets, and from the standard GSM
character set, will be sorted according to their underlying base characters, plus the collation
weights of their accent signs.
· Only collation levels 1 and 2 are regarded, so sorting is not case-sensitive.
Example: the European letters "å" (GSM 0FH), "a" (GSM 61H), "à" (GSM 7FH) and "b" (GSM 62H) will
be sorted in order "a", "à", "å", b, although their numerical values in GSM and UCS2 suggest a different ordering.
TC35i_ATC_V01.05
Page 278 of 278
04.08.2003